ACOG, SMFM, and others address safety concerns in labor and delivery

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 08/28/2018 - 11:05
Display Headline
ACOG, SMFM, and others address safety concerns in labor and delivery

At least half of all cases of maternal morbidity and mortality could be prevented, or so studies suggest.1,2

The main stumbling block?

Faulty communication.

That’s the word from the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, the Society for Maternal-Fetal Medicine, the American College of Nurse-Midwives, and the Association of Women’s Health, Obstetric and Neonatal Nurses.3

In a joint “blueprint” to transform communication and enhance the safety culture in intrapartum care, these organizations, led by Audrey Lyndon, PhD, RN, FAAN, from the University of California, San Francisco, School of Nursing, describe the extent of the problem, steps that various team members can take to improve safety, notable success stories, and communication strategies.3 In this article, the joint blueprint is summarized, with a focus on steps obstetricians can take to improve the intrapartum safety culture.

Scope of the problem
A study of more than 3,282 physicians, midwives, and registered nurses produced a troubling statistic: More than 90% of respondents said that they had “witnessed shortcuts, missing competencies, disrespect, or performance problems” during the preceding year of practice.4 Few of these clinicians reported that they had discussed their concerns with the parties involved.

A second study of 1,932 clinicians found that 34% of physicians, 40% of midwives, and 56% of registered nurses had witnessed patients being put at risk within the preceding 2 years by other team members’ inattentiveness or lack of responsiveness.5

These findings suggest that health care providers often witness weak links in intrapartum safety but do not always address or report them. Among the reasons team members may be hesitant to speak up when they perceive a potential problem:

 

  • feelings of resignation or inability to change the situation
  • fear of retribution or ridicule
  • fear of interpersonal or intrateam conflict.

Although Lyndon and colleagues acknowledge that it is impossible to eliminate adverse outcomes entirely or completely eradicate human error, they argue that significant improvements can be made by adopting a number of manageable strategies.

Recommended strategies
Lyndon and colleagues describe some of the challenges of effective communication in a health care setting:

 

The communication of safety concerns involves more than simply sending and receiving clinical data. Speaking up about safety concerns is a dynamic social process that is highly context-dependent and is influenced by multiple personal, group, and organizational factors…Highly reliable organizations have a generative safety culture in which everyone is proactively responsible for safety, expertise is valued over positional authority, and there is a clear understanding of how people in diverse roles are dependent on each other to achieve safe, high-quality care.3

Lyndon and colleagues go on to mention a number of strategies to improve communication, boost safety, and reduce medical errors.

1. Remember that the patient is part of the team
The patient and her family play a key role in identifying the potential for harm during labor and delivery, Lyndon and colleagues assert. They should be considered members of the intrapartum team, care should be patient-focused, and any communications from the patient should not only be heard but fully considered. In fact, explicit elicitation of her experience and concerns is recommended.

2. Consider that you might be part of the problem
It is human nature to attribute a communication problem to the other people involved, rather than take responsibility for it oneself. One potential solution to this mindset is team training, where all members are encouraged to communicate clearly and listen attentively. Organizations that have been successful at improving their culture of safety have implemented such training, as well as the use of checklists, training in fetal heart-rate monitoring, formation of a patient safety committee, external review of safety practices, and designation of a key clinician to lead the safety program and oversee team training.

3. Structure handoffs 
The team should standardize handoffs so that they occur smoothly and all channels of communication remain open and clear.

“Having structured formats for debriefing and handoffs are steps in the right direction, but solving the problem of communication breakdowns is more complicated than standardizing the flow and format of information transfer,” Lyndon and colleagues assert. “Indeed, solving communication breakdowns is a matter of individual, group, organizational, and professional responsibility for creating and sustaining an environment of mutual respect, curiosity, and accountability for behavior and performance.”3

4. Learn to communicate responsibly
“Differences of opinion about clinical assessments, goals of care, and the pathway to optimal outcomes are bound to occur with some regularity in the dynamic environment of labor and delivery,” note Lyndon and colleagues. “Every person has the responsibility to contribute to improving how we relate to and communicate with each other. Collectively, we must create environments in which every team member (woman, family member, physician, midwife, nurse, unit clerk, patient care assistant, or scrub tech) is comfortable expressing and discussing concerns about safety or performance, is encouraged to do so, and has the support of the team to articulate the rationale for and urgency of the concern without fear of put-downs, retribution, or receiving poor-quality care.”3

 

 

5. Be persistent and proactive
When team members have differing expectations and communication styles, useful approaches include structured communication tools such as situation, background, assessment, recommendation (SBAR); structured handoffs; board rounds; huddles; attentive listening; and explicit elicitation of the patient’s concerns and desires.3

If someone fails to pay attention to a concern you raise, be persistent about restating that concern until you elicit a response.

If someone exhibits disruptive behavior, point to or establish a code of conduct that clearly describes professional behavior.

If there is a difference of opinion on patient management, such as fetal monitoring and interpretation, conduct regular case reviews and standardize a plan for notification of complications.

6. If you’re a team leader, set clear goals
Then ask team members what will be needed to achieve the outcomes desired.

“Team leaders need to develop outstanding skills for listening and eliciting feedback and cross-monitoring (being aware of each other’s actions and performance) from other team members,” note Lyndon and colleagues.

7. Increase public awareness of safety concepts
When these concepts and best practices are made known to the public, women and families become “empowered” to speak up when they have concerns about care.

And when they do speak up, it pays to listen.

 

Share your thoughts on this article! Send your Letter to the Editor to [email protected]. Please include your name and the city and state in which you practice.

References

 

1. Geller SE, Rosenberg D, Cox SM, et al. The continuum of maternal morbidity and mortality: factors associated with severity. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 2004;191(3):939–944.

2. Mitchell C, Lawton E, Morton C, McCain C, Holtby S, Main E. California Pregnancy-Associated Mortality Review: mixed methods approach for improved case identification, cause of death analyses and translation of findings. Matern Child Health J. 2014;18(3):518–526.

3. Lyndon A, Johnson MC, Bingham D, et al. Transforming communication and safety culture in intrapartum care: a multi-organization blueprint. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5):1049–1055.

4. Maxfield DG, Lyndon A, Kennedy HP, O’Keeffe DF, Ziatnik MG. Confronting safety gaps across labor and delivery teams. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 2013;209(5):402–408.e3.

5. Lyndon A, Zlatnik MG, Maxfield DG, Lewis A, McMillan C, Kennedy HP. Contributions of clinical disconnections and unresolved conflict to failures in intrapartum safety. J Obstet Gynecol Neonatal Nurs. 2014;43(1):2–12.

Author and Disclosure Information

 

Janelle Yates, Senior Editor

Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Publications
Topics
Legacy Keywords
Janelle Yates, Audrey Lyndon PhD RN,maternal morbidity,maternal mortality,ACOG,American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists,SMFM,Society for Maternal-Fetal Medicine,the American College of Nurse-Midwives,the Association of Women’s Health,Obstetric and Neonatal Nurses,safety concerns, labor, delivery,communication,University of California San Francisco School of Nursing,intrapartum,safety concerns,Structure handoffs,
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

 

Janelle Yates, Senior Editor

Author and Disclosure Information

 

Janelle Yates, Senior Editor

Related Articles

At least half of all cases of maternal morbidity and mortality could be prevented, or so studies suggest.1,2

The main stumbling block?

Faulty communication.

That’s the word from the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, the Society for Maternal-Fetal Medicine, the American College of Nurse-Midwives, and the Association of Women’s Health, Obstetric and Neonatal Nurses.3

In a joint “blueprint” to transform communication and enhance the safety culture in intrapartum care, these organizations, led by Audrey Lyndon, PhD, RN, FAAN, from the University of California, San Francisco, School of Nursing, describe the extent of the problem, steps that various team members can take to improve safety, notable success stories, and communication strategies.3 In this article, the joint blueprint is summarized, with a focus on steps obstetricians can take to improve the intrapartum safety culture.

Scope of the problem
A study of more than 3,282 physicians, midwives, and registered nurses produced a troubling statistic: More than 90% of respondents said that they had “witnessed shortcuts, missing competencies, disrespect, or performance problems” during the preceding year of practice.4 Few of these clinicians reported that they had discussed their concerns with the parties involved.

A second study of 1,932 clinicians found that 34% of physicians, 40% of midwives, and 56% of registered nurses had witnessed patients being put at risk within the preceding 2 years by other team members’ inattentiveness or lack of responsiveness.5

These findings suggest that health care providers often witness weak links in intrapartum safety but do not always address or report them. Among the reasons team members may be hesitant to speak up when they perceive a potential problem:

 

  • feelings of resignation or inability to change the situation
  • fear of retribution or ridicule
  • fear of interpersonal or intrateam conflict.

Although Lyndon and colleagues acknowledge that it is impossible to eliminate adverse outcomes entirely or completely eradicate human error, they argue that significant improvements can be made by adopting a number of manageable strategies.

Recommended strategies
Lyndon and colleagues describe some of the challenges of effective communication in a health care setting:

 

The communication of safety concerns involves more than simply sending and receiving clinical data. Speaking up about safety concerns is a dynamic social process that is highly context-dependent and is influenced by multiple personal, group, and organizational factors…Highly reliable organizations have a generative safety culture in which everyone is proactively responsible for safety, expertise is valued over positional authority, and there is a clear understanding of how people in diverse roles are dependent on each other to achieve safe, high-quality care.3

Lyndon and colleagues go on to mention a number of strategies to improve communication, boost safety, and reduce medical errors.

1. Remember that the patient is part of the team
The patient and her family play a key role in identifying the potential for harm during labor and delivery, Lyndon and colleagues assert. They should be considered members of the intrapartum team, care should be patient-focused, and any communications from the patient should not only be heard but fully considered. In fact, explicit elicitation of her experience and concerns is recommended.

2. Consider that you might be part of the problem
It is human nature to attribute a communication problem to the other people involved, rather than take responsibility for it oneself. One potential solution to this mindset is team training, where all members are encouraged to communicate clearly and listen attentively. Organizations that have been successful at improving their culture of safety have implemented such training, as well as the use of checklists, training in fetal heart-rate monitoring, formation of a patient safety committee, external review of safety practices, and designation of a key clinician to lead the safety program and oversee team training.

3. Structure handoffs 
The team should standardize handoffs so that they occur smoothly and all channels of communication remain open and clear.

“Having structured formats for debriefing and handoffs are steps in the right direction, but solving the problem of communication breakdowns is more complicated than standardizing the flow and format of information transfer,” Lyndon and colleagues assert. “Indeed, solving communication breakdowns is a matter of individual, group, organizational, and professional responsibility for creating and sustaining an environment of mutual respect, curiosity, and accountability for behavior and performance.”3

4. Learn to communicate responsibly
“Differences of opinion about clinical assessments, goals of care, and the pathway to optimal outcomes are bound to occur with some regularity in the dynamic environment of labor and delivery,” note Lyndon and colleagues. “Every person has the responsibility to contribute to improving how we relate to and communicate with each other. Collectively, we must create environments in which every team member (woman, family member, physician, midwife, nurse, unit clerk, patient care assistant, or scrub tech) is comfortable expressing and discussing concerns about safety or performance, is encouraged to do so, and has the support of the team to articulate the rationale for and urgency of the concern without fear of put-downs, retribution, or receiving poor-quality care.”3

 

 

5. Be persistent and proactive
When team members have differing expectations and communication styles, useful approaches include structured communication tools such as situation, background, assessment, recommendation (SBAR); structured handoffs; board rounds; huddles; attentive listening; and explicit elicitation of the patient’s concerns and desires.3

If someone fails to pay attention to a concern you raise, be persistent about restating that concern until you elicit a response.

If someone exhibits disruptive behavior, point to or establish a code of conduct that clearly describes professional behavior.

If there is a difference of opinion on patient management, such as fetal monitoring and interpretation, conduct regular case reviews and standardize a plan for notification of complications.

6. If you’re a team leader, set clear goals
Then ask team members what will be needed to achieve the outcomes desired.

“Team leaders need to develop outstanding skills for listening and eliciting feedback and cross-monitoring (being aware of each other’s actions and performance) from other team members,” note Lyndon and colleagues.

7. Increase public awareness of safety concepts
When these concepts and best practices are made known to the public, women and families become “empowered” to speak up when they have concerns about care.

And when they do speak up, it pays to listen.

 

Share your thoughts on this article! Send your Letter to the Editor to [email protected]. Please include your name and the city and state in which you practice.

At least half of all cases of maternal morbidity and mortality could be prevented, or so studies suggest.1,2

The main stumbling block?

Faulty communication.

That’s the word from the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, the Society for Maternal-Fetal Medicine, the American College of Nurse-Midwives, and the Association of Women’s Health, Obstetric and Neonatal Nurses.3

In a joint “blueprint” to transform communication and enhance the safety culture in intrapartum care, these organizations, led by Audrey Lyndon, PhD, RN, FAAN, from the University of California, San Francisco, School of Nursing, describe the extent of the problem, steps that various team members can take to improve safety, notable success stories, and communication strategies.3 In this article, the joint blueprint is summarized, with a focus on steps obstetricians can take to improve the intrapartum safety culture.

Scope of the problem
A study of more than 3,282 physicians, midwives, and registered nurses produced a troubling statistic: More than 90% of respondents said that they had “witnessed shortcuts, missing competencies, disrespect, or performance problems” during the preceding year of practice.4 Few of these clinicians reported that they had discussed their concerns with the parties involved.

A second study of 1,932 clinicians found that 34% of physicians, 40% of midwives, and 56% of registered nurses had witnessed patients being put at risk within the preceding 2 years by other team members’ inattentiveness or lack of responsiveness.5

These findings suggest that health care providers often witness weak links in intrapartum safety but do not always address or report them. Among the reasons team members may be hesitant to speak up when they perceive a potential problem:

 

  • feelings of resignation or inability to change the situation
  • fear of retribution or ridicule
  • fear of interpersonal or intrateam conflict.

Although Lyndon and colleagues acknowledge that it is impossible to eliminate adverse outcomes entirely or completely eradicate human error, they argue that significant improvements can be made by adopting a number of manageable strategies.

Recommended strategies
Lyndon and colleagues describe some of the challenges of effective communication in a health care setting:

 

The communication of safety concerns involves more than simply sending and receiving clinical data. Speaking up about safety concerns is a dynamic social process that is highly context-dependent and is influenced by multiple personal, group, and organizational factors…Highly reliable organizations have a generative safety culture in which everyone is proactively responsible for safety, expertise is valued over positional authority, and there is a clear understanding of how people in diverse roles are dependent on each other to achieve safe, high-quality care.3

Lyndon and colleagues go on to mention a number of strategies to improve communication, boost safety, and reduce medical errors.

1. Remember that the patient is part of the team
The patient and her family play a key role in identifying the potential for harm during labor and delivery, Lyndon and colleagues assert. They should be considered members of the intrapartum team, care should be patient-focused, and any communications from the patient should not only be heard but fully considered. In fact, explicit elicitation of her experience and concerns is recommended.

2. Consider that you might be part of the problem
It is human nature to attribute a communication problem to the other people involved, rather than take responsibility for it oneself. One potential solution to this mindset is team training, where all members are encouraged to communicate clearly and listen attentively. Organizations that have been successful at improving their culture of safety have implemented such training, as well as the use of checklists, training in fetal heart-rate monitoring, formation of a patient safety committee, external review of safety practices, and designation of a key clinician to lead the safety program and oversee team training.

3. Structure handoffs 
The team should standardize handoffs so that they occur smoothly and all channels of communication remain open and clear.

“Having structured formats for debriefing and handoffs are steps in the right direction, but solving the problem of communication breakdowns is more complicated than standardizing the flow and format of information transfer,” Lyndon and colleagues assert. “Indeed, solving communication breakdowns is a matter of individual, group, organizational, and professional responsibility for creating and sustaining an environment of mutual respect, curiosity, and accountability for behavior and performance.”3

4. Learn to communicate responsibly
“Differences of opinion about clinical assessments, goals of care, and the pathway to optimal outcomes are bound to occur with some regularity in the dynamic environment of labor and delivery,” note Lyndon and colleagues. “Every person has the responsibility to contribute to improving how we relate to and communicate with each other. Collectively, we must create environments in which every team member (woman, family member, physician, midwife, nurse, unit clerk, patient care assistant, or scrub tech) is comfortable expressing and discussing concerns about safety or performance, is encouraged to do so, and has the support of the team to articulate the rationale for and urgency of the concern without fear of put-downs, retribution, or receiving poor-quality care.”3

 

 

5. Be persistent and proactive
When team members have differing expectations and communication styles, useful approaches include structured communication tools such as situation, background, assessment, recommendation (SBAR); structured handoffs; board rounds; huddles; attentive listening; and explicit elicitation of the patient’s concerns and desires.3

If someone fails to pay attention to a concern you raise, be persistent about restating that concern until you elicit a response.

If someone exhibits disruptive behavior, point to or establish a code of conduct that clearly describes professional behavior.

If there is a difference of opinion on patient management, such as fetal monitoring and interpretation, conduct regular case reviews and standardize a plan for notification of complications.

6. If you’re a team leader, set clear goals
Then ask team members what will be needed to achieve the outcomes desired.

“Team leaders need to develop outstanding skills for listening and eliciting feedback and cross-monitoring (being aware of each other’s actions and performance) from other team members,” note Lyndon and colleagues.

7. Increase public awareness of safety concepts
When these concepts and best practices are made known to the public, women and families become “empowered” to speak up when they have concerns about care.

And when they do speak up, it pays to listen.

 

Share your thoughts on this article! Send your Letter to the Editor to [email protected]. Please include your name and the city and state in which you practice.

References

 

1. Geller SE, Rosenberg D, Cox SM, et al. The continuum of maternal morbidity and mortality: factors associated with severity. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 2004;191(3):939–944.

2. Mitchell C, Lawton E, Morton C, McCain C, Holtby S, Main E. California Pregnancy-Associated Mortality Review: mixed methods approach for improved case identification, cause of death analyses and translation of findings. Matern Child Health J. 2014;18(3):518–526.

3. Lyndon A, Johnson MC, Bingham D, et al. Transforming communication and safety culture in intrapartum care: a multi-organization blueprint. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5):1049–1055.

4. Maxfield DG, Lyndon A, Kennedy HP, O’Keeffe DF, Ziatnik MG. Confronting safety gaps across labor and delivery teams. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 2013;209(5):402–408.e3.

5. Lyndon A, Zlatnik MG, Maxfield DG, Lewis A, McMillan C, Kennedy HP. Contributions of clinical disconnections and unresolved conflict to failures in intrapartum safety. J Obstet Gynecol Neonatal Nurs. 2014;43(1):2–12.

References

 

1. Geller SE, Rosenberg D, Cox SM, et al. The continuum of maternal morbidity and mortality: factors associated with severity. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 2004;191(3):939–944.

2. Mitchell C, Lawton E, Morton C, McCain C, Holtby S, Main E. California Pregnancy-Associated Mortality Review: mixed methods approach for improved case identification, cause of death analyses and translation of findings. Matern Child Health J. 2014;18(3):518–526.

3. Lyndon A, Johnson MC, Bingham D, et al. Transforming communication and safety culture in intrapartum care: a multi-organization blueprint. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5):1049–1055.

4. Maxfield DG, Lyndon A, Kennedy HP, O’Keeffe DF, Ziatnik MG. Confronting safety gaps across labor and delivery teams. Am J Obstet Gynecol. 2013;209(5):402–408.e3.

5. Lyndon A, Zlatnik MG, Maxfield DG, Lewis A, McMillan C, Kennedy HP. Contributions of clinical disconnections and unresolved conflict to failures in intrapartum safety. J Obstet Gynecol Neonatal Nurs. 2014;43(1):2–12.

Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
ACOG, SMFM, and others address safety concerns in labor and delivery
Display Headline
ACOG, SMFM, and others address safety concerns in labor and delivery
Legacy Keywords
Janelle Yates, Audrey Lyndon PhD RN,maternal morbidity,maternal mortality,ACOG,American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists,SMFM,Society for Maternal-Fetal Medicine,the American College of Nurse-Midwives,the Association of Women’s Health,Obstetric and Neonatal Nurses,safety concerns, labor, delivery,communication,University of California San Francisco School of Nursing,intrapartum,safety concerns,Structure handoffs,
Legacy Keywords
Janelle Yates, Audrey Lyndon PhD RN,maternal morbidity,maternal mortality,ACOG,American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists,SMFM,Society for Maternal-Fetal Medicine,the American College of Nurse-Midwives,the Association of Women’s Health,Obstetric and Neonatal Nurses,safety concerns, labor, delivery,communication,University of California San Francisco School of Nursing,intrapartum,safety concerns,Structure handoffs,
Sections

Clinicians are adept at estimating uterine size prior to benign hysterectomy

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 08/28/2018 - 11:05
Display Headline
Clinicians are adept at estimating uterine size prior to benign hysterectomy

In a poster presented at the 2015 ACOG Annual Clinical Meeting in San Francisco, Neal Marc Lonky, MD, and colleagues from the Southern California Permanente Group assessed the clinical acumen of physicians in estimating uterine size prior to elective hysterectomy for benign indications. They found that the correlation between estimates and actual uterine weight was 0.79 (P<.001), with a very low conversion rate for the surgery.1

Lonky and colleagues collected preoperative uterine estimates and actual specimen weights prospectively for 1,079 cases of benign hysterectomy. The surgeries were performed by 186 primary surgeons and assistant surgeons at 10 Kaiser Permanente Southern California medical centers. Surgeons based the route of hysterectomy on estimates of uterine size, which were calculated using bimanual examination, ultrasonography, or both. Linear regression was used to measure and compare the relationship between estimated uterine size and the pelvic specimen weight.

Uterine size estimates ranged from 4 cm to 40 cm, and specimen weights ranged from 2 g to 4,607 g. The mean (SD) estimate of uterine size was 11.7 (4.43) cm, and the mean actual specimen weight was 334.6 (401.42) g.

The mean age of women in the sample was 47.2 (8.35) years. Overall, 379 women (35.1%) were Hispanic, 325 (30.1%) were non-Hispanic white, 281 (26.0%) were non-Hispanic black, and 81 (7.5%) were Asian/Pacific Islander. The mean body mass index (BMI) was 30.0 (6.37) kg/m2, with a range of 16.8 to 67.9 kg/m2.

“This is real world research,” said Dr. Lonky. “It’s called comparative effectiveness research. Basically, all patients who are undergoing the procedure are entered in the registry, and the clinical acumen of the physician—either using or not using ultrasound—is assessed.”  

“We looked at whether or not we had a bias toward one patient age group, race/ethnicity, BMI, or estimated uterine size. But there were no clusters, so this was truly a random distribution,” said Dr. Lonky.

“These findings may be population-specific to my group of doctors,” he added. “They should be replicated in other settings. It may be that residents are not going to be as linear.”

References

Reference

  1. Lonky NM, Chiu V, Mohan Y. Clinical utility of the estimation of uterine size in planning hysterectomy approach. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5 suppl):19S.
Author and Disclosure Information

Janelle Yates, Senior Editor

Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Publications
Topics
Legacy Keywords
Janelle Yates, Neal Marc Lonky MD, Southern California Permanente Group, 2015 ACOG Annual Clinical Meeting, American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, estimating uterine size prior to benign hysterectomy, uterine size, benign hysterectomy, preoperative uterine estimates, actual specimen weights, Kaiser Permanente Southern California medical centers,bimanual examination, ultrasonography,
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

Janelle Yates, Senior Editor

Author and Disclosure Information

Janelle Yates, Senior Editor

Related Articles

In a poster presented at the 2015 ACOG Annual Clinical Meeting in San Francisco, Neal Marc Lonky, MD, and colleagues from the Southern California Permanente Group assessed the clinical acumen of physicians in estimating uterine size prior to elective hysterectomy for benign indications. They found that the correlation between estimates and actual uterine weight was 0.79 (P<.001), with a very low conversion rate for the surgery.1

Lonky and colleagues collected preoperative uterine estimates and actual specimen weights prospectively for 1,079 cases of benign hysterectomy. The surgeries were performed by 186 primary surgeons and assistant surgeons at 10 Kaiser Permanente Southern California medical centers. Surgeons based the route of hysterectomy on estimates of uterine size, which were calculated using bimanual examination, ultrasonography, or both. Linear regression was used to measure and compare the relationship between estimated uterine size and the pelvic specimen weight.

Uterine size estimates ranged from 4 cm to 40 cm, and specimen weights ranged from 2 g to 4,607 g. The mean (SD) estimate of uterine size was 11.7 (4.43) cm, and the mean actual specimen weight was 334.6 (401.42) g.

The mean age of women in the sample was 47.2 (8.35) years. Overall, 379 women (35.1%) were Hispanic, 325 (30.1%) were non-Hispanic white, 281 (26.0%) were non-Hispanic black, and 81 (7.5%) were Asian/Pacific Islander. The mean body mass index (BMI) was 30.0 (6.37) kg/m2, with a range of 16.8 to 67.9 kg/m2.

“This is real world research,” said Dr. Lonky. “It’s called comparative effectiveness research. Basically, all patients who are undergoing the procedure are entered in the registry, and the clinical acumen of the physician—either using or not using ultrasound—is assessed.”  

“We looked at whether or not we had a bias toward one patient age group, race/ethnicity, BMI, or estimated uterine size. But there were no clusters, so this was truly a random distribution,” said Dr. Lonky.

“These findings may be population-specific to my group of doctors,” he added. “They should be replicated in other settings. It may be that residents are not going to be as linear.”

In a poster presented at the 2015 ACOG Annual Clinical Meeting in San Francisco, Neal Marc Lonky, MD, and colleagues from the Southern California Permanente Group assessed the clinical acumen of physicians in estimating uterine size prior to elective hysterectomy for benign indications. They found that the correlation between estimates and actual uterine weight was 0.79 (P<.001), with a very low conversion rate for the surgery.1

Lonky and colleagues collected preoperative uterine estimates and actual specimen weights prospectively for 1,079 cases of benign hysterectomy. The surgeries were performed by 186 primary surgeons and assistant surgeons at 10 Kaiser Permanente Southern California medical centers. Surgeons based the route of hysterectomy on estimates of uterine size, which were calculated using bimanual examination, ultrasonography, or both. Linear regression was used to measure and compare the relationship between estimated uterine size and the pelvic specimen weight.

Uterine size estimates ranged from 4 cm to 40 cm, and specimen weights ranged from 2 g to 4,607 g. The mean (SD) estimate of uterine size was 11.7 (4.43) cm, and the mean actual specimen weight was 334.6 (401.42) g.

The mean age of women in the sample was 47.2 (8.35) years. Overall, 379 women (35.1%) were Hispanic, 325 (30.1%) were non-Hispanic white, 281 (26.0%) were non-Hispanic black, and 81 (7.5%) were Asian/Pacific Islander. The mean body mass index (BMI) was 30.0 (6.37) kg/m2, with a range of 16.8 to 67.9 kg/m2.

“This is real world research,” said Dr. Lonky. “It’s called comparative effectiveness research. Basically, all patients who are undergoing the procedure are entered in the registry, and the clinical acumen of the physician—either using or not using ultrasound—is assessed.”  

“We looked at whether or not we had a bias toward one patient age group, race/ethnicity, BMI, or estimated uterine size. But there were no clusters, so this was truly a random distribution,” said Dr. Lonky.

“These findings may be population-specific to my group of doctors,” he added. “They should be replicated in other settings. It may be that residents are not going to be as linear.”

References

Reference

  1. Lonky NM, Chiu V, Mohan Y. Clinical utility of the estimation of uterine size in planning hysterectomy approach. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5 suppl):19S.
References

Reference

  1. Lonky NM, Chiu V, Mohan Y. Clinical utility of the estimation of uterine size in planning hysterectomy approach. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5 suppl):19S.
Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Clinicians are adept at estimating uterine size prior to benign hysterectomy
Display Headline
Clinicians are adept at estimating uterine size prior to benign hysterectomy
Legacy Keywords
Janelle Yates, Neal Marc Lonky MD, Southern California Permanente Group, 2015 ACOG Annual Clinical Meeting, American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, estimating uterine size prior to benign hysterectomy, uterine size, benign hysterectomy, preoperative uterine estimates, actual specimen weights, Kaiser Permanente Southern California medical centers,bimanual examination, ultrasonography,
Legacy Keywords
Janelle Yates, Neal Marc Lonky MD, Southern California Permanente Group, 2015 ACOG Annual Clinical Meeting, American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, estimating uterine size prior to benign hysterectomy, uterine size, benign hysterectomy, preoperative uterine estimates, actual specimen weights, Kaiser Permanente Southern California medical centers,bimanual examination, ultrasonography,
Sections
Article Source

PURLs Copyright

Inside the Article

Hospital Medicine 2015 Photo Gallery - Day One

Article Type
Changed
Fri, 09/14/2018 - 12:10
Display Headline
Hospital Medicine 2015 Photo Gallery - Day One

Photographs from the first day of Hospital Medicine 2015, which took place March 29-April 1 at the Gaylord National Hotel and Conference Center in National Harbor, Md.

Photos by Manuel Noguera

[gallery ids="9553,9555,9556,9557,9558,9559,9560,9561,9562,9563,9564,9565,9566,9567,9568,9569,9570,9571,9572,9573,9574,9575,9576,9577,9578,9579,9580,9581,9582,9583,9584"]

 

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2015(05)
Publications
Sections

Photographs from the first day of Hospital Medicine 2015, which took place March 29-April 1 at the Gaylord National Hotel and Conference Center in National Harbor, Md.

Photos by Manuel Noguera

[gallery ids="9553,9555,9556,9557,9558,9559,9560,9561,9562,9563,9564,9565,9566,9567,9568,9569,9570,9571,9572,9573,9574,9575,9576,9577,9578,9579,9580,9581,9582,9583,9584"]

 

Photographs from the first day of Hospital Medicine 2015, which took place March 29-April 1 at the Gaylord National Hotel and Conference Center in National Harbor, Md.

Photos by Manuel Noguera

[gallery ids="9553,9555,9556,9557,9558,9559,9560,9561,9562,9563,9564,9565,9566,9567,9568,9569,9570,9571,9572,9573,9574,9575,9576,9577,9578,9579,9580,9581,9582,9583,9584"]

 

Issue
The Hospitalist - 2015(05)
Issue
The Hospitalist - 2015(05)
Publications
Publications
Article Type
Display Headline
Hospital Medicine 2015 Photo Gallery - Day One
Display Headline
Hospital Medicine 2015 Photo Gallery - Day One
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)

Is the use of a containment bag at minimally invasive hysterectomy or myomectomy effective at reducing tissue spillage?

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 08/28/2018 - 11:05
Display Headline
Is the use of a containment bag at minimally invasive hysterectomy or myomectomy effective at reducing tissue spillage?

Tissue extraction during laparoscopic or robot-assisted laparoscopic gynecologic surgery raises safety concerns for dissemination of tissue during the open, or uncontained, electromechanical morcellation process. Researchers from Brigham & Women’s Hospital in Boston, Massachusetts, investigated whether contained tissue extraction using power morcellators entirely within a bag is safe and practical for preventing tissue spillage. Goggins and colleagues presented their findings in a poster at the 2015 Annual Clinical Meeting of the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists in San Francisco, California.

A total of 76 women at 4 institutions underwent laparoscopic or robotic multiport surgery (42 hysterectomy; 34 myomectomy). The average (SD) age and body mass index of the women were 43.16 (8.53) years and 26.47 kg/m2 (5.93), respectively. After surgical dissection, each specimen was placed into a containment bag that also included blue dye. The bag was insufflated intracorporeally and electromechanical morcellation and extraction of tissue were performed. The bag was evaluated visually for dye leakage or tears before and after the procedure.

Results
In one case, there was a tear in the bag before morcellation; no bag tears occurred during the morcellation process. Spillage of dye or tissue was noted in 7 cases, although containment bags were intact in each instance. One patient experienced intraoperative blood loss (3600 mL), and that procedure was converted to open radical hysterectomy. The most common pathologic finding was benign leiomyoma.

Conclusion
Goggins and colleagues concluded, “Contained tissue extraction using electromechanical morcellation and intracorporeally insufflated bags may provide a safe alternative to uncontained morcellation by decreasing the spread of tissue in the peritoneal cavity while allowing for the traditional benefits of laparoscopy.”

Share your thoughts! Send your Letter to the Editor to [email protected]. Please include your name and the city and state in which you practice.

References

Reference

 

  1. Goggins ER, Greenberg JA, Cohen SL, Morris SN, Brown DN, Einarsson JI. Efficacy of contained tissue extraction for minimizing tissue dissemination during laparoscopic hysterectomy and myomectomy. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5)(suppl):29S.
Author and Disclosure Information

 

Deborah Reale, Managing Editor

Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Publications
Topics
Legacy Keywords
Deborah Reale, tissue extraction, containment bag, minimally invasive surgery, hysterectomy, myomectomy, reduce tissue spillage, Brigham & Women's Hospital, laparoscopic or robot-assisted laparoscopic gynecologic surgery, dissemination of tissue, electromechanical morcellation, open power morcellation, contained tissue extraction using power morcellators entirely within a bag, 2015 Annual Clinical Meeting of the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, ACOG, body mass index, contained tissue extraction using electromechanical morcellation and intracorporeally insufflated bags
Sections
Author and Disclosure Information

 

Deborah Reale, Managing Editor

Author and Disclosure Information

 

Deborah Reale, Managing Editor

Related Articles

Tissue extraction during laparoscopic or robot-assisted laparoscopic gynecologic surgery raises safety concerns for dissemination of tissue during the open, or uncontained, electromechanical morcellation process. Researchers from Brigham & Women’s Hospital in Boston, Massachusetts, investigated whether contained tissue extraction using power morcellators entirely within a bag is safe and practical for preventing tissue spillage. Goggins and colleagues presented their findings in a poster at the 2015 Annual Clinical Meeting of the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists in San Francisco, California.

A total of 76 women at 4 institutions underwent laparoscopic or robotic multiport surgery (42 hysterectomy; 34 myomectomy). The average (SD) age and body mass index of the women were 43.16 (8.53) years and 26.47 kg/m2 (5.93), respectively. After surgical dissection, each specimen was placed into a containment bag that also included blue dye. The bag was insufflated intracorporeally and electromechanical morcellation and extraction of tissue were performed. The bag was evaluated visually for dye leakage or tears before and after the procedure.

Results
In one case, there was a tear in the bag before morcellation; no bag tears occurred during the morcellation process. Spillage of dye or tissue was noted in 7 cases, although containment bags were intact in each instance. One patient experienced intraoperative blood loss (3600 mL), and that procedure was converted to open radical hysterectomy. The most common pathologic finding was benign leiomyoma.

Conclusion
Goggins and colleagues concluded, “Contained tissue extraction using electromechanical morcellation and intracorporeally insufflated bags may provide a safe alternative to uncontained morcellation by decreasing the spread of tissue in the peritoneal cavity while allowing for the traditional benefits of laparoscopy.”

Share your thoughts! Send your Letter to the Editor to [email protected]. Please include your name and the city and state in which you practice.

Tissue extraction during laparoscopic or robot-assisted laparoscopic gynecologic surgery raises safety concerns for dissemination of tissue during the open, or uncontained, electromechanical morcellation process. Researchers from Brigham & Women’s Hospital in Boston, Massachusetts, investigated whether contained tissue extraction using power morcellators entirely within a bag is safe and practical for preventing tissue spillage. Goggins and colleagues presented their findings in a poster at the 2015 Annual Clinical Meeting of the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists in San Francisco, California.

A total of 76 women at 4 institutions underwent laparoscopic or robotic multiport surgery (42 hysterectomy; 34 myomectomy). The average (SD) age and body mass index of the women were 43.16 (8.53) years and 26.47 kg/m2 (5.93), respectively. After surgical dissection, each specimen was placed into a containment bag that also included blue dye. The bag was insufflated intracorporeally and electromechanical morcellation and extraction of tissue were performed. The bag was evaluated visually for dye leakage or tears before and after the procedure.

Results
In one case, there was a tear in the bag before morcellation; no bag tears occurred during the morcellation process. Spillage of dye or tissue was noted in 7 cases, although containment bags were intact in each instance. One patient experienced intraoperative blood loss (3600 mL), and that procedure was converted to open radical hysterectomy. The most common pathologic finding was benign leiomyoma.

Conclusion
Goggins and colleagues concluded, “Contained tissue extraction using electromechanical morcellation and intracorporeally insufflated bags may provide a safe alternative to uncontained morcellation by decreasing the spread of tissue in the peritoneal cavity while allowing for the traditional benefits of laparoscopy.”

Share your thoughts! Send your Letter to the Editor to [email protected]. Please include your name and the city and state in which you practice.

References

Reference

 

  1. Goggins ER, Greenberg JA, Cohen SL, Morris SN, Brown DN, Einarsson JI. Efficacy of contained tissue extraction for minimizing tissue dissemination during laparoscopic hysterectomy and myomectomy. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5)(suppl):29S.
References

Reference

 

  1. Goggins ER, Greenberg JA, Cohen SL, Morris SN, Brown DN, Einarsson JI. Efficacy of contained tissue extraction for minimizing tissue dissemination during laparoscopic hysterectomy and myomectomy. Obstet Gynecol. 2015;125(5)(suppl):29S.
Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Issue
OBG Management - 27(5)
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Is the use of a containment bag at minimally invasive hysterectomy or myomectomy effective at reducing tissue spillage?
Display Headline
Is the use of a containment bag at minimally invasive hysterectomy or myomectomy effective at reducing tissue spillage?
Legacy Keywords
Deborah Reale, tissue extraction, containment bag, minimally invasive surgery, hysterectomy, myomectomy, reduce tissue spillage, Brigham & Women's Hospital, laparoscopic or robot-assisted laparoscopic gynecologic surgery, dissemination of tissue, electromechanical morcellation, open power morcellation, contained tissue extraction using power morcellators entirely within a bag, 2015 Annual Clinical Meeting of the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, ACOG, body mass index, contained tissue extraction using electromechanical morcellation and intracorporeally insufflated bags
Legacy Keywords
Deborah Reale, tissue extraction, containment bag, minimally invasive surgery, hysterectomy, myomectomy, reduce tissue spillage, Brigham & Women's Hospital, laparoscopic or robot-assisted laparoscopic gynecologic surgery, dissemination of tissue, electromechanical morcellation, open power morcellation, contained tissue extraction using power morcellators entirely within a bag, 2015 Annual Clinical Meeting of the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, ACOG, body mass index, contained tissue extraction using electromechanical morcellation and intracorporeally insufflated bags
Sections
PURLs Copyright

Disallow All Ads
Alternative CME
Use ProPublica

Patients may need extended VTE prophylaxis, doc says

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 05/04/2015 - 06:00
Display Headline
Patients may need extended VTE prophylaxis, doc says

Thrombus

Photo by Andre E.X. Brown

SEATTLE—Patients who undergo surgery for lung cancer may have a higher risk of developing venous thromboembolism (VTE) than we thought, according to a

new study.

About 12% of the patients studied developed deep vein thrombosis (DVT), pulmonary embolism (PE), or both, although they had received VTE prophylaxis until hospital discharge.

Only about 21% of these patients showed symptoms of VTE, and the clots conferred a higher risk of mortality at 30 days.

“This study shows that a significant proportion of lung cancer surgery patients are at risk of VTE and indicates a need for future research into minimizing the occurrence of DVT and PE,” said investigator Yaron Shargall, MD, of McMaster University in Hamilton, Ontario, Canada.

“It is possible that extended use of blood thinners beyond hospital discharge may reduce the number of patients who experience these life-threatening events and may help to reduce the rates of death after lung surgery.”

Dr Shargall presented this viewpoint at the 95th Annual Meeting of the American Association for Thoracic Surgery.

For their study, he and his colleagues evaluated 157 patients who underwent thoracic surgery for primary lung cancer (89.9%) or metastatic cancer (6.3%).

All patients received unfractionated heparin or low-molecular-weight heparin and graduated compression stockings as VTE prophylaxis from the time of surgery until leaving the hospital.

Two weeks later, these patients were evaluated for signs and symptoms of VTE. The investigators evaluated clinical outcomes at 30 ± 5 days post-operatively using CT pulmonary angiography and bilateral Doppler venous ultrasonography.

Patients who had developed symptoms suggestive of VTE within the 30 days after surgery underwent urgent CT-PE examination and had a repeat scan 30 days after surgery if the first scan was negative. Patients with VTE were monitored and treated.

In all, there were 19 VTEs, a 12.1% incidence rate. These included 14 PEs (8.9%), 3 DVTs (1.9%), and 1 combined PE/DVT. One patient developed a massive left atrial thrombus originating from a surgical stump and died.

For all 157 patients, the 30-day mortality rate was 0.64%. For those with VTE, it was 5.2%.

“This demonstrates the clinical importance and relative fatality of VTE following lung cancer surgery,” Dr Shargall said.

All of the patients who were diagnosed with a VTE had undergone anatomic resections (lobectomy or segmentectomy), and most had primary lung cancer. The clots tended to form on the same side as the lung surgery. The majority of patients developed lung clots without forming DVTs beforehand.

The investigators examined factors that might distinguish patients who developed VTEs from those who did not and could not find differences in patient age, lung function, hospital length of stay, comorbidities, lung cancer stage, smoking status, or Caprini Score.

Among patients diagnosed with a VTE, only 4 (21.1%) showed symptoms. All the events were diagnosed after the patient left the hospital and only because these patients were screened for VTEs as part of the study.

Publications
Topics

Thrombus

Photo by Andre E.X. Brown

SEATTLE—Patients who undergo surgery for lung cancer may have a higher risk of developing venous thromboembolism (VTE) than we thought, according to a

new study.

About 12% of the patients studied developed deep vein thrombosis (DVT), pulmonary embolism (PE), or both, although they had received VTE prophylaxis until hospital discharge.

Only about 21% of these patients showed symptoms of VTE, and the clots conferred a higher risk of mortality at 30 days.

“This study shows that a significant proportion of lung cancer surgery patients are at risk of VTE and indicates a need for future research into minimizing the occurrence of DVT and PE,” said investigator Yaron Shargall, MD, of McMaster University in Hamilton, Ontario, Canada.

“It is possible that extended use of blood thinners beyond hospital discharge may reduce the number of patients who experience these life-threatening events and may help to reduce the rates of death after lung surgery.”

Dr Shargall presented this viewpoint at the 95th Annual Meeting of the American Association for Thoracic Surgery.

For their study, he and his colleagues evaluated 157 patients who underwent thoracic surgery for primary lung cancer (89.9%) or metastatic cancer (6.3%).

All patients received unfractionated heparin or low-molecular-weight heparin and graduated compression stockings as VTE prophylaxis from the time of surgery until leaving the hospital.

Two weeks later, these patients were evaluated for signs and symptoms of VTE. The investigators evaluated clinical outcomes at 30 ± 5 days post-operatively using CT pulmonary angiography and bilateral Doppler venous ultrasonography.

Patients who had developed symptoms suggestive of VTE within the 30 days after surgery underwent urgent CT-PE examination and had a repeat scan 30 days after surgery if the first scan was negative. Patients with VTE were monitored and treated.

In all, there were 19 VTEs, a 12.1% incidence rate. These included 14 PEs (8.9%), 3 DVTs (1.9%), and 1 combined PE/DVT. One patient developed a massive left atrial thrombus originating from a surgical stump and died.

For all 157 patients, the 30-day mortality rate was 0.64%. For those with VTE, it was 5.2%.

“This demonstrates the clinical importance and relative fatality of VTE following lung cancer surgery,” Dr Shargall said.

All of the patients who were diagnosed with a VTE had undergone anatomic resections (lobectomy or segmentectomy), and most had primary lung cancer. The clots tended to form on the same side as the lung surgery. The majority of patients developed lung clots without forming DVTs beforehand.

The investigators examined factors that might distinguish patients who developed VTEs from those who did not and could not find differences in patient age, lung function, hospital length of stay, comorbidities, lung cancer stage, smoking status, or Caprini Score.

Among patients diagnosed with a VTE, only 4 (21.1%) showed symptoms. All the events were diagnosed after the patient left the hospital and only because these patients were screened for VTEs as part of the study.

Thrombus

Photo by Andre E.X. Brown

SEATTLE—Patients who undergo surgery for lung cancer may have a higher risk of developing venous thromboembolism (VTE) than we thought, according to a

new study.

About 12% of the patients studied developed deep vein thrombosis (DVT), pulmonary embolism (PE), or both, although they had received VTE prophylaxis until hospital discharge.

Only about 21% of these patients showed symptoms of VTE, and the clots conferred a higher risk of mortality at 30 days.

“This study shows that a significant proportion of lung cancer surgery patients are at risk of VTE and indicates a need for future research into minimizing the occurrence of DVT and PE,” said investigator Yaron Shargall, MD, of McMaster University in Hamilton, Ontario, Canada.

“It is possible that extended use of blood thinners beyond hospital discharge may reduce the number of patients who experience these life-threatening events and may help to reduce the rates of death after lung surgery.”

Dr Shargall presented this viewpoint at the 95th Annual Meeting of the American Association for Thoracic Surgery.

For their study, he and his colleagues evaluated 157 patients who underwent thoracic surgery for primary lung cancer (89.9%) or metastatic cancer (6.3%).

All patients received unfractionated heparin or low-molecular-weight heparin and graduated compression stockings as VTE prophylaxis from the time of surgery until leaving the hospital.

Two weeks later, these patients were evaluated for signs and symptoms of VTE. The investigators evaluated clinical outcomes at 30 ± 5 days post-operatively using CT pulmonary angiography and bilateral Doppler venous ultrasonography.

Patients who had developed symptoms suggestive of VTE within the 30 days after surgery underwent urgent CT-PE examination and had a repeat scan 30 days after surgery if the first scan was negative. Patients with VTE were monitored and treated.

In all, there were 19 VTEs, a 12.1% incidence rate. These included 14 PEs (8.9%), 3 DVTs (1.9%), and 1 combined PE/DVT. One patient developed a massive left atrial thrombus originating from a surgical stump and died.

For all 157 patients, the 30-day mortality rate was 0.64%. For those with VTE, it was 5.2%.

“This demonstrates the clinical importance and relative fatality of VTE following lung cancer surgery,” Dr Shargall said.

All of the patients who were diagnosed with a VTE had undergone anatomic resections (lobectomy or segmentectomy), and most had primary lung cancer. The clots tended to form on the same side as the lung surgery. The majority of patients developed lung clots without forming DVTs beforehand.

The investigators examined factors that might distinguish patients who developed VTEs from those who did not and could not find differences in patient age, lung function, hospital length of stay, comorbidities, lung cancer stage, smoking status, or Caprini Score.

Among patients diagnosed with a VTE, only 4 (21.1%) showed symptoms. All the events were diagnosed after the patient left the hospital and only because these patients were screened for VTEs as part of the study.

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Patients may need extended VTE prophylaxis, doc says
Display Headline
Patients may need extended VTE prophylaxis, doc says
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica

Simpler, more cost-effective way to grow stem cells

Article Type
Changed
Mon, 05/04/2015 - 05:00
Display Headline
Simpler, more cost-effective way to grow stem cells

Binata Joddar, PhD

Photo courtesy of University

of Texas at El Paso

Researchers say they have developed a protocol to prepare human induced pluripotent stem (hiPS) cells using chemically fixed feeder cells.

This method saves time and money by avoiding the need for colony formation of live feeder cells, which is required by current conventional methods.

The new protocol challenges the theory that live feeder cells are required to provide nutrients to growing stem cells.

“We’ve proved an important phenomenon,” said Binata Joddar, PhD, of the University of Texas at El Paso. “And it suggests that these feeder cells, which are difficult to grow, may not be important at all for stem cell growth.”

Dr Joddar and her colleagues described the phenomenon in Journal of Materials Chemistry B.

Using 2.5% glutaraldehyde (GA) or formaldehyde (FA) for 10 minutes, the researchers prepared a niche matrix from autologus human dermal fibroblast (HDF) feeder cells.

They then introduced hiPS cells to the niche matrix, which adhered to and were maintained as colonies on the fixed feeder cells.

The colony doubling times of the cells grown this way were similar to those of hiPS cells grown on mitomycin-C-treated HDF or SNL feeders. (SNL cells are derived from mouse fibroblast STO cells transformed with a neomycin resistance gene.)

But the colony doubling time for the hiPS cells was shorter with the fixed feeder than for cells cultured on laminin-5.

The researchers also discovered that the average number of colonies per passage was signficiantly higher for hiPS cells cultured on fixed feeder cells compared to those cultured without feeders.

They noted hiPS cells cultured on gelatin did not grow beyond the first passage.

The team concluded that the two types of chemically fixed HDF feeder cells (HDF-glutaraldehyde and HDF-formaldehyde) can be used as substitutes for mitomycin-C-treated HDF feeders to culture hiPS cells.

This new method would not extend the doubling time, would save preparation time, and would avoid labor-intensive protocols to prepare.

In addition, after chemical fixation, the feeder cells are non-viable and cannot release active growth factors or chemokines into the cell culture. Therefore, fixed feeder cells can be refrigerated for long-term storage prior to use.

“Because feeder cells don’t need to stay alive in the process, we can store them at room temperature and spend less time cultivating them,” Dr Joddar said.

“This makes me think that we [could] use a nanomanufacturing approach to grow stem cells. We could mimic feeder cells’ nanotopology with 3-D printing techniques and skip using feeder cells altogether in the future.”

Publications
Topics

Binata Joddar, PhD

Photo courtesy of University

of Texas at El Paso

Researchers say they have developed a protocol to prepare human induced pluripotent stem (hiPS) cells using chemically fixed feeder cells.

This method saves time and money by avoiding the need for colony formation of live feeder cells, which is required by current conventional methods.

The new protocol challenges the theory that live feeder cells are required to provide nutrients to growing stem cells.

“We’ve proved an important phenomenon,” said Binata Joddar, PhD, of the University of Texas at El Paso. “And it suggests that these feeder cells, which are difficult to grow, may not be important at all for stem cell growth.”

Dr Joddar and her colleagues described the phenomenon in Journal of Materials Chemistry B.

Using 2.5% glutaraldehyde (GA) or formaldehyde (FA) for 10 minutes, the researchers prepared a niche matrix from autologus human dermal fibroblast (HDF) feeder cells.

They then introduced hiPS cells to the niche matrix, which adhered to and were maintained as colonies on the fixed feeder cells.

The colony doubling times of the cells grown this way were similar to those of hiPS cells grown on mitomycin-C-treated HDF or SNL feeders. (SNL cells are derived from mouse fibroblast STO cells transformed with a neomycin resistance gene.)

But the colony doubling time for the hiPS cells was shorter with the fixed feeder than for cells cultured on laminin-5.

The researchers also discovered that the average number of colonies per passage was signficiantly higher for hiPS cells cultured on fixed feeder cells compared to those cultured without feeders.

They noted hiPS cells cultured on gelatin did not grow beyond the first passage.

The team concluded that the two types of chemically fixed HDF feeder cells (HDF-glutaraldehyde and HDF-formaldehyde) can be used as substitutes for mitomycin-C-treated HDF feeders to culture hiPS cells.

This new method would not extend the doubling time, would save preparation time, and would avoid labor-intensive protocols to prepare.

In addition, after chemical fixation, the feeder cells are non-viable and cannot release active growth factors or chemokines into the cell culture. Therefore, fixed feeder cells can be refrigerated for long-term storage prior to use.

“Because feeder cells don’t need to stay alive in the process, we can store them at room temperature and spend less time cultivating them,” Dr Joddar said.

“This makes me think that we [could] use a nanomanufacturing approach to grow stem cells. We could mimic feeder cells’ nanotopology with 3-D printing techniques and skip using feeder cells altogether in the future.”

Binata Joddar, PhD

Photo courtesy of University

of Texas at El Paso

Researchers say they have developed a protocol to prepare human induced pluripotent stem (hiPS) cells using chemically fixed feeder cells.

This method saves time and money by avoiding the need for colony formation of live feeder cells, which is required by current conventional methods.

The new protocol challenges the theory that live feeder cells are required to provide nutrients to growing stem cells.

“We’ve proved an important phenomenon,” said Binata Joddar, PhD, of the University of Texas at El Paso. “And it suggests that these feeder cells, which are difficult to grow, may not be important at all for stem cell growth.”

Dr Joddar and her colleagues described the phenomenon in Journal of Materials Chemistry B.

Using 2.5% glutaraldehyde (GA) or formaldehyde (FA) for 10 minutes, the researchers prepared a niche matrix from autologus human dermal fibroblast (HDF) feeder cells.

They then introduced hiPS cells to the niche matrix, which adhered to and were maintained as colonies on the fixed feeder cells.

The colony doubling times of the cells grown this way were similar to those of hiPS cells grown on mitomycin-C-treated HDF or SNL feeders. (SNL cells are derived from mouse fibroblast STO cells transformed with a neomycin resistance gene.)

But the colony doubling time for the hiPS cells was shorter with the fixed feeder than for cells cultured on laminin-5.

The researchers also discovered that the average number of colonies per passage was signficiantly higher for hiPS cells cultured on fixed feeder cells compared to those cultured without feeders.

They noted hiPS cells cultured on gelatin did not grow beyond the first passage.

The team concluded that the two types of chemically fixed HDF feeder cells (HDF-glutaraldehyde and HDF-formaldehyde) can be used as substitutes for mitomycin-C-treated HDF feeders to culture hiPS cells.

This new method would not extend the doubling time, would save preparation time, and would avoid labor-intensive protocols to prepare.

In addition, after chemical fixation, the feeder cells are non-viable and cannot release active growth factors or chemokines into the cell culture. Therefore, fixed feeder cells can be refrigerated for long-term storage prior to use.

“Because feeder cells don’t need to stay alive in the process, we can store them at room temperature and spend less time cultivating them,” Dr Joddar said.

“This makes me think that we [could] use a nanomanufacturing approach to grow stem cells. We could mimic feeder cells’ nanotopology with 3-D printing techniques and skip using feeder cells altogether in the future.”

Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Simpler, more cost-effective way to grow stem cells
Display Headline
Simpler, more cost-effective way to grow stem cells
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default
Use ProPublica

Patient Satisfaction Variance Prediction

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 05/16/2017 - 23:12
Display Headline
Demographic factors and hospital size predict patient satisfaction variance—implications for hospital value‐based purchasing

The Affordable Care Act of 2010 mandates that government payments to hospitals and physicians must depend, in part, on metrics that assess the quality and efficiency of healthcare being provided to encourage value‐based healthcare.[1] Value in healthcare is defined by the delivery of high‐quality care at low cost.[2, 3] To this end, Hospital Value‐Based Purchasing (HVBP) and Physician Value‐Based Payment Modifier programs have been developed by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS). HVBP is currently being phased in and affects CMS payments for fiscal year (FY) 2013 for over 3000 hospitals across the United States to incentivize healthcare delivery value. The final phase of implementation will be in FY 2017 and will then affect 2% of all CMS hospital reimbursement. HVBP is based on objective measures of hospital performance as well as a subjective measure of performance captured under the Patient Experience of Care domain. This subjective measure will remain at 30% of the aggregate score until FY 2016, when it will then be 25% the aggregate score moving forward.[4] The program rewards hospitals for both overall achievement and improvement in any domain, so that hospitals have multiple ways to receive financial incentives for providing quality care.[5] Even still, there appears to be a nonrandom pattern of patient satisfaction scores across the country with less favorable scores clustering in densely populated areas.[6]

Value‐Based Purchasing and other incentive‐based programs have been criticized for increasing disparities in healthcare by penalizing larger hospitals (including academic medical centers, safety‐net hospitals, and others that disproportionately serve lower socioeconomic communities) and favoring physician‐based specialty hospitals.[7, 8, 9] Therefore, hospitals that serve indigent and elderly populations may be at a disadvantage.[9, 10] HVBP portends significant economic consequences for the majority of hospitals that rely heavily on Medicare and Medicaid reimbursement, as most hospitals have large revenues but low profit margins.[11] Higher HVBP scores are associated with for profit status, smaller size, and location in certain areas of the United States.[12] Jha et al.[6] described Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores regional geographic variability, but concluded that poor satisfaction was due to poor quality.

The Patient Experience of Care domain quantifies patient satisfaction using the validated HCAHPS survey, which is provided to a random sample of patients continuously throughout the year at 48 hours to 6 weeks after discharge. It is a publically available standardized survey instrument used to measure patients perspectives on hospital care. It assesses the following 8 dimensions: nurse communication, doctor communication, hospital staff responsiveness, pain management, medicine communication, discharge information, hospital cleanliness and quietness, and overall hospital rating, of which the last 2 dimensions each have 2 measures (cleanliness and quietness) and (rating 9 or 10 and definitely recommend) to give a total of 10 distinct measures.

The United States is a complex network of urban, suburban, and rural demographic areas. Hospitals exist within a unique contextual and compositional meshwork that determines its caseload. The top population density decile of the United States lives within 37 counties, whereas half of the most populous parts of the United States occupy a total of 250 counties out of a total of 3143 counties in the United States. If the 10 measures of patient satisfaction (HCAHPS) scores were abstracted from hospitals and viewed according to county‐level population density (separated into deciles across the United States), a trend would be apparent (Figure 1). Greater population density is associated with lower patient satisfaction in 9 of 10 categories. On the state level, composite scores of overall patient satisfaction (amount of positive scores) of hospitals show a 12% variability and a significant correlation with population density (r=0.479; Figure 2). The lowest overall satisfaction scores are obtained from hospitals located in the population‐dense regions of Washington, DC, New York State, California, Maryland, and New Jersey (ie, 63%65%), and the best scores are from Louisiana, South Dakota, Iowa, Maine, and Vermont (ie, 74%75%). The average patient satisfaction score is 71%2.9%. Lower patient satisfaction scores appear to cluster in population‐dense areas and may be associated with greater heterogeneous patient demographics and economic variability in addition to population density.

Figure 1
Overall patient satisfaction by population density decile. Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores are segregated by population density deciles (representing 33 million people each). Population density increases along the grey scale. The composite score and 9 out of 10 HCAHPS dimensions demonstrate lower patient satisfaction as population density increases (darker shade). Abbreviations: Doc, doctor; Def Rec, definitely recommend.
Figure 2
Averaged Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores by state correlated with state population (Pop) density. Bivariate correlation of composite HCAHPS scores predicted by state population density without District of Columbia, r = −0.479, P < 0.001 (2‐tailed). This observed correlation informed the hypothesis that population density could predict for lower patient satisfaction via HCAHPS scores.

These observations are surprising considering that CMS already adjusts HCAHPS scores based on patient‐mix coefficients and mode of collection.[13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18] Adjustments are updated multiple times per year and account for survey collection either by telephone, email, or paper survey, because the populations that select survey forms will differ. Previous studies have shown that demographic features influence the patient evaluation process. For example, younger and more educated patients were found to provide less positive evaluations of healthcare.[19]

This study examined whether patients perceptions of healthcare (pattern of patient satisfaction) as quantified under the patient experience domain of HVBP were affected and predicted by population density and other demographic factors that are outside the control of individual hospitals. In addition, hospital‐level data (eg, number of hospital beds) and county‐level data such as race, age, gender, overall population, income, time spent commuting to work, primary language, and place of birth were analyzed for correlation with patient satisfaction scores. Our study demonstrates that demographic and hospital‐level data can predict patient satisfaction scores and suggests that CMS may need to modify its adjustment formulas to eliminate bias in HVBP‐based reimbursement.

METHODS

Data Collection

Publically available data were obtained from Hospital Compare,[20] American Hospital Directory,[21] and the US Census Bureau[22] websites. Twenty relevant US Census data categories were selected by their relevance for this study out of the 50 publically reported US Census categories, and included the following: county population, county population density, percent of population change over 1 year, poverty level (percent), income level per capita, median household income, average household size, travel time to work, percentage of high school or college graduates, non‐English primary language spoken at home, percentage of residents born outside of the United States, population percent in same residence for over 1 year, gender, race (white alone, white alone (not Hispanic or Latino), black or African American alone), population over 65 years old, and population under 18 years old.

HCAHPS Development

The HCAHPS survey is 32 questions in length, comprised of 10 evaluative dimensions. All short‐term, acute care, nonspecialty hospitals are invited to participate in the HCAHPS survey.

Data Analysis

Statistical analyses used the Statistical Package for Social Sciences version 16.0 for Windows (SPSS Inc., Chicago, IL). Data were checked for statistical assumptions, including normality, linearity of relationships, and full range of scores. Categories in both the Hospital Compare (HCAHPS) and US Census datasets were analyzed to assess their distribution curves. The category of population densities (per county) was converted to a logarithmic scale to account for a skewed distribution and long tail in the area of low population density. Data were subsequently merged into an Excel (Microsoft, Redmond, WA) spreadsheet using the VLookup function such that relevant 2010 census county data were added to each hospital's Hospital Compare data. Linear regression modeling was performed. Bivariate analysis was conducted (ENTER method) to determine the significant US Census data predictors for each of the 10 Hospital Compare dimensions including the composite overall satisfaction score. Significant predictors were then analyzed in a multivariate model (BACKWORDS method) for each Hospital Compare dimension and the composite average positive score. Models were assessed by determinates of correlation (adjusted R2) to assess for goodness of fit. Statistically significant predictor variables for overall patient satisfaction scores were then ranked according to their partial regression coefficients (standardized ).

A patient satisfaction predictive model was sought based upon significant predictors of aggregate percent positive HCAHPS scores. Various predictor combinations were formed based on their partial coefficients (ie, standardized coefficients); combinations were assessed based on their R2 values and assessed for colinearity. Combinations of partial coefficients included the 2, 4, and 8 most predictive variables as well the 2 most positive and negative predictors. They were then incorporated into a multivariate analysis model (FORWARD method) and assessed based on their adjusted R2 values. A 4‐variable combination (the 2 most predictive positive partial coefficients plus the 2 most predictive negative partial coefficients) was selected as a predictive model, and a formula predictive of the composite overall satisfaction score was generated. This formula (predicted patient satisfaction formula [PPSF]) predicts hospital patient satisfaction HCAHPS scores based on the 4 predictive variables for particular county and hospital characteristics. PPSF=KMV+BHB(HB)+BNE(NE)+BE(E)+BW(W)where KMV=coefficient constant (70.9), B=unstandardized coefficient (see Table 1 for values), HB=number of hospital beds, NE=proportion of non‐English speakers, E=education (proportion with bachelor's degree), and W=proportion identified as white race only.

Multivariate Regression of Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) Average Positive Score by County and Hospital Demographics
 BSE tP
  • NOTE: A multivariate linear regression model of statistically significant dimensions of patient satisfaction as determined by Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems scores is provided. The dependent variable is the composite of average patient satisfaction scores by hospital (3192 hospitals). Predictors (independent variables) were collected from US Census data for counties or county equivalents. All of the listed predictors (first column) are statistically significant. They are placed in order of partial regression coefficient contribution to the model from most positive to most negative contribution. Adjusted R2 (last row) is used to signify the goodness of fit. Abbreviations: , standardized (partial coefficient); B, unstandardized coefficient; P, statistical significance; SE, standard error; t, t statistic.

Educational attainmentbachelor's degree0.1570.0180.278.612<0.001
White alone percent 20120.090.0120.2357.587<0.001
Resident population percent under 18 years0.4040.04440.2099.085<0.001
Black or African American alone percent 20120.0830.0140.1915.936<0.001
Median household income 200720110.000030.000.0622.0270.043
Population density (log) 20100.2770.0830.0873.33330.001
Average travel time to work0.1070.0240.0884.366<0.001
Educational attainmenthigh school0.0820.0260.0883.1470.002
Average household size2.580.7270.1073.55<0.001
Total females percent 20120.4230.0670.1076.296<0.001
Percent nonEnglish speaking at home 200720110.0520.0180.142.9290.003
No. of hospital beds0.0060.000.21312.901<0.001
Adjusted R20.222    

The PPSF was then modified by weighting with the partial coefficient () to remove the bias in patient satisfaction generated by demographic and structural factors over which individual hospitals have limited or no control. This formula generated a Weighted Individual (hospital) Predicted Patient Satisfaction Score (WIPPSS). Application of this formula narrowed the predicted distribution of patient satisfaction for all hospitals across the country. WIPPSS=KMV+BHB(HB)(1HB)+BNE(NE)(1NE)+BE(E)(1E)+BW(W)(1W)where =standardized coefficient (see Table 1 for values).

To create an adjusted score with direct relevance to the reported patient satisfaction scores, the reported scores were multiplied by an adjustment factor that defines the difference between individual hospital‐weighted scores and the national mean HCAHPS score across the United States. This formula, the Weighted Individual (hospital) Patient Satisfaction Adjustment Score (WIPSAS), represents a patient satisfaction score adjusted for demographic and structural factors that can be utilized for interhospital comparisons across all areas of the country. WIPSAS=PSrep[1+(PSUSAWIPPSSX)/100]

where PSrep=patient satisfaction reported score, PSUSA=mean reported score for United States (71.84), and WIPPSSX=WIPPSS for individual hospital.

Application of Data Analysis

PPSF, WIPPSS, and WIPSAS were calculated for all HCAHPS‐participating hospitals and compared with averaged raw HCAHPS scores across the United States. WIPSAS and raw scores were specifically analyzed for New York State to demonstrate exactly how adjustments would change state‐level rankings.

RESULTS

Complete HCAHPS scores were obtained from 3907 hospitals out of a total 4621 hospitals listed by the Hospital Compare website (85%). The majority of hospitals (2884) collected over 300 surveys, fewer hospitals (696) collected 100 to 299 surveys, and fewer still (333) collected <100 surveys. In total, results were available from at least 934,800 individual surveys, by the most conservative estimate. Missing HCAHPS hospital data averaged 13.4 (standard deviation [SD] 12.2) hospitals per state. County‐level data were obtained from all 3144 county or county equivalents across the United States (100%). Multivariate regression modeling across all HCAHPS dimensions found that between 10 and 16 of the 20 predictors (US Census categories) were statistically significant and predictive of individual HCAHPS dimension scores and the aggregate percent positive score as demonstrated in Table 2. For example, county percentage of bachelors degrees positively predicts for positive doctor communication scores, and hospital beds negatively predicts for quiet dimension. The strongest positive and negative predictive variables by model regression coefficients for each HCAHPS dimension are also listed in Table 2.

Multivariate Regression of Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems by County and Hospital Demographics
 Average Positive ScoresNurse CommunicationDoctor CommunicationHelpPainExplain MedsCleanQuietDischarge ExplainRecommend 9/10Definitely Recommend
  • NOTE: Linear regression modeling results of 10 dimensions of patient satisfaction (ie, Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems [HCAHPS]) and Average Positive Scores (top row) by county demographics and hospital size (left column) are shown. Adjusted R2 (last row) is used to signify the goodness of fit. All models are statistically significant with P=<0.001. Partial regression coefficients () are used to positively or negatively assess contribution to the individual models (ie, each column). The dash () indicates nonsignificance and the asterisk (*) indicates a value that was statistically significant in univariate analysis but not in multivariate analysis. Independent variables (first column) are ordered from top to bottom by the number of HCAHPS dimensions that each contributes to HCAHPS predictive scoring.

Educationalbachelor's0.270.190.450.100.100.050.080.330.150.270.416
Hospital beds0.210.160.190.260.160.170.270.260.060.11 
Population density 20100.090.070.280.200.080.230.140.190.220.07*
White alone percent0.240.250.090.160.230.070.16 0.170.310.317
Total females percent0.110.050.060.070.060.030.050.090.120.09 
African American alone0.190.19 0.090.230.090.070.34*0.090.084
Average travel time to work0.090.10*0.090.060.040.08*0.120.170.16
Foreign‐born percent*0.160.140.060.120.080.060.130.18**
Average household size0.110.050.150.07*0.07*0.01*0.070.076
NonEnglish speaking0.140.120.500.07*****0.340.28
Educationhigh school0.090.090.40*   0.270.060.08*
Household income0.06*0.350.08**0.160.41  0.265
Population 65 years and over*0.140.140.12*0.110.15  *0.10
White, not Hispanic/Latino**0.20***0.090.130.090.220.25
Population under 180.21 0.15 0.08   0.110.20 
Population (county)*0.060.08*0.030.05**0.06**
All ages in poverty  0.24   0.100.220.08*0.281
1 year at same residence*0.130.120.11  0.10*0.04**
Per capita income*0.07*****0.09  *
Population percent change******0.05  **
Adjusted R20.220.250.300.300.120.170.230.300.190.140.15

Table 1 highlights multivariate regression modeling of the composite average positive score, which produced an adjusted R2 of 0.222 (P<0.001). All variables were significant and predicted change of the composite HCAHPS except for place of birthforeign born (not listed in the table). Table 1 ranks variables from most positive to most negative predictors.

Other HCAHPS domains demonstrated statistically significant models (P<0.001) and are listed by their coefficients of determination (ie, adjusted R2) (Table 2). The best‐fit dimensions were help (adjusted R2=0.304), quiet (adjusted R2=0.299), doctor communication (adjusted R2=0.298), nurse communication (adjusted R2=0.245), and clean (adjusted R2=0.232). Models that were not as strongly predictive as the composite score included pain (adjusted R2=0.124), overall 9/10 (adjusted R2=0.136), definitely recommend (adjusted R2=0.150), and explained meds (adjusted R2=0.169).

A predictive formula for average positive scores was created by determination of the most predictive partial coefficients and the best‐fit model. Bachelor's degree and white only were the 2 greatest positive predictors, and number of hospital beds and nonEnglish speaking were the 2 greatest negative predictors. The PPSF (predictive formula) was chosen out of various combinations of predictors (Table 1), because its coefficient of determination (adjusted R2=0.155) was closest to the overall model's coefficient of determination (adjusted R2=0.222) without demonstrating colinearity. Possible predictive formulas were based on the predictors standardized and included the following combinations: the 2 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.051), the 2 greatest negative and positive predictors (adjusted R2=0.098), the 4 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.117), and the 8 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.201), which suffered from colinearity (household size plus nonEnglish speaking [Pearson=0.624] and under 18 years old [Pearson=0.708]). None of the correlated independent variables (eg, poverty and median income) were placed in the final model.

The mean WIPSAS scores closely corresponded with the national average of HCAHPS scores (71.6 vs 71.84) but compressed scores into a narrower distribution (SD 5.52 vs 5.92). The greatest positive and negative changes were by 8.51% and 2.25%, respectively. Essentially, a smaller number of hospitals in demographically challenged areas were more significantly impacted by the WIPSAS adjustment than the larger number of hospitals in demographically favorable areas. Large hospitals in demographically diverse counties saw the greatest positive change (e.g., Texas, California, and New York), whereas smaller hospitals in demographically nondiverse areas saw comparatively smaller decrements in the overall WIPSAS scores. The WIPSAS had the most beneficial effect on urban and rural safety‐net hospitals that serve diverse populations including many academic medical centers. This is illustrated by the reranking of the top 10 and bottom 10 hospitals in New York State by the WIPSAS (Table 3). For example, 3 academic medical centers in New York State, Montefiore Medical Center, New York Presbyterian Hospital, and Mount Sinai Hospital, were moved from the 46th, 43rd, and 42nd (out of 167 hospitals) respectively into the top 10 in patient satisfaction utilizing the WIPSAS methodology. Reported patient satisfaction scores, PPSF, WIPPSS, and WIPSAS scores for each hospital in the United States are available online (see Supporting Table S1 in the online version of this article).

Top Ten Highest‐Ranked Hospitals in New York State by HCAHPS Scores Compared to WIPSAS
Ten Highest Ranked New York State Hospitals by HCAHPSTen Highest Ranked New York State Hospitals After WIPSAS
  • NOTE: Top 10 highest‐ranked hospitals in New York State by overall patient satisfaction out of 167 evaluable hospitals are shown. The left column represents the current top 10 hospitals in 2013 by HCAHPS overall patient satisfaction scores, and the right column represents the top 10 hospitals after the WIPSAS adjustment. The 4 factors used to create the WIPSAS adjustment were the 2 most positive partial regression coefficients (educationbachelor's degree, white alone percent 2012) and the 2 most negative partial regression coefficients (number of hospital beds, nonEnglish speaking at home). Three urban academic medical centers, Montefiore Medical Center, New York Presbyterian Hospital, and Mount Sinai Hospital, were reranked from the 46th, 43rd, and 42nd respectively into the top 10. Abbreviations: HCAHPS, Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems; WIPSAS, Weighted Individual (hospital) Patient Satisfaction Adjustment Score.

1. River Hospital, Inc.1. River Hospital, Inc.
2. Westfield Memorial Hospital, Inc.2. Westfield Memorial Hospital, Inc.
3. Clifton Fine Hospital3. Clifton Fine Hospital
4. Hospital For Special Surgery4. Hospital For Special Surgery
5. Delaware Valley Hospital, Inc.5. New YorkPresbyterian Hospital
6. Putnam Hospital Center6. Delaware Valley Hospital, Inc.
7. Margaretville Memorial Hospital7. Montefiore Medical Center
8. Community Memorial Hospital, Inc.8. St. Francis Hospital, Roslyn
9. Lewis County General Hospital9. Putnam Hospital Center
10. St. Francis Hospital, Roslyn10. Mount Sinai Hospital

DISCUSSION

The HVBP program is an incentive program that is meant to enhance the quality of care. This study illustrates healthcare inequalities in patient satisfaction that are not accounted for by the current CMS adjustments, and shows that education, ethnicity, primary language, and number of hospital beds are predictive of how patients evaluate their care via patient satisfaction scores. Hospitals that treat a disproportionate percentage of nonEnglish speaking, nonwhite, noneducated patients in large facilities are not meeting patient satisfaction standards. This inequity is not ameliorated by the adjustments currently performed by CMS, and has financial consequences for those hospitals that are not meeting national standards in patient satisfaction. These hospitals, which often include academic medical centers in urban areas, may therefore be penalized under the existing HVBP reimbursement models.

Using only 4 demographic and hospital‐specific predictors (ie, hospital beds, percent nonEnglish speaking, percent bachelors degrees, percent white), it is possible to utilize a simple formula to predict patient satisfaction with a significant degree of correlation to the reported scores available through Hospital Compare.

Our initial hypothesis that population density predicted lower patient satisfaction scores was confirmed, but these aforementioned demographic and hospital‐based factors were stronger independent predictors of HCAHPS scores. The WIPSAS is a representation of patient satisfaction and quality‐of‐care delivery across the country that accounts for nonrandom variation in patient satisfaction scores.

For hospitals in New York State, WIPSAS resulted in the placement of 3 urban‐based academic medical centers in the top 10 in patient satisfaction, when previously, based on the raw scores, their rankings were between 42nd and 46th statewide. Prior studies have suggested that large, urban, teaching, and not‐for‐profit hospitals were disadvantaged based on their hospital characteristics and patient features.[10, 11, 12] Under the current CMS reimbursement methodologies, these institutions are more likely to receive financial penalties.[8] The WIPSAS is a simple method to assess hospitals performance in the area of patient satisfaction that accounts for the demographic and hospital‐based factors (eg, number of beds) of the hospital. Its incorporation into CMS reimbursement calculations, or incorporation of a similar adjustment formula, should be strongly considered to account for predictive factors in patient satisfaction that could be addressed to enhance their scores.

Limitations for this study are the approximation of county‐level data for actual individual hospital demographic information and the exclusion of specialty hospitals, such as cancer centers and children's hospitals, in HCAHPS surveys. Repeated multivariate analyses at different time points would also serve to identify how CMS‐specific adjustments are recalibrated over time. Although we have primarily reported on the composite percent positive score as a surrogate for all HCAHPS dimensions, an individual adjustment formula could be generated for each dimension of the patient experience of care domain.

Although patient satisfaction is a component of how quality should be measured, further emphasis needs to be placed on nonrandom patient satisfaction variance so that HVBP can serve as an incentivizing program for at‐risk hospitals. Regional variation in scoring is not altogether accounted for by the current CMS adjustment system. Because patient satisfaction scores are now directly linked to reimbursement, further evaluation is needed to enhance patient satisfaction scoring paradigms to account for demographic and hospital‐specific factors.

Disclosure

Nothing to report.

Files
References
  1. Florence CS, Atherly A, Thorpe KE. Will choice‐based reform work for Medicare? Evidence from the Federal Employees Health Benefits Program. Health Serv Res. 2006;41:17411761.
  2. H.R. 3590. Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act 2010 (2010).
  3. Donabedian A. The quality of care. How can it be assessed? JAMA. 1988;260(12):17431748.
  4. Lake Superior Quality Innovation Network. FY 2017 Value‐Based Purchasing domain weighting. Available at: http://www.stratishealth.org/documents/VBP‐FY2017.pdf. Accessed March 13, 2015.
  5. Hospital Value‐Based Purchasing Program. Available at: http://www.cms.gov/Medicare/Quality‐Initiatives‐Patient‐Assessment‐Instruments/Hospital‐Value‐Based‐Purchasing. Accessed December 1st, 2013.
  6. Jha AK, Orav EJ, Zheng J, Epstein AM. Patients' perception of hospital care in the United States. N Engl J Med. 2008;359(18):19211931.
  7. Porter ME, Lee TH. Providers must lead the way in making value the overarching goal Harvard Bus Rev. October 2013:319.
  8. Jha AK, Orav EJ, Epstein AM. The effect of financial incentives on hospitals that serve poor patients. Ann Intern Med. 2010;153(5):299306.
  9. Joynt KE, Jha AK. Characteristics of hospitals receiving penalties under the Hospital Readmissions Reduction Program. JAMA. 2013;309(4):342343.
  10. Ryan AM. Will value‐based purchasing increase disparities in care? N Engl J Med. 2013;369(26):24722474.
  11. Thorpe KE, Florence CS, Seiber EE. Hospital conversions, margins, and the provision of uncompensated care. Health Aff (Millwood). 2000;19(6):187194.
  12. Borah BJ, Rock MG, Wood DL, Roellinger DL, Johnson MG, Naessens JM. Association between value‐based purchasing score and hospital characteristics. BMC Health Serv Res. 2012;12:464.
  13. Elliott MN, Zaslavsky AM, Goldstein E, et al. Effects of survey mode, patient mix, and nonresponse on CAHPS hospital survey scores. Health Serv Res. 2009;44(2 pt 1):501518.
  14. Burroughs TE, Waterman BM, Cira JC, Desikan R, Claiborne Dunagan W. Patient satisfaction measurement strategies: a comparison of phone and mail methods. Jt Comm J Qual Improv. 2001;27(7):349361.
  15. Fowler FJ, Gallagher PM, Nederend S. Comparing telephone and mail responses to the CAHPS survey instrument. Consumer Assessment of Health Plans Study. Med Care. 1999;37(3 suppl):MS41MS49.
  16. Rodriguez HP, Glahn T, Rogers WH, Chang H, Fanjiang G, Safran DG. Evaluating patients' experiences with individual physicians: a randomized trial of mail, internet, and interactive voice response telephone administration of surveys. Med Care. 2006;44(2):167174.
  17. O'Malley AJ, Zaslavsky AM, Elliott MN, Zaborski L, Cleary PD. Case‐mix adjustment of the CAHPS Hospital Survey. Health Serv Res. 2005;40(6 pt 2):21622181.
  18. Mode and patient‐mix adjustments of CAHPS hospital survey (HCAHPS). Available at: http://www.hcahpsonline.org/modeadjustment.aspx. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  19. Zaslavsky AM, Zaborski LB, Ding L, Shaul JA, Cioffi MJ, Clear PD. Adjusting performance measures to ensure equitable plan comparisons. Health Care Financ Rev. 2001;22(3):109126.
  20. Official Hospital Compare Data. Displaying datasets in Patient Survey Results category. Available at: https://data.medicare.gov/data/hospital‐compare/Patient%20Survey%20Results. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  21. Hospital statistics by state. American Hospital Directory, Inc. website. Available at: http://www.ahd.com/state_statistics.html. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  22. U.S. Census Download Center. Available at: http://factfinder.census.gov/faces/nav/jsf/pages/download_center.xhtml. Accessed December 1, 2013.
Article PDF
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 10(8)
Page Number
503-509
Sections
Files
Files
Article PDF
Article PDF

The Affordable Care Act of 2010 mandates that government payments to hospitals and physicians must depend, in part, on metrics that assess the quality and efficiency of healthcare being provided to encourage value‐based healthcare.[1] Value in healthcare is defined by the delivery of high‐quality care at low cost.[2, 3] To this end, Hospital Value‐Based Purchasing (HVBP) and Physician Value‐Based Payment Modifier programs have been developed by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS). HVBP is currently being phased in and affects CMS payments for fiscal year (FY) 2013 for over 3000 hospitals across the United States to incentivize healthcare delivery value. The final phase of implementation will be in FY 2017 and will then affect 2% of all CMS hospital reimbursement. HVBP is based on objective measures of hospital performance as well as a subjective measure of performance captured under the Patient Experience of Care domain. This subjective measure will remain at 30% of the aggregate score until FY 2016, when it will then be 25% the aggregate score moving forward.[4] The program rewards hospitals for both overall achievement and improvement in any domain, so that hospitals have multiple ways to receive financial incentives for providing quality care.[5] Even still, there appears to be a nonrandom pattern of patient satisfaction scores across the country with less favorable scores clustering in densely populated areas.[6]

Value‐Based Purchasing and other incentive‐based programs have been criticized for increasing disparities in healthcare by penalizing larger hospitals (including academic medical centers, safety‐net hospitals, and others that disproportionately serve lower socioeconomic communities) and favoring physician‐based specialty hospitals.[7, 8, 9] Therefore, hospitals that serve indigent and elderly populations may be at a disadvantage.[9, 10] HVBP portends significant economic consequences for the majority of hospitals that rely heavily on Medicare and Medicaid reimbursement, as most hospitals have large revenues but low profit margins.[11] Higher HVBP scores are associated with for profit status, smaller size, and location in certain areas of the United States.[12] Jha et al.[6] described Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores regional geographic variability, but concluded that poor satisfaction was due to poor quality.

The Patient Experience of Care domain quantifies patient satisfaction using the validated HCAHPS survey, which is provided to a random sample of patients continuously throughout the year at 48 hours to 6 weeks after discharge. It is a publically available standardized survey instrument used to measure patients perspectives on hospital care. It assesses the following 8 dimensions: nurse communication, doctor communication, hospital staff responsiveness, pain management, medicine communication, discharge information, hospital cleanliness and quietness, and overall hospital rating, of which the last 2 dimensions each have 2 measures (cleanliness and quietness) and (rating 9 or 10 and definitely recommend) to give a total of 10 distinct measures.

The United States is a complex network of urban, suburban, and rural demographic areas. Hospitals exist within a unique contextual and compositional meshwork that determines its caseload. The top population density decile of the United States lives within 37 counties, whereas half of the most populous parts of the United States occupy a total of 250 counties out of a total of 3143 counties in the United States. If the 10 measures of patient satisfaction (HCAHPS) scores were abstracted from hospitals and viewed according to county‐level population density (separated into deciles across the United States), a trend would be apparent (Figure 1). Greater population density is associated with lower patient satisfaction in 9 of 10 categories. On the state level, composite scores of overall patient satisfaction (amount of positive scores) of hospitals show a 12% variability and a significant correlation with population density (r=0.479; Figure 2). The lowest overall satisfaction scores are obtained from hospitals located in the population‐dense regions of Washington, DC, New York State, California, Maryland, and New Jersey (ie, 63%65%), and the best scores are from Louisiana, South Dakota, Iowa, Maine, and Vermont (ie, 74%75%). The average patient satisfaction score is 71%2.9%. Lower patient satisfaction scores appear to cluster in population‐dense areas and may be associated with greater heterogeneous patient demographics and economic variability in addition to population density.

Figure 1
Overall patient satisfaction by population density decile. Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores are segregated by population density deciles (representing 33 million people each). Population density increases along the grey scale. The composite score and 9 out of 10 HCAHPS dimensions demonstrate lower patient satisfaction as population density increases (darker shade). Abbreviations: Doc, doctor; Def Rec, definitely recommend.
Figure 2
Averaged Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores by state correlated with state population (Pop) density. Bivariate correlation of composite HCAHPS scores predicted by state population density without District of Columbia, r = −0.479, P < 0.001 (2‐tailed). This observed correlation informed the hypothesis that population density could predict for lower patient satisfaction via HCAHPS scores.

These observations are surprising considering that CMS already adjusts HCAHPS scores based on patient‐mix coefficients and mode of collection.[13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18] Adjustments are updated multiple times per year and account for survey collection either by telephone, email, or paper survey, because the populations that select survey forms will differ. Previous studies have shown that demographic features influence the patient evaluation process. For example, younger and more educated patients were found to provide less positive evaluations of healthcare.[19]

This study examined whether patients perceptions of healthcare (pattern of patient satisfaction) as quantified under the patient experience domain of HVBP were affected and predicted by population density and other demographic factors that are outside the control of individual hospitals. In addition, hospital‐level data (eg, number of hospital beds) and county‐level data such as race, age, gender, overall population, income, time spent commuting to work, primary language, and place of birth were analyzed for correlation with patient satisfaction scores. Our study demonstrates that demographic and hospital‐level data can predict patient satisfaction scores and suggests that CMS may need to modify its adjustment formulas to eliminate bias in HVBP‐based reimbursement.

METHODS

Data Collection

Publically available data were obtained from Hospital Compare,[20] American Hospital Directory,[21] and the US Census Bureau[22] websites. Twenty relevant US Census data categories were selected by their relevance for this study out of the 50 publically reported US Census categories, and included the following: county population, county population density, percent of population change over 1 year, poverty level (percent), income level per capita, median household income, average household size, travel time to work, percentage of high school or college graduates, non‐English primary language spoken at home, percentage of residents born outside of the United States, population percent in same residence for over 1 year, gender, race (white alone, white alone (not Hispanic or Latino), black or African American alone), population over 65 years old, and population under 18 years old.

HCAHPS Development

The HCAHPS survey is 32 questions in length, comprised of 10 evaluative dimensions. All short‐term, acute care, nonspecialty hospitals are invited to participate in the HCAHPS survey.

Data Analysis

Statistical analyses used the Statistical Package for Social Sciences version 16.0 for Windows (SPSS Inc., Chicago, IL). Data were checked for statistical assumptions, including normality, linearity of relationships, and full range of scores. Categories in both the Hospital Compare (HCAHPS) and US Census datasets were analyzed to assess their distribution curves. The category of population densities (per county) was converted to a logarithmic scale to account for a skewed distribution and long tail in the area of low population density. Data were subsequently merged into an Excel (Microsoft, Redmond, WA) spreadsheet using the VLookup function such that relevant 2010 census county data were added to each hospital's Hospital Compare data. Linear regression modeling was performed. Bivariate analysis was conducted (ENTER method) to determine the significant US Census data predictors for each of the 10 Hospital Compare dimensions including the composite overall satisfaction score. Significant predictors were then analyzed in a multivariate model (BACKWORDS method) for each Hospital Compare dimension and the composite average positive score. Models were assessed by determinates of correlation (adjusted R2) to assess for goodness of fit. Statistically significant predictor variables for overall patient satisfaction scores were then ranked according to their partial regression coefficients (standardized ).

A patient satisfaction predictive model was sought based upon significant predictors of aggregate percent positive HCAHPS scores. Various predictor combinations were formed based on their partial coefficients (ie, standardized coefficients); combinations were assessed based on their R2 values and assessed for colinearity. Combinations of partial coefficients included the 2, 4, and 8 most predictive variables as well the 2 most positive and negative predictors. They were then incorporated into a multivariate analysis model (FORWARD method) and assessed based on their adjusted R2 values. A 4‐variable combination (the 2 most predictive positive partial coefficients plus the 2 most predictive negative partial coefficients) was selected as a predictive model, and a formula predictive of the composite overall satisfaction score was generated. This formula (predicted patient satisfaction formula [PPSF]) predicts hospital patient satisfaction HCAHPS scores based on the 4 predictive variables for particular county and hospital characteristics. PPSF=KMV+BHB(HB)+BNE(NE)+BE(E)+BW(W)where KMV=coefficient constant (70.9), B=unstandardized coefficient (see Table 1 for values), HB=number of hospital beds, NE=proportion of non‐English speakers, E=education (proportion with bachelor's degree), and W=proportion identified as white race only.

Multivariate Regression of Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) Average Positive Score by County and Hospital Demographics
 BSE tP
  • NOTE: A multivariate linear regression model of statistically significant dimensions of patient satisfaction as determined by Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems scores is provided. The dependent variable is the composite of average patient satisfaction scores by hospital (3192 hospitals). Predictors (independent variables) were collected from US Census data for counties or county equivalents. All of the listed predictors (first column) are statistically significant. They are placed in order of partial regression coefficient contribution to the model from most positive to most negative contribution. Adjusted R2 (last row) is used to signify the goodness of fit. Abbreviations: , standardized (partial coefficient); B, unstandardized coefficient; P, statistical significance; SE, standard error; t, t statistic.

Educational attainmentbachelor's degree0.1570.0180.278.612<0.001
White alone percent 20120.090.0120.2357.587<0.001
Resident population percent under 18 years0.4040.04440.2099.085<0.001
Black or African American alone percent 20120.0830.0140.1915.936<0.001
Median household income 200720110.000030.000.0622.0270.043
Population density (log) 20100.2770.0830.0873.33330.001
Average travel time to work0.1070.0240.0884.366<0.001
Educational attainmenthigh school0.0820.0260.0883.1470.002
Average household size2.580.7270.1073.55<0.001
Total females percent 20120.4230.0670.1076.296<0.001
Percent nonEnglish speaking at home 200720110.0520.0180.142.9290.003
No. of hospital beds0.0060.000.21312.901<0.001
Adjusted R20.222    

The PPSF was then modified by weighting with the partial coefficient () to remove the bias in patient satisfaction generated by demographic and structural factors over which individual hospitals have limited or no control. This formula generated a Weighted Individual (hospital) Predicted Patient Satisfaction Score (WIPPSS). Application of this formula narrowed the predicted distribution of patient satisfaction for all hospitals across the country. WIPPSS=KMV+BHB(HB)(1HB)+BNE(NE)(1NE)+BE(E)(1E)+BW(W)(1W)where =standardized coefficient (see Table 1 for values).

To create an adjusted score with direct relevance to the reported patient satisfaction scores, the reported scores were multiplied by an adjustment factor that defines the difference between individual hospital‐weighted scores and the national mean HCAHPS score across the United States. This formula, the Weighted Individual (hospital) Patient Satisfaction Adjustment Score (WIPSAS), represents a patient satisfaction score adjusted for demographic and structural factors that can be utilized for interhospital comparisons across all areas of the country. WIPSAS=PSrep[1+(PSUSAWIPPSSX)/100]

where PSrep=patient satisfaction reported score, PSUSA=mean reported score for United States (71.84), and WIPPSSX=WIPPSS for individual hospital.

Application of Data Analysis

PPSF, WIPPSS, and WIPSAS were calculated for all HCAHPS‐participating hospitals and compared with averaged raw HCAHPS scores across the United States. WIPSAS and raw scores were specifically analyzed for New York State to demonstrate exactly how adjustments would change state‐level rankings.

RESULTS

Complete HCAHPS scores were obtained from 3907 hospitals out of a total 4621 hospitals listed by the Hospital Compare website (85%). The majority of hospitals (2884) collected over 300 surveys, fewer hospitals (696) collected 100 to 299 surveys, and fewer still (333) collected <100 surveys. In total, results were available from at least 934,800 individual surveys, by the most conservative estimate. Missing HCAHPS hospital data averaged 13.4 (standard deviation [SD] 12.2) hospitals per state. County‐level data were obtained from all 3144 county or county equivalents across the United States (100%). Multivariate regression modeling across all HCAHPS dimensions found that between 10 and 16 of the 20 predictors (US Census categories) were statistically significant and predictive of individual HCAHPS dimension scores and the aggregate percent positive score as demonstrated in Table 2. For example, county percentage of bachelors degrees positively predicts for positive doctor communication scores, and hospital beds negatively predicts for quiet dimension. The strongest positive and negative predictive variables by model regression coefficients for each HCAHPS dimension are also listed in Table 2.

Multivariate Regression of Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems by County and Hospital Demographics
 Average Positive ScoresNurse CommunicationDoctor CommunicationHelpPainExplain MedsCleanQuietDischarge ExplainRecommend 9/10Definitely Recommend
  • NOTE: Linear regression modeling results of 10 dimensions of patient satisfaction (ie, Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems [HCAHPS]) and Average Positive Scores (top row) by county demographics and hospital size (left column) are shown. Adjusted R2 (last row) is used to signify the goodness of fit. All models are statistically significant with P=<0.001. Partial regression coefficients () are used to positively or negatively assess contribution to the individual models (ie, each column). The dash () indicates nonsignificance and the asterisk (*) indicates a value that was statistically significant in univariate analysis but not in multivariate analysis. Independent variables (first column) are ordered from top to bottom by the number of HCAHPS dimensions that each contributes to HCAHPS predictive scoring.

Educationalbachelor's0.270.190.450.100.100.050.080.330.150.270.416
Hospital beds0.210.160.190.260.160.170.270.260.060.11 
Population density 20100.090.070.280.200.080.230.140.190.220.07*
White alone percent0.240.250.090.160.230.070.16 0.170.310.317
Total females percent0.110.050.060.070.060.030.050.090.120.09 
African American alone0.190.19 0.090.230.090.070.34*0.090.084
Average travel time to work0.090.10*0.090.060.040.08*0.120.170.16
Foreign‐born percent*0.160.140.060.120.080.060.130.18**
Average household size0.110.050.150.07*0.07*0.01*0.070.076
NonEnglish speaking0.140.120.500.07*****0.340.28
Educationhigh school0.090.090.40*   0.270.060.08*
Household income0.06*0.350.08**0.160.41  0.265
Population 65 years and over*0.140.140.12*0.110.15  *0.10
White, not Hispanic/Latino**0.20***0.090.130.090.220.25
Population under 180.21 0.15 0.08   0.110.20 
Population (county)*0.060.08*0.030.05**0.06**
All ages in poverty  0.24   0.100.220.08*0.281
1 year at same residence*0.130.120.11  0.10*0.04**
Per capita income*0.07*****0.09  *
Population percent change******0.05  **
Adjusted R20.220.250.300.300.120.170.230.300.190.140.15

Table 1 highlights multivariate regression modeling of the composite average positive score, which produced an adjusted R2 of 0.222 (P<0.001). All variables were significant and predicted change of the composite HCAHPS except for place of birthforeign born (not listed in the table). Table 1 ranks variables from most positive to most negative predictors.

Other HCAHPS domains demonstrated statistically significant models (P<0.001) and are listed by their coefficients of determination (ie, adjusted R2) (Table 2). The best‐fit dimensions were help (adjusted R2=0.304), quiet (adjusted R2=0.299), doctor communication (adjusted R2=0.298), nurse communication (adjusted R2=0.245), and clean (adjusted R2=0.232). Models that were not as strongly predictive as the composite score included pain (adjusted R2=0.124), overall 9/10 (adjusted R2=0.136), definitely recommend (adjusted R2=0.150), and explained meds (adjusted R2=0.169).

A predictive formula for average positive scores was created by determination of the most predictive partial coefficients and the best‐fit model. Bachelor's degree and white only were the 2 greatest positive predictors, and number of hospital beds and nonEnglish speaking were the 2 greatest negative predictors. The PPSF (predictive formula) was chosen out of various combinations of predictors (Table 1), because its coefficient of determination (adjusted R2=0.155) was closest to the overall model's coefficient of determination (adjusted R2=0.222) without demonstrating colinearity. Possible predictive formulas were based on the predictors standardized and included the following combinations: the 2 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.051), the 2 greatest negative and positive predictors (adjusted R2=0.098), the 4 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.117), and the 8 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.201), which suffered from colinearity (household size plus nonEnglish speaking [Pearson=0.624] and under 18 years old [Pearson=0.708]). None of the correlated independent variables (eg, poverty and median income) were placed in the final model.

The mean WIPSAS scores closely corresponded with the national average of HCAHPS scores (71.6 vs 71.84) but compressed scores into a narrower distribution (SD 5.52 vs 5.92). The greatest positive and negative changes were by 8.51% and 2.25%, respectively. Essentially, a smaller number of hospitals in demographically challenged areas were more significantly impacted by the WIPSAS adjustment than the larger number of hospitals in demographically favorable areas. Large hospitals in demographically diverse counties saw the greatest positive change (e.g., Texas, California, and New York), whereas smaller hospitals in demographically nondiverse areas saw comparatively smaller decrements in the overall WIPSAS scores. The WIPSAS had the most beneficial effect on urban and rural safety‐net hospitals that serve diverse populations including many academic medical centers. This is illustrated by the reranking of the top 10 and bottom 10 hospitals in New York State by the WIPSAS (Table 3). For example, 3 academic medical centers in New York State, Montefiore Medical Center, New York Presbyterian Hospital, and Mount Sinai Hospital, were moved from the 46th, 43rd, and 42nd (out of 167 hospitals) respectively into the top 10 in patient satisfaction utilizing the WIPSAS methodology. Reported patient satisfaction scores, PPSF, WIPPSS, and WIPSAS scores for each hospital in the United States are available online (see Supporting Table S1 in the online version of this article).

Top Ten Highest‐Ranked Hospitals in New York State by HCAHPS Scores Compared to WIPSAS
Ten Highest Ranked New York State Hospitals by HCAHPSTen Highest Ranked New York State Hospitals After WIPSAS
  • NOTE: Top 10 highest‐ranked hospitals in New York State by overall patient satisfaction out of 167 evaluable hospitals are shown. The left column represents the current top 10 hospitals in 2013 by HCAHPS overall patient satisfaction scores, and the right column represents the top 10 hospitals after the WIPSAS adjustment. The 4 factors used to create the WIPSAS adjustment were the 2 most positive partial regression coefficients (educationbachelor's degree, white alone percent 2012) and the 2 most negative partial regression coefficients (number of hospital beds, nonEnglish speaking at home). Three urban academic medical centers, Montefiore Medical Center, New York Presbyterian Hospital, and Mount Sinai Hospital, were reranked from the 46th, 43rd, and 42nd respectively into the top 10. Abbreviations: HCAHPS, Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems; WIPSAS, Weighted Individual (hospital) Patient Satisfaction Adjustment Score.

1. River Hospital, Inc.1. River Hospital, Inc.
2. Westfield Memorial Hospital, Inc.2. Westfield Memorial Hospital, Inc.
3. Clifton Fine Hospital3. Clifton Fine Hospital
4. Hospital For Special Surgery4. Hospital For Special Surgery
5. Delaware Valley Hospital, Inc.5. New YorkPresbyterian Hospital
6. Putnam Hospital Center6. Delaware Valley Hospital, Inc.
7. Margaretville Memorial Hospital7. Montefiore Medical Center
8. Community Memorial Hospital, Inc.8. St. Francis Hospital, Roslyn
9. Lewis County General Hospital9. Putnam Hospital Center
10. St. Francis Hospital, Roslyn10. Mount Sinai Hospital

DISCUSSION

The HVBP program is an incentive program that is meant to enhance the quality of care. This study illustrates healthcare inequalities in patient satisfaction that are not accounted for by the current CMS adjustments, and shows that education, ethnicity, primary language, and number of hospital beds are predictive of how patients evaluate their care via patient satisfaction scores. Hospitals that treat a disproportionate percentage of nonEnglish speaking, nonwhite, noneducated patients in large facilities are not meeting patient satisfaction standards. This inequity is not ameliorated by the adjustments currently performed by CMS, and has financial consequences for those hospitals that are not meeting national standards in patient satisfaction. These hospitals, which often include academic medical centers in urban areas, may therefore be penalized under the existing HVBP reimbursement models.

Using only 4 demographic and hospital‐specific predictors (ie, hospital beds, percent nonEnglish speaking, percent bachelors degrees, percent white), it is possible to utilize a simple formula to predict patient satisfaction with a significant degree of correlation to the reported scores available through Hospital Compare.

Our initial hypothesis that population density predicted lower patient satisfaction scores was confirmed, but these aforementioned demographic and hospital‐based factors were stronger independent predictors of HCAHPS scores. The WIPSAS is a representation of patient satisfaction and quality‐of‐care delivery across the country that accounts for nonrandom variation in patient satisfaction scores.

For hospitals in New York State, WIPSAS resulted in the placement of 3 urban‐based academic medical centers in the top 10 in patient satisfaction, when previously, based on the raw scores, their rankings were between 42nd and 46th statewide. Prior studies have suggested that large, urban, teaching, and not‐for‐profit hospitals were disadvantaged based on their hospital characteristics and patient features.[10, 11, 12] Under the current CMS reimbursement methodologies, these institutions are more likely to receive financial penalties.[8] The WIPSAS is a simple method to assess hospitals performance in the area of patient satisfaction that accounts for the demographic and hospital‐based factors (eg, number of beds) of the hospital. Its incorporation into CMS reimbursement calculations, or incorporation of a similar adjustment formula, should be strongly considered to account for predictive factors in patient satisfaction that could be addressed to enhance their scores.

Limitations for this study are the approximation of county‐level data for actual individual hospital demographic information and the exclusion of specialty hospitals, such as cancer centers and children's hospitals, in HCAHPS surveys. Repeated multivariate analyses at different time points would also serve to identify how CMS‐specific adjustments are recalibrated over time. Although we have primarily reported on the composite percent positive score as a surrogate for all HCAHPS dimensions, an individual adjustment formula could be generated for each dimension of the patient experience of care domain.

Although patient satisfaction is a component of how quality should be measured, further emphasis needs to be placed on nonrandom patient satisfaction variance so that HVBP can serve as an incentivizing program for at‐risk hospitals. Regional variation in scoring is not altogether accounted for by the current CMS adjustment system. Because patient satisfaction scores are now directly linked to reimbursement, further evaluation is needed to enhance patient satisfaction scoring paradigms to account for demographic and hospital‐specific factors.

Disclosure

Nothing to report.

The Affordable Care Act of 2010 mandates that government payments to hospitals and physicians must depend, in part, on metrics that assess the quality and efficiency of healthcare being provided to encourage value‐based healthcare.[1] Value in healthcare is defined by the delivery of high‐quality care at low cost.[2, 3] To this end, Hospital Value‐Based Purchasing (HVBP) and Physician Value‐Based Payment Modifier programs have been developed by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services (CMS). HVBP is currently being phased in and affects CMS payments for fiscal year (FY) 2013 for over 3000 hospitals across the United States to incentivize healthcare delivery value. The final phase of implementation will be in FY 2017 and will then affect 2% of all CMS hospital reimbursement. HVBP is based on objective measures of hospital performance as well as a subjective measure of performance captured under the Patient Experience of Care domain. This subjective measure will remain at 30% of the aggregate score until FY 2016, when it will then be 25% the aggregate score moving forward.[4] The program rewards hospitals for both overall achievement and improvement in any domain, so that hospitals have multiple ways to receive financial incentives for providing quality care.[5] Even still, there appears to be a nonrandom pattern of patient satisfaction scores across the country with less favorable scores clustering in densely populated areas.[6]

Value‐Based Purchasing and other incentive‐based programs have been criticized for increasing disparities in healthcare by penalizing larger hospitals (including academic medical centers, safety‐net hospitals, and others that disproportionately serve lower socioeconomic communities) and favoring physician‐based specialty hospitals.[7, 8, 9] Therefore, hospitals that serve indigent and elderly populations may be at a disadvantage.[9, 10] HVBP portends significant economic consequences for the majority of hospitals that rely heavily on Medicare and Medicaid reimbursement, as most hospitals have large revenues but low profit margins.[11] Higher HVBP scores are associated with for profit status, smaller size, and location in certain areas of the United States.[12] Jha et al.[6] described Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores regional geographic variability, but concluded that poor satisfaction was due to poor quality.

The Patient Experience of Care domain quantifies patient satisfaction using the validated HCAHPS survey, which is provided to a random sample of patients continuously throughout the year at 48 hours to 6 weeks after discharge. It is a publically available standardized survey instrument used to measure patients perspectives on hospital care. It assesses the following 8 dimensions: nurse communication, doctor communication, hospital staff responsiveness, pain management, medicine communication, discharge information, hospital cleanliness and quietness, and overall hospital rating, of which the last 2 dimensions each have 2 measures (cleanliness and quietness) and (rating 9 or 10 and definitely recommend) to give a total of 10 distinct measures.

The United States is a complex network of urban, suburban, and rural demographic areas. Hospitals exist within a unique contextual and compositional meshwork that determines its caseload. The top population density decile of the United States lives within 37 counties, whereas half of the most populous parts of the United States occupy a total of 250 counties out of a total of 3143 counties in the United States. If the 10 measures of patient satisfaction (HCAHPS) scores were abstracted from hospitals and viewed according to county‐level population density (separated into deciles across the United States), a trend would be apparent (Figure 1). Greater population density is associated with lower patient satisfaction in 9 of 10 categories. On the state level, composite scores of overall patient satisfaction (amount of positive scores) of hospitals show a 12% variability and a significant correlation with population density (r=0.479; Figure 2). The lowest overall satisfaction scores are obtained from hospitals located in the population‐dense regions of Washington, DC, New York State, California, Maryland, and New Jersey (ie, 63%65%), and the best scores are from Louisiana, South Dakota, Iowa, Maine, and Vermont (ie, 74%75%). The average patient satisfaction score is 71%2.9%. Lower patient satisfaction scores appear to cluster in population‐dense areas and may be associated with greater heterogeneous patient demographics and economic variability in addition to population density.

Figure 1
Overall patient satisfaction by population density decile. Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores are segregated by population density deciles (representing 33 million people each). Population density increases along the grey scale. The composite score and 9 out of 10 HCAHPS dimensions demonstrate lower patient satisfaction as population density increases (darker shade). Abbreviations: Doc, doctor; Def Rec, definitely recommend.
Figure 2
Averaged Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) scores by state correlated with state population (Pop) density. Bivariate correlation of composite HCAHPS scores predicted by state population density without District of Columbia, r = −0.479, P < 0.001 (2‐tailed). This observed correlation informed the hypothesis that population density could predict for lower patient satisfaction via HCAHPS scores.

These observations are surprising considering that CMS already adjusts HCAHPS scores based on patient‐mix coefficients and mode of collection.[13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18] Adjustments are updated multiple times per year and account for survey collection either by telephone, email, or paper survey, because the populations that select survey forms will differ. Previous studies have shown that demographic features influence the patient evaluation process. For example, younger and more educated patients were found to provide less positive evaluations of healthcare.[19]

This study examined whether patients perceptions of healthcare (pattern of patient satisfaction) as quantified under the patient experience domain of HVBP were affected and predicted by population density and other demographic factors that are outside the control of individual hospitals. In addition, hospital‐level data (eg, number of hospital beds) and county‐level data such as race, age, gender, overall population, income, time spent commuting to work, primary language, and place of birth were analyzed for correlation with patient satisfaction scores. Our study demonstrates that demographic and hospital‐level data can predict patient satisfaction scores and suggests that CMS may need to modify its adjustment formulas to eliminate bias in HVBP‐based reimbursement.

METHODS

Data Collection

Publically available data were obtained from Hospital Compare,[20] American Hospital Directory,[21] and the US Census Bureau[22] websites. Twenty relevant US Census data categories were selected by their relevance for this study out of the 50 publically reported US Census categories, and included the following: county population, county population density, percent of population change over 1 year, poverty level (percent), income level per capita, median household income, average household size, travel time to work, percentage of high school or college graduates, non‐English primary language spoken at home, percentage of residents born outside of the United States, population percent in same residence for over 1 year, gender, race (white alone, white alone (not Hispanic or Latino), black or African American alone), population over 65 years old, and population under 18 years old.

HCAHPS Development

The HCAHPS survey is 32 questions in length, comprised of 10 evaluative dimensions. All short‐term, acute care, nonspecialty hospitals are invited to participate in the HCAHPS survey.

Data Analysis

Statistical analyses used the Statistical Package for Social Sciences version 16.0 for Windows (SPSS Inc., Chicago, IL). Data were checked for statistical assumptions, including normality, linearity of relationships, and full range of scores. Categories in both the Hospital Compare (HCAHPS) and US Census datasets were analyzed to assess their distribution curves. The category of population densities (per county) was converted to a logarithmic scale to account for a skewed distribution and long tail in the area of low population density. Data were subsequently merged into an Excel (Microsoft, Redmond, WA) spreadsheet using the VLookup function such that relevant 2010 census county data were added to each hospital's Hospital Compare data. Linear regression modeling was performed. Bivariate analysis was conducted (ENTER method) to determine the significant US Census data predictors for each of the 10 Hospital Compare dimensions including the composite overall satisfaction score. Significant predictors were then analyzed in a multivariate model (BACKWORDS method) for each Hospital Compare dimension and the composite average positive score. Models were assessed by determinates of correlation (adjusted R2) to assess for goodness of fit. Statistically significant predictor variables for overall patient satisfaction scores were then ranked according to their partial regression coefficients (standardized ).

A patient satisfaction predictive model was sought based upon significant predictors of aggregate percent positive HCAHPS scores. Various predictor combinations were formed based on their partial coefficients (ie, standardized coefficients); combinations were assessed based on their R2 values and assessed for colinearity. Combinations of partial coefficients included the 2, 4, and 8 most predictive variables as well the 2 most positive and negative predictors. They were then incorporated into a multivariate analysis model (FORWARD method) and assessed based on their adjusted R2 values. A 4‐variable combination (the 2 most predictive positive partial coefficients plus the 2 most predictive negative partial coefficients) was selected as a predictive model, and a formula predictive of the composite overall satisfaction score was generated. This formula (predicted patient satisfaction formula [PPSF]) predicts hospital patient satisfaction HCAHPS scores based on the 4 predictive variables for particular county and hospital characteristics. PPSF=KMV+BHB(HB)+BNE(NE)+BE(E)+BW(W)where KMV=coefficient constant (70.9), B=unstandardized coefficient (see Table 1 for values), HB=number of hospital beds, NE=proportion of non‐English speakers, E=education (proportion with bachelor's degree), and W=proportion identified as white race only.

Multivariate Regression of Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (HCAHPS) Average Positive Score by County and Hospital Demographics
 BSE tP
  • NOTE: A multivariate linear regression model of statistically significant dimensions of patient satisfaction as determined by Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems scores is provided. The dependent variable is the composite of average patient satisfaction scores by hospital (3192 hospitals). Predictors (independent variables) were collected from US Census data for counties or county equivalents. All of the listed predictors (first column) are statistically significant. They are placed in order of partial regression coefficient contribution to the model from most positive to most negative contribution. Adjusted R2 (last row) is used to signify the goodness of fit. Abbreviations: , standardized (partial coefficient); B, unstandardized coefficient; P, statistical significance; SE, standard error; t, t statistic.

Educational attainmentbachelor's degree0.1570.0180.278.612<0.001
White alone percent 20120.090.0120.2357.587<0.001
Resident population percent under 18 years0.4040.04440.2099.085<0.001
Black or African American alone percent 20120.0830.0140.1915.936<0.001
Median household income 200720110.000030.000.0622.0270.043
Population density (log) 20100.2770.0830.0873.33330.001
Average travel time to work0.1070.0240.0884.366<0.001
Educational attainmenthigh school0.0820.0260.0883.1470.002
Average household size2.580.7270.1073.55<0.001
Total females percent 20120.4230.0670.1076.296<0.001
Percent nonEnglish speaking at home 200720110.0520.0180.142.9290.003
No. of hospital beds0.0060.000.21312.901<0.001
Adjusted R20.222    

The PPSF was then modified by weighting with the partial coefficient () to remove the bias in patient satisfaction generated by demographic and structural factors over which individual hospitals have limited or no control. This formula generated a Weighted Individual (hospital) Predicted Patient Satisfaction Score (WIPPSS). Application of this formula narrowed the predicted distribution of patient satisfaction for all hospitals across the country. WIPPSS=KMV+BHB(HB)(1HB)+BNE(NE)(1NE)+BE(E)(1E)+BW(W)(1W)where =standardized coefficient (see Table 1 for values).

To create an adjusted score with direct relevance to the reported patient satisfaction scores, the reported scores were multiplied by an adjustment factor that defines the difference between individual hospital‐weighted scores and the national mean HCAHPS score across the United States. This formula, the Weighted Individual (hospital) Patient Satisfaction Adjustment Score (WIPSAS), represents a patient satisfaction score adjusted for demographic and structural factors that can be utilized for interhospital comparisons across all areas of the country. WIPSAS=PSrep[1+(PSUSAWIPPSSX)/100]

where PSrep=patient satisfaction reported score, PSUSA=mean reported score for United States (71.84), and WIPPSSX=WIPPSS for individual hospital.

Application of Data Analysis

PPSF, WIPPSS, and WIPSAS were calculated for all HCAHPS‐participating hospitals and compared with averaged raw HCAHPS scores across the United States. WIPSAS and raw scores were specifically analyzed for New York State to demonstrate exactly how adjustments would change state‐level rankings.

RESULTS

Complete HCAHPS scores were obtained from 3907 hospitals out of a total 4621 hospitals listed by the Hospital Compare website (85%). The majority of hospitals (2884) collected over 300 surveys, fewer hospitals (696) collected 100 to 299 surveys, and fewer still (333) collected <100 surveys. In total, results were available from at least 934,800 individual surveys, by the most conservative estimate. Missing HCAHPS hospital data averaged 13.4 (standard deviation [SD] 12.2) hospitals per state. County‐level data were obtained from all 3144 county or county equivalents across the United States (100%). Multivariate regression modeling across all HCAHPS dimensions found that between 10 and 16 of the 20 predictors (US Census categories) were statistically significant and predictive of individual HCAHPS dimension scores and the aggregate percent positive score as demonstrated in Table 2. For example, county percentage of bachelors degrees positively predicts for positive doctor communication scores, and hospital beds negatively predicts for quiet dimension. The strongest positive and negative predictive variables by model regression coefficients for each HCAHPS dimension are also listed in Table 2.

Multivariate Regression of Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems by County and Hospital Demographics
 Average Positive ScoresNurse CommunicationDoctor CommunicationHelpPainExplain MedsCleanQuietDischarge ExplainRecommend 9/10Definitely Recommend
  • NOTE: Linear regression modeling results of 10 dimensions of patient satisfaction (ie, Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems [HCAHPS]) and Average Positive Scores (top row) by county demographics and hospital size (left column) are shown. Adjusted R2 (last row) is used to signify the goodness of fit. All models are statistically significant with P=<0.001. Partial regression coefficients () are used to positively or negatively assess contribution to the individual models (ie, each column). The dash () indicates nonsignificance and the asterisk (*) indicates a value that was statistically significant in univariate analysis but not in multivariate analysis. Independent variables (first column) are ordered from top to bottom by the number of HCAHPS dimensions that each contributes to HCAHPS predictive scoring.

Educationalbachelor's0.270.190.450.100.100.050.080.330.150.270.416
Hospital beds0.210.160.190.260.160.170.270.260.060.11 
Population density 20100.090.070.280.200.080.230.140.190.220.07*
White alone percent0.240.250.090.160.230.070.16 0.170.310.317
Total females percent0.110.050.060.070.060.030.050.090.120.09 
African American alone0.190.19 0.090.230.090.070.34*0.090.084
Average travel time to work0.090.10*0.090.060.040.08*0.120.170.16
Foreign‐born percent*0.160.140.060.120.080.060.130.18**
Average household size0.110.050.150.07*0.07*0.01*0.070.076
NonEnglish speaking0.140.120.500.07*****0.340.28
Educationhigh school0.090.090.40*   0.270.060.08*
Household income0.06*0.350.08**0.160.41  0.265
Population 65 years and over*0.140.140.12*0.110.15  *0.10
White, not Hispanic/Latino**0.20***0.090.130.090.220.25
Population under 180.21 0.15 0.08   0.110.20 
Population (county)*0.060.08*0.030.05**0.06**
All ages in poverty  0.24   0.100.220.08*0.281
1 year at same residence*0.130.120.11  0.10*0.04**
Per capita income*0.07*****0.09  *
Population percent change******0.05  **
Adjusted R20.220.250.300.300.120.170.230.300.190.140.15

Table 1 highlights multivariate regression modeling of the composite average positive score, which produced an adjusted R2 of 0.222 (P<0.001). All variables were significant and predicted change of the composite HCAHPS except for place of birthforeign born (not listed in the table). Table 1 ranks variables from most positive to most negative predictors.

Other HCAHPS domains demonstrated statistically significant models (P<0.001) and are listed by their coefficients of determination (ie, adjusted R2) (Table 2). The best‐fit dimensions were help (adjusted R2=0.304), quiet (adjusted R2=0.299), doctor communication (adjusted R2=0.298), nurse communication (adjusted R2=0.245), and clean (adjusted R2=0.232). Models that were not as strongly predictive as the composite score included pain (adjusted R2=0.124), overall 9/10 (adjusted R2=0.136), definitely recommend (adjusted R2=0.150), and explained meds (adjusted R2=0.169).

A predictive formula for average positive scores was created by determination of the most predictive partial coefficients and the best‐fit model. Bachelor's degree and white only were the 2 greatest positive predictors, and number of hospital beds and nonEnglish speaking were the 2 greatest negative predictors. The PPSF (predictive formula) was chosen out of various combinations of predictors (Table 1), because its coefficient of determination (adjusted R2=0.155) was closest to the overall model's coefficient of determination (adjusted R2=0.222) without demonstrating colinearity. Possible predictive formulas were based on the predictors standardized and included the following combinations: the 2 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.051), the 2 greatest negative and positive predictors (adjusted R2=0.098), the 4 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.117), and the 8 greatest overall predictors (adjusted R2=0.201), which suffered from colinearity (household size plus nonEnglish speaking [Pearson=0.624] and under 18 years old [Pearson=0.708]). None of the correlated independent variables (eg, poverty and median income) were placed in the final model.

The mean WIPSAS scores closely corresponded with the national average of HCAHPS scores (71.6 vs 71.84) but compressed scores into a narrower distribution (SD 5.52 vs 5.92). The greatest positive and negative changes were by 8.51% and 2.25%, respectively. Essentially, a smaller number of hospitals in demographically challenged areas were more significantly impacted by the WIPSAS adjustment than the larger number of hospitals in demographically favorable areas. Large hospitals in demographically diverse counties saw the greatest positive change (e.g., Texas, California, and New York), whereas smaller hospitals in demographically nondiverse areas saw comparatively smaller decrements in the overall WIPSAS scores. The WIPSAS had the most beneficial effect on urban and rural safety‐net hospitals that serve diverse populations including many academic medical centers. This is illustrated by the reranking of the top 10 and bottom 10 hospitals in New York State by the WIPSAS (Table 3). For example, 3 academic medical centers in New York State, Montefiore Medical Center, New York Presbyterian Hospital, and Mount Sinai Hospital, were moved from the 46th, 43rd, and 42nd (out of 167 hospitals) respectively into the top 10 in patient satisfaction utilizing the WIPSAS methodology. Reported patient satisfaction scores, PPSF, WIPPSS, and WIPSAS scores for each hospital in the United States are available online (see Supporting Table S1 in the online version of this article).

Top Ten Highest‐Ranked Hospitals in New York State by HCAHPS Scores Compared to WIPSAS
Ten Highest Ranked New York State Hospitals by HCAHPSTen Highest Ranked New York State Hospitals After WIPSAS
  • NOTE: Top 10 highest‐ranked hospitals in New York State by overall patient satisfaction out of 167 evaluable hospitals are shown. The left column represents the current top 10 hospitals in 2013 by HCAHPS overall patient satisfaction scores, and the right column represents the top 10 hospitals after the WIPSAS adjustment. The 4 factors used to create the WIPSAS adjustment were the 2 most positive partial regression coefficients (educationbachelor's degree, white alone percent 2012) and the 2 most negative partial regression coefficients (number of hospital beds, nonEnglish speaking at home). Three urban academic medical centers, Montefiore Medical Center, New York Presbyterian Hospital, and Mount Sinai Hospital, were reranked from the 46th, 43rd, and 42nd respectively into the top 10. Abbreviations: HCAHPS, Hospital Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems; WIPSAS, Weighted Individual (hospital) Patient Satisfaction Adjustment Score.

1. River Hospital, Inc.1. River Hospital, Inc.
2. Westfield Memorial Hospital, Inc.2. Westfield Memorial Hospital, Inc.
3. Clifton Fine Hospital3. Clifton Fine Hospital
4. Hospital For Special Surgery4. Hospital For Special Surgery
5. Delaware Valley Hospital, Inc.5. New YorkPresbyterian Hospital
6. Putnam Hospital Center6. Delaware Valley Hospital, Inc.
7. Margaretville Memorial Hospital7. Montefiore Medical Center
8. Community Memorial Hospital, Inc.8. St. Francis Hospital, Roslyn
9. Lewis County General Hospital9. Putnam Hospital Center
10. St. Francis Hospital, Roslyn10. Mount Sinai Hospital

DISCUSSION

The HVBP program is an incentive program that is meant to enhance the quality of care. This study illustrates healthcare inequalities in patient satisfaction that are not accounted for by the current CMS adjustments, and shows that education, ethnicity, primary language, and number of hospital beds are predictive of how patients evaluate their care via patient satisfaction scores. Hospitals that treat a disproportionate percentage of nonEnglish speaking, nonwhite, noneducated patients in large facilities are not meeting patient satisfaction standards. This inequity is not ameliorated by the adjustments currently performed by CMS, and has financial consequences for those hospitals that are not meeting national standards in patient satisfaction. These hospitals, which often include academic medical centers in urban areas, may therefore be penalized under the existing HVBP reimbursement models.

Using only 4 demographic and hospital‐specific predictors (ie, hospital beds, percent nonEnglish speaking, percent bachelors degrees, percent white), it is possible to utilize a simple formula to predict patient satisfaction with a significant degree of correlation to the reported scores available through Hospital Compare.

Our initial hypothesis that population density predicted lower patient satisfaction scores was confirmed, but these aforementioned demographic and hospital‐based factors were stronger independent predictors of HCAHPS scores. The WIPSAS is a representation of patient satisfaction and quality‐of‐care delivery across the country that accounts for nonrandom variation in patient satisfaction scores.

For hospitals in New York State, WIPSAS resulted in the placement of 3 urban‐based academic medical centers in the top 10 in patient satisfaction, when previously, based on the raw scores, their rankings were between 42nd and 46th statewide. Prior studies have suggested that large, urban, teaching, and not‐for‐profit hospitals were disadvantaged based on their hospital characteristics and patient features.[10, 11, 12] Under the current CMS reimbursement methodologies, these institutions are more likely to receive financial penalties.[8] The WIPSAS is a simple method to assess hospitals performance in the area of patient satisfaction that accounts for the demographic and hospital‐based factors (eg, number of beds) of the hospital. Its incorporation into CMS reimbursement calculations, or incorporation of a similar adjustment formula, should be strongly considered to account for predictive factors in patient satisfaction that could be addressed to enhance their scores.

Limitations for this study are the approximation of county‐level data for actual individual hospital demographic information and the exclusion of specialty hospitals, such as cancer centers and children's hospitals, in HCAHPS surveys. Repeated multivariate analyses at different time points would also serve to identify how CMS‐specific adjustments are recalibrated over time. Although we have primarily reported on the composite percent positive score as a surrogate for all HCAHPS dimensions, an individual adjustment formula could be generated for each dimension of the patient experience of care domain.

Although patient satisfaction is a component of how quality should be measured, further emphasis needs to be placed on nonrandom patient satisfaction variance so that HVBP can serve as an incentivizing program for at‐risk hospitals. Regional variation in scoring is not altogether accounted for by the current CMS adjustment system. Because patient satisfaction scores are now directly linked to reimbursement, further evaluation is needed to enhance patient satisfaction scoring paradigms to account for demographic and hospital‐specific factors.

Disclosure

Nothing to report.

References
  1. Florence CS, Atherly A, Thorpe KE. Will choice‐based reform work for Medicare? Evidence from the Federal Employees Health Benefits Program. Health Serv Res. 2006;41:17411761.
  2. H.R. 3590. Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act 2010 (2010).
  3. Donabedian A. The quality of care. How can it be assessed? JAMA. 1988;260(12):17431748.
  4. Lake Superior Quality Innovation Network. FY 2017 Value‐Based Purchasing domain weighting. Available at: http://www.stratishealth.org/documents/VBP‐FY2017.pdf. Accessed March 13, 2015.
  5. Hospital Value‐Based Purchasing Program. Available at: http://www.cms.gov/Medicare/Quality‐Initiatives‐Patient‐Assessment‐Instruments/Hospital‐Value‐Based‐Purchasing. Accessed December 1st, 2013.
  6. Jha AK, Orav EJ, Zheng J, Epstein AM. Patients' perception of hospital care in the United States. N Engl J Med. 2008;359(18):19211931.
  7. Porter ME, Lee TH. Providers must lead the way in making value the overarching goal Harvard Bus Rev. October 2013:319.
  8. Jha AK, Orav EJ, Epstein AM. The effect of financial incentives on hospitals that serve poor patients. Ann Intern Med. 2010;153(5):299306.
  9. Joynt KE, Jha AK. Characteristics of hospitals receiving penalties under the Hospital Readmissions Reduction Program. JAMA. 2013;309(4):342343.
  10. Ryan AM. Will value‐based purchasing increase disparities in care? N Engl J Med. 2013;369(26):24722474.
  11. Thorpe KE, Florence CS, Seiber EE. Hospital conversions, margins, and the provision of uncompensated care. Health Aff (Millwood). 2000;19(6):187194.
  12. Borah BJ, Rock MG, Wood DL, Roellinger DL, Johnson MG, Naessens JM. Association between value‐based purchasing score and hospital characteristics. BMC Health Serv Res. 2012;12:464.
  13. Elliott MN, Zaslavsky AM, Goldstein E, et al. Effects of survey mode, patient mix, and nonresponse on CAHPS hospital survey scores. Health Serv Res. 2009;44(2 pt 1):501518.
  14. Burroughs TE, Waterman BM, Cira JC, Desikan R, Claiborne Dunagan W. Patient satisfaction measurement strategies: a comparison of phone and mail methods. Jt Comm J Qual Improv. 2001;27(7):349361.
  15. Fowler FJ, Gallagher PM, Nederend S. Comparing telephone and mail responses to the CAHPS survey instrument. Consumer Assessment of Health Plans Study. Med Care. 1999;37(3 suppl):MS41MS49.
  16. Rodriguez HP, Glahn T, Rogers WH, Chang H, Fanjiang G, Safran DG. Evaluating patients' experiences with individual physicians: a randomized trial of mail, internet, and interactive voice response telephone administration of surveys. Med Care. 2006;44(2):167174.
  17. O'Malley AJ, Zaslavsky AM, Elliott MN, Zaborski L, Cleary PD. Case‐mix adjustment of the CAHPS Hospital Survey. Health Serv Res. 2005;40(6 pt 2):21622181.
  18. Mode and patient‐mix adjustments of CAHPS hospital survey (HCAHPS). Available at: http://www.hcahpsonline.org/modeadjustment.aspx. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  19. Zaslavsky AM, Zaborski LB, Ding L, Shaul JA, Cioffi MJ, Clear PD. Adjusting performance measures to ensure equitable plan comparisons. Health Care Financ Rev. 2001;22(3):109126.
  20. Official Hospital Compare Data. Displaying datasets in Patient Survey Results category. Available at: https://data.medicare.gov/data/hospital‐compare/Patient%20Survey%20Results. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  21. Hospital statistics by state. American Hospital Directory, Inc. website. Available at: http://www.ahd.com/state_statistics.html. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  22. U.S. Census Download Center. Available at: http://factfinder.census.gov/faces/nav/jsf/pages/download_center.xhtml. Accessed December 1, 2013.
References
  1. Florence CS, Atherly A, Thorpe KE. Will choice‐based reform work for Medicare? Evidence from the Federal Employees Health Benefits Program. Health Serv Res. 2006;41:17411761.
  2. H.R. 3590. Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act 2010 (2010).
  3. Donabedian A. The quality of care. How can it be assessed? JAMA. 1988;260(12):17431748.
  4. Lake Superior Quality Innovation Network. FY 2017 Value‐Based Purchasing domain weighting. Available at: http://www.stratishealth.org/documents/VBP‐FY2017.pdf. Accessed March 13, 2015.
  5. Hospital Value‐Based Purchasing Program. Available at: http://www.cms.gov/Medicare/Quality‐Initiatives‐Patient‐Assessment‐Instruments/Hospital‐Value‐Based‐Purchasing. Accessed December 1st, 2013.
  6. Jha AK, Orav EJ, Zheng J, Epstein AM. Patients' perception of hospital care in the United States. N Engl J Med. 2008;359(18):19211931.
  7. Porter ME, Lee TH. Providers must lead the way in making value the overarching goal Harvard Bus Rev. October 2013:319.
  8. Jha AK, Orav EJ, Epstein AM. The effect of financial incentives on hospitals that serve poor patients. Ann Intern Med. 2010;153(5):299306.
  9. Joynt KE, Jha AK. Characteristics of hospitals receiving penalties under the Hospital Readmissions Reduction Program. JAMA. 2013;309(4):342343.
  10. Ryan AM. Will value‐based purchasing increase disparities in care? N Engl J Med. 2013;369(26):24722474.
  11. Thorpe KE, Florence CS, Seiber EE. Hospital conversions, margins, and the provision of uncompensated care. Health Aff (Millwood). 2000;19(6):187194.
  12. Borah BJ, Rock MG, Wood DL, Roellinger DL, Johnson MG, Naessens JM. Association between value‐based purchasing score and hospital characteristics. BMC Health Serv Res. 2012;12:464.
  13. Elliott MN, Zaslavsky AM, Goldstein E, et al. Effects of survey mode, patient mix, and nonresponse on CAHPS hospital survey scores. Health Serv Res. 2009;44(2 pt 1):501518.
  14. Burroughs TE, Waterman BM, Cira JC, Desikan R, Claiborne Dunagan W. Patient satisfaction measurement strategies: a comparison of phone and mail methods. Jt Comm J Qual Improv. 2001;27(7):349361.
  15. Fowler FJ, Gallagher PM, Nederend S. Comparing telephone and mail responses to the CAHPS survey instrument. Consumer Assessment of Health Plans Study. Med Care. 1999;37(3 suppl):MS41MS49.
  16. Rodriguez HP, Glahn T, Rogers WH, Chang H, Fanjiang G, Safran DG. Evaluating patients' experiences with individual physicians: a randomized trial of mail, internet, and interactive voice response telephone administration of surveys. Med Care. 2006;44(2):167174.
  17. O'Malley AJ, Zaslavsky AM, Elliott MN, Zaborski L, Cleary PD. Case‐mix adjustment of the CAHPS Hospital Survey. Health Serv Res. 2005;40(6 pt 2):21622181.
  18. Mode and patient‐mix adjustments of CAHPS hospital survey (HCAHPS). Available at: http://www.hcahpsonline.org/modeadjustment.aspx. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  19. Zaslavsky AM, Zaborski LB, Ding L, Shaul JA, Cioffi MJ, Clear PD. Adjusting performance measures to ensure equitable plan comparisons. Health Care Financ Rev. 2001;22(3):109126.
  20. Official Hospital Compare Data. Displaying datasets in Patient Survey Results category. Available at: https://data.medicare.gov/data/hospital‐compare/Patient%20Survey%20Results. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  21. Hospital statistics by state. American Hospital Directory, Inc. website. Available at: http://www.ahd.com/state_statistics.html. Accessed December 1, 2013.
  22. U.S. Census Download Center. Available at: http://factfinder.census.gov/faces/nav/jsf/pages/download_center.xhtml. Accessed December 1, 2013.
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 10(8)
Issue
Journal of Hospital Medicine - 10(8)
Page Number
503-509
Page Number
503-509
Article Type
Display Headline
Demographic factors and hospital size predict patient satisfaction variance—implications for hospital value‐based purchasing
Display Headline
Demographic factors and hospital size predict patient satisfaction variance—implications for hospital value‐based purchasing
Sections
Article Source

© 2015 Society of Hospital Medicine

Disallow All Ads
Correspondence Location
Address for correspondence and reprint requests: Daniel McFarland, DO, Hematology/Oncology, Mount Sinai Medical Center, One Gustave L. Levy Place, Box 1079, New York, NY 10029; Telephone: 212–659‐5420; Fax: 212–241‐2684; E‐mail: [email protected]
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Article PDF Media
Media Files

Nurse Case Management Fails to Yield Improvements in Blood Pressure and Glycemic Control

Article Type
Changed
Tue, 05/03/2022 - 15:40
Display Headline
Nurse Case Management Fails to Yield Improvements in Blood Pressure and Glycemic Control

Study Overview

Objective. To determine the effectiveness of a nurse-led, telephone-delivered behavioral intervention for diabetes (DM) and hypertension (HTN) versus an attention control within primary care community practices.

Study design. A 9-site, 2-arm randomized controlled trial.

Setting and participants. Study participants were recruited from 9 community practices within the Duke Primary Care Research Consortium. The practices were chosen because they traditionally operate outside of the academic context. Subjects were required to have both type 2 DM and HTN, as indicated by their medications and confirmed by administrative data as well as patient self-reporting. Participants had to have been seen at participating practices for at least 1 year and have poorly controlled DM (indicated by most recent A1c ≥ 7.5%), but they were not required to have poorly controlled HTN. Exclusion criteria included fewer than 1 primary care clinic visit during the previous year, serious comorbid illness, type 1 diabetes, inability to receive a telephone intervention in English, residence in a nursing home, and participation in another hypertension or diabetes study [1]. Participants were randomly assigned using a computer-generated randomization sequence [1] to either the intervention or control groups at a 1:1 ratio, stratified by clinic and baseline blood pressure (BP) control.

Intervention. A single nurse with extensive experience in case management delivered both the behavioral intervention and attention control by telephone. In both arms, calls were conducted once every 2 months over a 24-month period.

The calls in the intervention arm consisted of tailored behavior-modifying techniques according to patient barriers. This content was divided into a series of modules relevant to behaviors associated with improving control of BP or blood sugar, including physical activity, weight reduction, sodium intake, smoking cessation, medication adherence, and others. These modules were scheduled according to patient needs (based on certain parameters such as high body mass index or use of insulin) and preferences [1].

The calls in the attention control were not tailored but rather consisted of didactic health-related information unrelated to HTN or DM (eg, flu shots, skin cancer prevention). This content was also highly scripted and designed to limit the potential for interaction between the nurse and patient.

Main outcome measures. A1c and systolic blood pressure (SBP) were primary outcomes. Key secondary outcomes were diastolic blood pressure (DBP), overall BP control, weight, physical activity, self-efficacy, and medication adherence. Study staff obtained measurements at baseline and 6, 12, and 24 months [1].

Results. The researchers assessed 2601 patients for eligibility and excluded 2224. Most patients were excluded for not meeting inclusion criteria (n = 1156), in particular because of improved HbA1c control (n = 983), and 1064 declined to participate. They randomized 377 patients—193 to the intervention arm and 184 to the attention control arm. Participants had an average age of 58.7, 49.1% had an education level of high school or less, 50.1% were non-white, and 54.9% were unemployed/retired. Patient characteristics in the intervention and control arms were similar at baseline. Seventy-eight percent of patients completed the 12-month follow-up and 70% (263) reached the 24-month endpoint. Patients in the intervention arm completed 78% of scheduled calls while patients in the control group completed 81%.

After adjusting for stratification variables, the estimated mean A1c and SBP were similar between arms at 24 months (intervention 0.1% higher than control, 95% CI −0.3 % to 0.5 %, P = 0.50 for A1c; intervention 0.9 mm Hg lower than control, 95% CI −5.4 to 3.5, P = 0.69 for SBP). There were also no significant differences between arms in mean A1c or SBP at 6 or 12 months. However, A1c levels did improve within each arm at the end of the study, with the intervention group improving by approx-imately 0.5% and the control group improving by approximately 0.6%. In terms of secondary outcomes, there were no significant differences between arms in DBP, weight, physical activity, or BP control rates throughout the 2-year study period.

Conclusion. Overall, the intervention and control groups did not differ significantly in terms of A1c, SBP, or any of the secondary outcomes at any point during the 2-year study.

Commentary

The prevalence of type 2 diabetes and its comorbidities (such as hypertension and obesity) have increased due to a variety of factors including an aging population and an increasingly sedentary lifestyle. Several nurse management programs for DM and HTN have been shown to be efficacious in reducing blood sugar levels [2–4] and promoting BP control [5,6]. However, these interventions were conducted in tightly controlled academic settings, and it is unclear how well these programs may translate into community settings. The aim of this study was to test the effectiveness of a nurse-led behavioral telephone intervention for the comanagement of DM and HTN within non–academically affiliated community practices. Results indicated no significant differences between the intervention and control groups for A1c levels or SBP at any point during the 2-year study, but A1c levels did improve for both arms.

Despite this being a negative study, it is a unique and important contribution to the literature. It is the only trial as of yet that has tested the effectiveness of a nurse management intervention targeting both DM and HTN in a real-world, community setting. This novel approach is supported by data that suggests BP control is actually more cost-effective than intensive glycemic control in treating patients with type 2 diabetes [7]. There were several strengths to the study design, including the use of intention-to-treat analysis, stratified randomization, a diverse patient population, and blinding of the study staff who took BP and A1c measurements. Furthermore, a single nurse conducted all telephone calls, ensuring that differences in counseling skill levels would not affect the results of the study. The few weaknesses of the study included the fact that the nurse who delivered the intervention (as well as the patients) could not be blinded to treatment allocation, and the income of study participants was not reported.

The reasons for the negative outcomes of this study are unclear. The authors claim that similar interventions within academic settings have been shown to be effective and speculate that time and financial pressures of community practices may be reasons that the intervention was not successful. However, the “successful” interventions that they cite were quite different from and more intensive than this intervention. For instance, many of these studies used at least 1 call per month [3,4,8], and one even conducted several calls each week [3]. Furthermore, a DM study conducted by Blackberry et al in a community setting with less than 1 call per month (8 calls over 18 months) similarly failed to produce significant results [9], and therefore more frequent calls may be necessary in DM and HTN interventions. In a systematic review, Eakin et al demonstrated that 12 or more calls in a 6- to 12-month period were associated with better outcomes in physical activity and diet interventions [10], and this may also translate to closely related DM and HTN interventions.

In addition to the infrequent calls, this intervention also lacked communication and integration with patients’ primary care teams. Several studies have demonstrated that integration with primary care teams can improve outcomes in DM and HTN interventions [11,12], and nearly all of the successful studies cited by the authors also included at least some form of communication with patients’ primary care providers (PCPs) [2–4,5,8]. In many of these studies the nurse also had prescribing rights to alter medications [2,3,5]. The nurse in this study met monthly with an expert team of clinicians to discuss patient issues but did not communicate directly with any of the patients’ PCPs [1]. The authors acknowledge that this lack of integration may have contributed to their negative results and point to the fact that it is harder to integrate interventions within community practices that often lack internal integration. However, Walsh, Harris, and Roberts demonstrated that integration between primary and secondary care teams was both feasible and effective for a diabetes initiative within community practices [13].

An additional important feature not present in this intervention was self-monitoring of BP levels. Home self-monitoring of BP has been demonstrated to significantly improve BP levels [14], and 2 of the successful studies in academic settings cited by the authors also included a BP self-monitoring component [5,6]. In one of these studies [6], Bosworth et al conducted a 2 × 2 randomized trial to improve HTN control in which the arms consisted of (a) usual care, (b) bimonthly nurse administered telephone intervention only (this arm was highly similar to the intervention arm in this study), (c) BP monitoring 3 times a week only, and (d) a combination of the telephone intervention with the BP monitoring. Interestingly, the only arm that was successful relative to usual care was the combination of the telephone intervention and BP self-monitoring; the arm consisting only of bi-monthly telephone calls (very similar to this intervention) failed despite the study taking place in an academic setting (it was also less effective than BP monitoring only). Thus, the addition of self-monitoring to a nurse case management telephone intervention can achieve better results.

Applications for Clinical Practice

A telephone-based intervention delivered by a trained nurse for co-management of DM and HTN was not more effective than an attention control delivered by the same nurse in a community setting. This may have been due to several factors, including low intensity marked by less than 1 call per month, a lack of integration with other members of the primary care team, and lack of a BP self-monitoring component. Future studies are needed to determine the optimal type and duration of nurse case management interventions targeting glucose and BP control for diabetic patients in community settings.

—Sandeep Sikerwar, BA, and Melanie Jay, MD, MS

References

1. Crowley MJ, Bosworth HB, Coffman CJ, et al. Tailored Case Management for Diabetes and Hypertension (TEACH-DM) in a community population: study design and baseline sample characteristics. Contemp Clin Trials 2013;36:298–306.

2. Aubert RE, Herman WH, Waters J, et al. Nurse case management to improve glycemic control in diabetic patients in a health maintenance organization. A randomized, controlled trial. Ann Intern Med 1998;129:605–12.

3. Thompson DM, Kozak SE, Sheps S. Insulin adjustment by a diabetes nurse educator improves glucose control in insulin-requiring diabetic patients: a randomized trial. CMAJ 1999;161:959–62.

4. Weinberger M, Kirkman MS, Samsa GP, et al. A nurse-coordinated intervention for primary care patients with non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus: impact on glycemic control and health-related quality of life. J Gen Intern Med 1995;10:59–66.

5. Bosworth HB, Powers BJ, Olsen MK, et al. Home blood pressure management and improved blood pressure control: results from a randomized controlled trial. Arch Intern Med 2011;171:1173–80.

6. Bosworth HB, Olsen MK, Grubber JM, et al. Two self-management interventions to improve hypertension control: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2009;151:687–95.

7. CDC Diabetes Cost-effectiveness Group. Cost-effectiveness of intensive glycemic control, intensified hypertension control, and serum cholesterol level reduction for type 2 diabetes. JAMA 2002;287:2542–51.

8. Mons U, Raum E, Krämer HU, et al. Effectiveness of a supportive telephone counseling intervention in type 2 diabetes patients: randomized controlled study. PLoS One 2013;8:e77954.

9. Blackberry ID, Furler JS, Best JD, et al. Effectiveness of general practice based, practice nurse led telephone coaching on glycaemic control of type 2 diabetes: the Patient Engagement and Coaching for Health (PEACH) pragmatic cluster randomised controlled trial. BMJ 2013;347:f5272.

10. Eakin EG, Lawler SP, Vandelanotte C, Owen N. Telephone interventions for physical activity and dietary behavior change: a systematic review. Am J Prev Med 2007;32:419–34.

11. Shojania KG, Ranji SR, McDonald KM, et al. Effects of quality improvement strategies for type 2 diabetes on glycemic control: a meta-regression analysis. JAMA 2006;296:427–40.

12. Katon WJ, Lin EHB, Von Korff M, et al. Collaborative care for patients with depression and chronic illnesses. N Engl J Med 2010;363:2611–20.

13. Walsh JL, Harris BHL, Roberts AW. Evaluation of a community diabetes initiative: Integrating diabetes care. Prim Care Diabetes 2014 Dec 11.

14. Halme L, Vesalainen R, Kaaja M, Kantola I. Self-monitoring of blood pressure promotes achievement of blood pressure target in primary health care. Am J Hypertens 2005;18:1415–20.

Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Publications
Topics
Sections

Study Overview

Objective. To determine the effectiveness of a nurse-led, telephone-delivered behavioral intervention for diabetes (DM) and hypertension (HTN) versus an attention control within primary care community practices.

Study design. A 9-site, 2-arm randomized controlled trial.

Setting and participants. Study participants were recruited from 9 community practices within the Duke Primary Care Research Consortium. The practices were chosen because they traditionally operate outside of the academic context. Subjects were required to have both type 2 DM and HTN, as indicated by their medications and confirmed by administrative data as well as patient self-reporting. Participants had to have been seen at participating practices for at least 1 year and have poorly controlled DM (indicated by most recent A1c ≥ 7.5%), but they were not required to have poorly controlled HTN. Exclusion criteria included fewer than 1 primary care clinic visit during the previous year, serious comorbid illness, type 1 diabetes, inability to receive a telephone intervention in English, residence in a nursing home, and participation in another hypertension or diabetes study [1]. Participants were randomly assigned using a computer-generated randomization sequence [1] to either the intervention or control groups at a 1:1 ratio, stratified by clinic and baseline blood pressure (BP) control.

Intervention. A single nurse with extensive experience in case management delivered both the behavioral intervention and attention control by telephone. In both arms, calls were conducted once every 2 months over a 24-month period.

The calls in the intervention arm consisted of tailored behavior-modifying techniques according to patient barriers. This content was divided into a series of modules relevant to behaviors associated with improving control of BP or blood sugar, including physical activity, weight reduction, sodium intake, smoking cessation, medication adherence, and others. These modules were scheduled according to patient needs (based on certain parameters such as high body mass index or use of insulin) and preferences [1].

The calls in the attention control were not tailored but rather consisted of didactic health-related information unrelated to HTN or DM (eg, flu shots, skin cancer prevention). This content was also highly scripted and designed to limit the potential for interaction between the nurse and patient.

Main outcome measures. A1c and systolic blood pressure (SBP) were primary outcomes. Key secondary outcomes were diastolic blood pressure (DBP), overall BP control, weight, physical activity, self-efficacy, and medication adherence. Study staff obtained measurements at baseline and 6, 12, and 24 months [1].

Results. The researchers assessed 2601 patients for eligibility and excluded 2224. Most patients were excluded for not meeting inclusion criteria (n = 1156), in particular because of improved HbA1c control (n = 983), and 1064 declined to participate. They randomized 377 patients—193 to the intervention arm and 184 to the attention control arm. Participants had an average age of 58.7, 49.1% had an education level of high school or less, 50.1% were non-white, and 54.9% were unemployed/retired. Patient characteristics in the intervention and control arms were similar at baseline. Seventy-eight percent of patients completed the 12-month follow-up and 70% (263) reached the 24-month endpoint. Patients in the intervention arm completed 78% of scheduled calls while patients in the control group completed 81%.

After adjusting for stratification variables, the estimated mean A1c and SBP were similar between arms at 24 months (intervention 0.1% higher than control, 95% CI −0.3 % to 0.5 %, P = 0.50 for A1c; intervention 0.9 mm Hg lower than control, 95% CI −5.4 to 3.5, P = 0.69 for SBP). There were also no significant differences between arms in mean A1c or SBP at 6 or 12 months. However, A1c levels did improve within each arm at the end of the study, with the intervention group improving by approx-imately 0.5% and the control group improving by approximately 0.6%. In terms of secondary outcomes, there were no significant differences between arms in DBP, weight, physical activity, or BP control rates throughout the 2-year study period.

Conclusion. Overall, the intervention and control groups did not differ significantly in terms of A1c, SBP, or any of the secondary outcomes at any point during the 2-year study.

Commentary

The prevalence of type 2 diabetes and its comorbidities (such as hypertension and obesity) have increased due to a variety of factors including an aging population and an increasingly sedentary lifestyle. Several nurse management programs for DM and HTN have been shown to be efficacious in reducing blood sugar levels [2–4] and promoting BP control [5,6]. However, these interventions were conducted in tightly controlled academic settings, and it is unclear how well these programs may translate into community settings. The aim of this study was to test the effectiveness of a nurse-led behavioral telephone intervention for the comanagement of DM and HTN within non–academically affiliated community practices. Results indicated no significant differences between the intervention and control groups for A1c levels or SBP at any point during the 2-year study, but A1c levels did improve for both arms.

Despite this being a negative study, it is a unique and important contribution to the literature. It is the only trial as of yet that has tested the effectiveness of a nurse management intervention targeting both DM and HTN in a real-world, community setting. This novel approach is supported by data that suggests BP control is actually more cost-effective than intensive glycemic control in treating patients with type 2 diabetes [7]. There were several strengths to the study design, including the use of intention-to-treat analysis, stratified randomization, a diverse patient population, and blinding of the study staff who took BP and A1c measurements. Furthermore, a single nurse conducted all telephone calls, ensuring that differences in counseling skill levels would not affect the results of the study. The few weaknesses of the study included the fact that the nurse who delivered the intervention (as well as the patients) could not be blinded to treatment allocation, and the income of study participants was not reported.

The reasons for the negative outcomes of this study are unclear. The authors claim that similar interventions within academic settings have been shown to be effective and speculate that time and financial pressures of community practices may be reasons that the intervention was not successful. However, the “successful” interventions that they cite were quite different from and more intensive than this intervention. For instance, many of these studies used at least 1 call per month [3,4,8], and one even conducted several calls each week [3]. Furthermore, a DM study conducted by Blackberry et al in a community setting with less than 1 call per month (8 calls over 18 months) similarly failed to produce significant results [9], and therefore more frequent calls may be necessary in DM and HTN interventions. In a systematic review, Eakin et al demonstrated that 12 or more calls in a 6- to 12-month period were associated with better outcomes in physical activity and diet interventions [10], and this may also translate to closely related DM and HTN interventions.

In addition to the infrequent calls, this intervention also lacked communication and integration with patients’ primary care teams. Several studies have demonstrated that integration with primary care teams can improve outcomes in DM and HTN interventions [11,12], and nearly all of the successful studies cited by the authors also included at least some form of communication with patients’ primary care providers (PCPs) [2–4,5,8]. In many of these studies the nurse also had prescribing rights to alter medications [2,3,5]. The nurse in this study met monthly with an expert team of clinicians to discuss patient issues but did not communicate directly with any of the patients’ PCPs [1]. The authors acknowledge that this lack of integration may have contributed to their negative results and point to the fact that it is harder to integrate interventions within community practices that often lack internal integration. However, Walsh, Harris, and Roberts demonstrated that integration between primary and secondary care teams was both feasible and effective for a diabetes initiative within community practices [13].

An additional important feature not present in this intervention was self-monitoring of BP levels. Home self-monitoring of BP has been demonstrated to significantly improve BP levels [14], and 2 of the successful studies in academic settings cited by the authors also included a BP self-monitoring component [5,6]. In one of these studies [6], Bosworth et al conducted a 2 × 2 randomized trial to improve HTN control in which the arms consisted of (a) usual care, (b) bimonthly nurse administered telephone intervention only (this arm was highly similar to the intervention arm in this study), (c) BP monitoring 3 times a week only, and (d) a combination of the telephone intervention with the BP monitoring. Interestingly, the only arm that was successful relative to usual care was the combination of the telephone intervention and BP self-monitoring; the arm consisting only of bi-monthly telephone calls (very similar to this intervention) failed despite the study taking place in an academic setting (it was also less effective than BP monitoring only). Thus, the addition of self-monitoring to a nurse case management telephone intervention can achieve better results.

Applications for Clinical Practice

A telephone-based intervention delivered by a trained nurse for co-management of DM and HTN was not more effective than an attention control delivered by the same nurse in a community setting. This may have been due to several factors, including low intensity marked by less than 1 call per month, a lack of integration with other members of the primary care team, and lack of a BP self-monitoring component. Future studies are needed to determine the optimal type and duration of nurse case management interventions targeting glucose and BP control for diabetic patients in community settings.

—Sandeep Sikerwar, BA, and Melanie Jay, MD, MS

Study Overview

Objective. To determine the effectiveness of a nurse-led, telephone-delivered behavioral intervention for diabetes (DM) and hypertension (HTN) versus an attention control within primary care community practices.

Study design. A 9-site, 2-arm randomized controlled trial.

Setting and participants. Study participants were recruited from 9 community practices within the Duke Primary Care Research Consortium. The practices were chosen because they traditionally operate outside of the academic context. Subjects were required to have both type 2 DM and HTN, as indicated by their medications and confirmed by administrative data as well as patient self-reporting. Participants had to have been seen at participating practices for at least 1 year and have poorly controlled DM (indicated by most recent A1c ≥ 7.5%), but they were not required to have poorly controlled HTN. Exclusion criteria included fewer than 1 primary care clinic visit during the previous year, serious comorbid illness, type 1 diabetes, inability to receive a telephone intervention in English, residence in a nursing home, and participation in another hypertension or diabetes study [1]. Participants were randomly assigned using a computer-generated randomization sequence [1] to either the intervention or control groups at a 1:1 ratio, stratified by clinic and baseline blood pressure (BP) control.

Intervention. A single nurse with extensive experience in case management delivered both the behavioral intervention and attention control by telephone. In both arms, calls were conducted once every 2 months over a 24-month period.

The calls in the intervention arm consisted of tailored behavior-modifying techniques according to patient barriers. This content was divided into a series of modules relevant to behaviors associated with improving control of BP or blood sugar, including physical activity, weight reduction, sodium intake, smoking cessation, medication adherence, and others. These modules were scheduled according to patient needs (based on certain parameters such as high body mass index or use of insulin) and preferences [1].

The calls in the attention control were not tailored but rather consisted of didactic health-related information unrelated to HTN or DM (eg, flu shots, skin cancer prevention). This content was also highly scripted and designed to limit the potential for interaction between the nurse and patient.

Main outcome measures. A1c and systolic blood pressure (SBP) were primary outcomes. Key secondary outcomes were diastolic blood pressure (DBP), overall BP control, weight, physical activity, self-efficacy, and medication adherence. Study staff obtained measurements at baseline and 6, 12, and 24 months [1].

Results. The researchers assessed 2601 patients for eligibility and excluded 2224. Most patients were excluded for not meeting inclusion criteria (n = 1156), in particular because of improved HbA1c control (n = 983), and 1064 declined to participate. They randomized 377 patients—193 to the intervention arm and 184 to the attention control arm. Participants had an average age of 58.7, 49.1% had an education level of high school or less, 50.1% were non-white, and 54.9% were unemployed/retired. Patient characteristics in the intervention and control arms were similar at baseline. Seventy-eight percent of patients completed the 12-month follow-up and 70% (263) reached the 24-month endpoint. Patients in the intervention arm completed 78% of scheduled calls while patients in the control group completed 81%.

After adjusting for stratification variables, the estimated mean A1c and SBP were similar between arms at 24 months (intervention 0.1% higher than control, 95% CI −0.3 % to 0.5 %, P = 0.50 for A1c; intervention 0.9 mm Hg lower than control, 95% CI −5.4 to 3.5, P = 0.69 for SBP). There were also no significant differences between arms in mean A1c or SBP at 6 or 12 months. However, A1c levels did improve within each arm at the end of the study, with the intervention group improving by approx-imately 0.5% and the control group improving by approximately 0.6%. In terms of secondary outcomes, there were no significant differences between arms in DBP, weight, physical activity, or BP control rates throughout the 2-year study period.

Conclusion. Overall, the intervention and control groups did not differ significantly in terms of A1c, SBP, or any of the secondary outcomes at any point during the 2-year study.

Commentary

The prevalence of type 2 diabetes and its comorbidities (such as hypertension and obesity) have increased due to a variety of factors including an aging population and an increasingly sedentary lifestyle. Several nurse management programs for DM and HTN have been shown to be efficacious in reducing blood sugar levels [2–4] and promoting BP control [5,6]. However, these interventions were conducted in tightly controlled academic settings, and it is unclear how well these programs may translate into community settings. The aim of this study was to test the effectiveness of a nurse-led behavioral telephone intervention for the comanagement of DM and HTN within non–academically affiliated community practices. Results indicated no significant differences between the intervention and control groups for A1c levels or SBP at any point during the 2-year study, but A1c levels did improve for both arms.

Despite this being a negative study, it is a unique and important contribution to the literature. It is the only trial as of yet that has tested the effectiveness of a nurse management intervention targeting both DM and HTN in a real-world, community setting. This novel approach is supported by data that suggests BP control is actually more cost-effective than intensive glycemic control in treating patients with type 2 diabetes [7]. There were several strengths to the study design, including the use of intention-to-treat analysis, stratified randomization, a diverse patient population, and blinding of the study staff who took BP and A1c measurements. Furthermore, a single nurse conducted all telephone calls, ensuring that differences in counseling skill levels would not affect the results of the study. The few weaknesses of the study included the fact that the nurse who delivered the intervention (as well as the patients) could not be blinded to treatment allocation, and the income of study participants was not reported.

The reasons for the negative outcomes of this study are unclear. The authors claim that similar interventions within academic settings have been shown to be effective and speculate that time and financial pressures of community practices may be reasons that the intervention was not successful. However, the “successful” interventions that they cite were quite different from and more intensive than this intervention. For instance, many of these studies used at least 1 call per month [3,4,8], and one even conducted several calls each week [3]. Furthermore, a DM study conducted by Blackberry et al in a community setting with less than 1 call per month (8 calls over 18 months) similarly failed to produce significant results [9], and therefore more frequent calls may be necessary in DM and HTN interventions. In a systematic review, Eakin et al demonstrated that 12 or more calls in a 6- to 12-month period were associated with better outcomes in physical activity and diet interventions [10], and this may also translate to closely related DM and HTN interventions.

In addition to the infrequent calls, this intervention also lacked communication and integration with patients’ primary care teams. Several studies have demonstrated that integration with primary care teams can improve outcomes in DM and HTN interventions [11,12], and nearly all of the successful studies cited by the authors also included at least some form of communication with patients’ primary care providers (PCPs) [2–4,5,8]. In many of these studies the nurse also had prescribing rights to alter medications [2,3,5]. The nurse in this study met monthly with an expert team of clinicians to discuss patient issues but did not communicate directly with any of the patients’ PCPs [1]. The authors acknowledge that this lack of integration may have contributed to their negative results and point to the fact that it is harder to integrate interventions within community practices that often lack internal integration. However, Walsh, Harris, and Roberts demonstrated that integration between primary and secondary care teams was both feasible and effective for a diabetes initiative within community practices [13].

An additional important feature not present in this intervention was self-monitoring of BP levels. Home self-monitoring of BP has been demonstrated to significantly improve BP levels [14], and 2 of the successful studies in academic settings cited by the authors also included a BP self-monitoring component [5,6]. In one of these studies [6], Bosworth et al conducted a 2 × 2 randomized trial to improve HTN control in which the arms consisted of (a) usual care, (b) bimonthly nurse administered telephone intervention only (this arm was highly similar to the intervention arm in this study), (c) BP monitoring 3 times a week only, and (d) a combination of the telephone intervention with the BP monitoring. Interestingly, the only arm that was successful relative to usual care was the combination of the telephone intervention and BP self-monitoring; the arm consisting only of bi-monthly telephone calls (very similar to this intervention) failed despite the study taking place in an academic setting (it was also less effective than BP monitoring only). Thus, the addition of self-monitoring to a nurse case management telephone intervention can achieve better results.

Applications for Clinical Practice

A telephone-based intervention delivered by a trained nurse for co-management of DM and HTN was not more effective than an attention control delivered by the same nurse in a community setting. This may have been due to several factors, including low intensity marked by less than 1 call per month, a lack of integration with other members of the primary care team, and lack of a BP self-monitoring component. Future studies are needed to determine the optimal type and duration of nurse case management interventions targeting glucose and BP control for diabetic patients in community settings.

—Sandeep Sikerwar, BA, and Melanie Jay, MD, MS

References

1. Crowley MJ, Bosworth HB, Coffman CJ, et al. Tailored Case Management for Diabetes and Hypertension (TEACH-DM) in a community population: study design and baseline sample characteristics. Contemp Clin Trials 2013;36:298–306.

2. Aubert RE, Herman WH, Waters J, et al. Nurse case management to improve glycemic control in diabetic patients in a health maintenance organization. A randomized, controlled trial. Ann Intern Med 1998;129:605–12.

3. Thompson DM, Kozak SE, Sheps S. Insulin adjustment by a diabetes nurse educator improves glucose control in insulin-requiring diabetic patients: a randomized trial. CMAJ 1999;161:959–62.

4. Weinberger M, Kirkman MS, Samsa GP, et al. A nurse-coordinated intervention for primary care patients with non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus: impact on glycemic control and health-related quality of life. J Gen Intern Med 1995;10:59–66.

5. Bosworth HB, Powers BJ, Olsen MK, et al. Home blood pressure management and improved blood pressure control: results from a randomized controlled trial. Arch Intern Med 2011;171:1173–80.

6. Bosworth HB, Olsen MK, Grubber JM, et al. Two self-management interventions to improve hypertension control: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2009;151:687–95.

7. CDC Diabetes Cost-effectiveness Group. Cost-effectiveness of intensive glycemic control, intensified hypertension control, and serum cholesterol level reduction for type 2 diabetes. JAMA 2002;287:2542–51.

8. Mons U, Raum E, Krämer HU, et al. Effectiveness of a supportive telephone counseling intervention in type 2 diabetes patients: randomized controlled study. PLoS One 2013;8:e77954.

9. Blackberry ID, Furler JS, Best JD, et al. Effectiveness of general practice based, practice nurse led telephone coaching on glycaemic control of type 2 diabetes: the Patient Engagement and Coaching for Health (PEACH) pragmatic cluster randomised controlled trial. BMJ 2013;347:f5272.

10. Eakin EG, Lawler SP, Vandelanotte C, Owen N. Telephone interventions for physical activity and dietary behavior change: a systematic review. Am J Prev Med 2007;32:419–34.

11. Shojania KG, Ranji SR, McDonald KM, et al. Effects of quality improvement strategies for type 2 diabetes on glycemic control: a meta-regression analysis. JAMA 2006;296:427–40.

12. Katon WJ, Lin EHB, Von Korff M, et al. Collaborative care for patients with depression and chronic illnesses. N Engl J Med 2010;363:2611–20.

13. Walsh JL, Harris BHL, Roberts AW. Evaluation of a community diabetes initiative: Integrating diabetes care. Prim Care Diabetes 2014 Dec 11.

14. Halme L, Vesalainen R, Kaaja M, Kantola I. Self-monitoring of blood pressure promotes achievement of blood pressure target in primary health care. Am J Hypertens 2005;18:1415–20.

References

1. Crowley MJ, Bosworth HB, Coffman CJ, et al. Tailored Case Management for Diabetes and Hypertension (TEACH-DM) in a community population: study design and baseline sample characteristics. Contemp Clin Trials 2013;36:298–306.

2. Aubert RE, Herman WH, Waters J, et al. Nurse case management to improve glycemic control in diabetic patients in a health maintenance organization. A randomized, controlled trial. Ann Intern Med 1998;129:605–12.

3. Thompson DM, Kozak SE, Sheps S. Insulin adjustment by a diabetes nurse educator improves glucose control in insulin-requiring diabetic patients: a randomized trial. CMAJ 1999;161:959–62.

4. Weinberger M, Kirkman MS, Samsa GP, et al. A nurse-coordinated intervention for primary care patients with non-insulin-dependent diabetes mellitus: impact on glycemic control and health-related quality of life. J Gen Intern Med 1995;10:59–66.

5. Bosworth HB, Powers BJ, Olsen MK, et al. Home blood pressure management and improved blood pressure control: results from a randomized controlled trial. Arch Intern Med 2011;171:1173–80.

6. Bosworth HB, Olsen MK, Grubber JM, et al. Two self-management interventions to improve hypertension control: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2009;151:687–95.

7. CDC Diabetes Cost-effectiveness Group. Cost-effectiveness of intensive glycemic control, intensified hypertension control, and serum cholesterol level reduction for type 2 diabetes. JAMA 2002;287:2542–51.

8. Mons U, Raum E, Krämer HU, et al. Effectiveness of a supportive telephone counseling intervention in type 2 diabetes patients: randomized controlled study. PLoS One 2013;8:e77954.

9. Blackberry ID, Furler JS, Best JD, et al. Effectiveness of general practice based, practice nurse led telephone coaching on glycaemic control of type 2 diabetes: the Patient Engagement and Coaching for Health (PEACH) pragmatic cluster randomised controlled trial. BMJ 2013;347:f5272.

10. Eakin EG, Lawler SP, Vandelanotte C, Owen N. Telephone interventions for physical activity and dietary behavior change: a systematic review. Am J Prev Med 2007;32:419–34.

11. Shojania KG, Ranji SR, McDonald KM, et al. Effects of quality improvement strategies for type 2 diabetes on glycemic control: a meta-regression analysis. JAMA 2006;296:427–40.

12. Katon WJ, Lin EHB, Von Korff M, et al. Collaborative care for patients with depression and chronic illnesses. N Engl J Med 2010;363:2611–20.

13. Walsh JL, Harris BHL, Roberts AW. Evaluation of a community diabetes initiative: Integrating diabetes care. Prim Care Diabetes 2014 Dec 11.

14. Halme L, Vesalainen R, Kaaja M, Kantola I. Self-monitoring of blood pressure promotes achievement of blood pressure target in primary health care. Am J Hypertens 2005;18:1415–20.

Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Nurse Case Management Fails to Yield Improvements in Blood Pressure and Glycemic Control
Display Headline
Nurse Case Management Fails to Yield Improvements in Blood Pressure and Glycemic Control
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default

Which Revascularization Strategy for Multivessel Coronary Disease?

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 03/01/2018 - 15:22
Display Headline
Which Revascularization Strategy for Multivessel Coronary Disease?

Study Overview

Objective. To compare percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI) using second-generation drug-eluting stents (everolimus-eluting stents) with coronary artery bypass grafting (CABG) among patients with multivessel coronary disease.

Design. Observational registry study with propensity-score matching.

Setting and participants. The study relies on patients identified from the Cardiac Surgery Reporting System (CSRS) and Percutaneous Coronary Intervention Reporting System (PCIRS) registries of the New York State Department of Health. These 2 registries were linked to the New York State Vital Statistics Death registry and to the Statewide Planning and Research Cooperative System registry (SPARCS) to obtain further information like dates of admission, surgery, discharge, and death. Subjects were eligible for inclusion if they had multivessel disease (defined as severe stenosis [≥ 70%] in at least 2 diseased major epicardial coronary arteries) and if they had undergone either PCI with implantation of an everolimus-eluting stent or CABG. Subjects were excluded if they had revascularization within 1 year before index procedure; previous cardiac surgery; severe left main coronary artery disease (degree of stenosis ≥ 50%); PCI with a stent other than an everolimus-eluting stent; myocardial infarction without 24 hours before the index procedure; and unstable hemodynamics or cardiogenic shock.

Main outcome measures. The primary outcome of the study was all-cause mortality. Various secondary outcomes included rates of myocardial infarction, stroke, and repeat vascularization.

Main results. Among 116,915 patients assessed for eligibility, 82,096 were excluded. Among 34,819 who met inclusion criteria, 18,446 were included in the propensity score–matched analysis. With a 1:1 matching algorithm, 9223 were in the PCI with everolimus-eluting stent group and 9223 were in the CABG group. Short-term outcomes (in hospital or ≤ 30 days after the index procedure) favored PCI with everolimus-eluting stents over CABG, with a significantly lower risk of death (0.6% vs. 1.1%; hazard ratio [HR], 0.49; 95% confidence interval [CI], 0.35 to 0.69; P < 0.002) as well as stroke (0.2% vs 1.2%; HR, 0.18; 95% CI, 0.11 to 0.29; P < 0.001). The 2 groups had similar rates of myocardial infarction in the short-term (0.5% and 0.4%; HR, 1.37; 95% CI, 0.89 to 2.12; P = 0.16). After a mean follow-up of 2.9 years, there was a similar annual death rate between groups: 3.1% for PCI and 2.9% for CABG (HR, 1.04; 95% CI, 0.93 to 1.17; P = 0.50). PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a higher risk of a first myocardial infarction than was CABG (1.9% vs 1.1% per year; HR, 1.51; 95% CI, 1.29 to 1.77; P < 0.001). PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a lower risk of a first stroke than CABG (0.7% vs. 1.0% per year; HR, 0.62; 95% CI, 0.50 to 0.76; P < 0.001). Finally, PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a higher risk of a first repeat-revascularization procedure than CABG (7.2% vs. 3.1% per year; HR, 2.35; 95% CI, 2.14 to 2.58; P < 0.001).

Conclusion. In the setting of newer stent technology with second-generation everolimus-eluting stents, the risk of death associated with PCI was similar to that associated with CABG for multivessel coronary artery disease. In the long-term, PCI was associated with a higher risk of myocardial infarction and repeat revascularization, whereas CABG was associated with an increased risk of stroke. In the short-term, PCI had lower risks of both death and stroke.

Commentary

Coronary artery disease is a major public health problem. For patients for whom revascularization is deemed to be appropriate, a choice must be made between PCI and CABG. In previous studies that compared PCI and CABG, CABG was shown to have less need for repeat revascularizations as well as mortality benefits [1–3]. However, these prior studies compared CABG with older generations of stents. In the past decade, stent technologies have improved, as the bare-metal stent era gave way to the first generation of of drug-eluting stents (with sirolimus or paclitaxel), to be followed by second-generation drug-eluting stents (with everolimus or zotarolimus) [4].

In this article, Bangalore and colleagues addressed the issue of whether the use of second-generation drug-eluting stents close the outcome gap that favors CABG over PCI in patients with multivessel coronary artery disease. In patients who were considered to have had complete revascularization performed during PCI (ie, revascularization of all major vessels with clinically significant stenosis), they noted mitigation of the outcome differences between the PCI group and the CABG group. They conclude that the decision-making process by patients and their providers regarding revascularization be placed in the context of individual values and preferences.

One major limitation is that the study is an observational study from registry data. Despite the use of sophisticated statistical techniques including propensity score matching to adjust for confounders that are implicit in any nonrandomized comparison of treatment strategies, observational studies suffer from the definitely proof of causality. These limitations are especially important when the two groups being compared have modest differences in outcome.

Applications for Clinical Practice

This observational study, together with a recent randomized clinical trial in which CABG was compared with PCI with the use of everolimus-eluting stents from the BEST trial [5], provided new insights of the 2 revascularization strategies. Clinicians should engage and empower patients with a shared decision-making approach. The early hazard of CABG in stroke and death may be unacceptable to some patients, whereas others might want to avoid the later hazards of PCI in repeat procedure or having a myocardial infarction. Until a definitive study is available, patients should be informed of the best current knowledge of the pros and cons of the two revascularization strategies.

 —Ka Ming Gordon Ngai, MD, MPH

 

References

1. Farooq V, van Klaveren D, Steyerberg EW, et al. Anatomical and clinical characteristics to guide decision making between coronary artery bypass surgery and percutaneous coronary intervention for individual patients: development and validation of SYNTAX score II. Lancet 2013;381: 639–50.

2. Hannan EL, Racz MJ, Arani DT, et al. A comparison of short- and long-term outcomes for balloon angioplasty and coronary stent placement. J Am Coll Cardiol 2000;36:395–403.

3. Hannan EL, Racz MJ, Walford G, et al. Long-term outcomes of coronary-artery bypass grafting versus stent implantation. N Engl J Med 2005;352: 2174–83.

4. Harrington RA. Selecting revascularization strategies in patients with coronary disease. N Engl J Med 2015;372: 1261–3.

5. Park SJ, Ahn JM, Kim YH, et al. Trial of everolimus-eluting stents or bypass surgery for coronary disease. N Engl J Med 2015;372:1204–12.

Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Publications
Topics
Sections

Study Overview

Objective. To compare percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI) using second-generation drug-eluting stents (everolimus-eluting stents) with coronary artery bypass grafting (CABG) among patients with multivessel coronary disease.

Design. Observational registry study with propensity-score matching.

Setting and participants. The study relies on patients identified from the Cardiac Surgery Reporting System (CSRS) and Percutaneous Coronary Intervention Reporting System (PCIRS) registries of the New York State Department of Health. These 2 registries were linked to the New York State Vital Statistics Death registry and to the Statewide Planning and Research Cooperative System registry (SPARCS) to obtain further information like dates of admission, surgery, discharge, and death. Subjects were eligible for inclusion if they had multivessel disease (defined as severe stenosis [≥ 70%] in at least 2 diseased major epicardial coronary arteries) and if they had undergone either PCI with implantation of an everolimus-eluting stent or CABG. Subjects were excluded if they had revascularization within 1 year before index procedure; previous cardiac surgery; severe left main coronary artery disease (degree of stenosis ≥ 50%); PCI with a stent other than an everolimus-eluting stent; myocardial infarction without 24 hours before the index procedure; and unstable hemodynamics or cardiogenic shock.

Main outcome measures. The primary outcome of the study was all-cause mortality. Various secondary outcomes included rates of myocardial infarction, stroke, and repeat vascularization.

Main results. Among 116,915 patients assessed for eligibility, 82,096 were excluded. Among 34,819 who met inclusion criteria, 18,446 were included in the propensity score–matched analysis. With a 1:1 matching algorithm, 9223 were in the PCI with everolimus-eluting stent group and 9223 were in the CABG group. Short-term outcomes (in hospital or ≤ 30 days after the index procedure) favored PCI with everolimus-eluting stents over CABG, with a significantly lower risk of death (0.6% vs. 1.1%; hazard ratio [HR], 0.49; 95% confidence interval [CI], 0.35 to 0.69; P < 0.002) as well as stroke (0.2% vs 1.2%; HR, 0.18; 95% CI, 0.11 to 0.29; P < 0.001). The 2 groups had similar rates of myocardial infarction in the short-term (0.5% and 0.4%; HR, 1.37; 95% CI, 0.89 to 2.12; P = 0.16). After a mean follow-up of 2.9 years, there was a similar annual death rate between groups: 3.1% for PCI and 2.9% for CABG (HR, 1.04; 95% CI, 0.93 to 1.17; P = 0.50). PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a higher risk of a first myocardial infarction than was CABG (1.9% vs 1.1% per year; HR, 1.51; 95% CI, 1.29 to 1.77; P < 0.001). PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a lower risk of a first stroke than CABG (0.7% vs. 1.0% per year; HR, 0.62; 95% CI, 0.50 to 0.76; P < 0.001). Finally, PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a higher risk of a first repeat-revascularization procedure than CABG (7.2% vs. 3.1% per year; HR, 2.35; 95% CI, 2.14 to 2.58; P < 0.001).

Conclusion. In the setting of newer stent technology with second-generation everolimus-eluting stents, the risk of death associated with PCI was similar to that associated with CABG for multivessel coronary artery disease. In the long-term, PCI was associated with a higher risk of myocardial infarction and repeat revascularization, whereas CABG was associated with an increased risk of stroke. In the short-term, PCI had lower risks of both death and stroke.

Commentary

Coronary artery disease is a major public health problem. For patients for whom revascularization is deemed to be appropriate, a choice must be made between PCI and CABG. In previous studies that compared PCI and CABG, CABG was shown to have less need for repeat revascularizations as well as mortality benefits [1–3]. However, these prior studies compared CABG with older generations of stents. In the past decade, stent technologies have improved, as the bare-metal stent era gave way to the first generation of of drug-eluting stents (with sirolimus or paclitaxel), to be followed by second-generation drug-eluting stents (with everolimus or zotarolimus) [4].

In this article, Bangalore and colleagues addressed the issue of whether the use of second-generation drug-eluting stents close the outcome gap that favors CABG over PCI in patients with multivessel coronary artery disease. In patients who were considered to have had complete revascularization performed during PCI (ie, revascularization of all major vessels with clinically significant stenosis), they noted mitigation of the outcome differences between the PCI group and the CABG group. They conclude that the decision-making process by patients and their providers regarding revascularization be placed in the context of individual values and preferences.

One major limitation is that the study is an observational study from registry data. Despite the use of sophisticated statistical techniques including propensity score matching to adjust for confounders that are implicit in any nonrandomized comparison of treatment strategies, observational studies suffer from the definitely proof of causality. These limitations are especially important when the two groups being compared have modest differences in outcome.

Applications for Clinical Practice

This observational study, together with a recent randomized clinical trial in which CABG was compared with PCI with the use of everolimus-eluting stents from the BEST trial [5], provided new insights of the 2 revascularization strategies. Clinicians should engage and empower patients with a shared decision-making approach. The early hazard of CABG in stroke and death may be unacceptable to some patients, whereas others might want to avoid the later hazards of PCI in repeat procedure or having a myocardial infarction. Until a definitive study is available, patients should be informed of the best current knowledge of the pros and cons of the two revascularization strategies.

 —Ka Ming Gordon Ngai, MD, MPH

 

Study Overview

Objective. To compare percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI) using second-generation drug-eluting stents (everolimus-eluting stents) with coronary artery bypass grafting (CABG) among patients with multivessel coronary disease.

Design. Observational registry study with propensity-score matching.

Setting and participants. The study relies on patients identified from the Cardiac Surgery Reporting System (CSRS) and Percutaneous Coronary Intervention Reporting System (PCIRS) registries of the New York State Department of Health. These 2 registries were linked to the New York State Vital Statistics Death registry and to the Statewide Planning and Research Cooperative System registry (SPARCS) to obtain further information like dates of admission, surgery, discharge, and death. Subjects were eligible for inclusion if they had multivessel disease (defined as severe stenosis [≥ 70%] in at least 2 diseased major epicardial coronary arteries) and if they had undergone either PCI with implantation of an everolimus-eluting stent or CABG. Subjects were excluded if they had revascularization within 1 year before index procedure; previous cardiac surgery; severe left main coronary artery disease (degree of stenosis ≥ 50%); PCI with a stent other than an everolimus-eluting stent; myocardial infarction without 24 hours before the index procedure; and unstable hemodynamics or cardiogenic shock.

Main outcome measures. The primary outcome of the study was all-cause mortality. Various secondary outcomes included rates of myocardial infarction, stroke, and repeat vascularization.

Main results. Among 116,915 patients assessed for eligibility, 82,096 were excluded. Among 34,819 who met inclusion criteria, 18,446 were included in the propensity score–matched analysis. With a 1:1 matching algorithm, 9223 were in the PCI with everolimus-eluting stent group and 9223 were in the CABG group. Short-term outcomes (in hospital or ≤ 30 days after the index procedure) favored PCI with everolimus-eluting stents over CABG, with a significantly lower risk of death (0.6% vs. 1.1%; hazard ratio [HR], 0.49; 95% confidence interval [CI], 0.35 to 0.69; P < 0.002) as well as stroke (0.2% vs 1.2%; HR, 0.18; 95% CI, 0.11 to 0.29; P < 0.001). The 2 groups had similar rates of myocardial infarction in the short-term (0.5% and 0.4%; HR, 1.37; 95% CI, 0.89 to 2.12; P = 0.16). After a mean follow-up of 2.9 years, there was a similar annual death rate between groups: 3.1% for PCI and 2.9% for CABG (HR, 1.04; 95% CI, 0.93 to 1.17; P = 0.50). PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a higher risk of a first myocardial infarction than was CABG (1.9% vs 1.1% per year; HR, 1.51; 95% CI, 1.29 to 1.77; P < 0.001). PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a lower risk of a first stroke than CABG (0.7% vs. 1.0% per year; HR, 0.62; 95% CI, 0.50 to 0.76; P < 0.001). Finally, PCI with everolimus-eluting stents was associated with a higher risk of a first repeat-revascularization procedure than CABG (7.2% vs. 3.1% per year; HR, 2.35; 95% CI, 2.14 to 2.58; P < 0.001).

Conclusion. In the setting of newer stent technology with second-generation everolimus-eluting stents, the risk of death associated with PCI was similar to that associated with CABG for multivessel coronary artery disease. In the long-term, PCI was associated with a higher risk of myocardial infarction and repeat revascularization, whereas CABG was associated with an increased risk of stroke. In the short-term, PCI had lower risks of both death and stroke.

Commentary

Coronary artery disease is a major public health problem. For patients for whom revascularization is deemed to be appropriate, a choice must be made between PCI and CABG. In previous studies that compared PCI and CABG, CABG was shown to have less need for repeat revascularizations as well as mortality benefits [1–3]. However, these prior studies compared CABG with older generations of stents. In the past decade, stent technologies have improved, as the bare-metal stent era gave way to the first generation of of drug-eluting stents (with sirolimus or paclitaxel), to be followed by second-generation drug-eluting stents (with everolimus or zotarolimus) [4].

In this article, Bangalore and colleagues addressed the issue of whether the use of second-generation drug-eluting stents close the outcome gap that favors CABG over PCI in patients with multivessel coronary artery disease. In patients who were considered to have had complete revascularization performed during PCI (ie, revascularization of all major vessels with clinically significant stenosis), they noted mitigation of the outcome differences between the PCI group and the CABG group. They conclude that the decision-making process by patients and their providers regarding revascularization be placed in the context of individual values and preferences.

One major limitation is that the study is an observational study from registry data. Despite the use of sophisticated statistical techniques including propensity score matching to adjust for confounders that are implicit in any nonrandomized comparison of treatment strategies, observational studies suffer from the definitely proof of causality. These limitations are especially important when the two groups being compared have modest differences in outcome.

Applications for Clinical Practice

This observational study, together with a recent randomized clinical trial in which CABG was compared with PCI with the use of everolimus-eluting stents from the BEST trial [5], provided new insights of the 2 revascularization strategies. Clinicians should engage and empower patients with a shared decision-making approach. The early hazard of CABG in stroke and death may be unacceptable to some patients, whereas others might want to avoid the later hazards of PCI in repeat procedure or having a myocardial infarction. Until a definitive study is available, patients should be informed of the best current knowledge of the pros and cons of the two revascularization strategies.

 —Ka Ming Gordon Ngai, MD, MPH

 

References

1. Farooq V, van Klaveren D, Steyerberg EW, et al. Anatomical and clinical characteristics to guide decision making between coronary artery bypass surgery and percutaneous coronary intervention for individual patients: development and validation of SYNTAX score II. Lancet 2013;381: 639–50.

2. Hannan EL, Racz MJ, Arani DT, et al. A comparison of short- and long-term outcomes for balloon angioplasty and coronary stent placement. J Am Coll Cardiol 2000;36:395–403.

3. Hannan EL, Racz MJ, Walford G, et al. Long-term outcomes of coronary-artery bypass grafting versus stent implantation. N Engl J Med 2005;352: 2174–83.

4. Harrington RA. Selecting revascularization strategies in patients with coronary disease. N Engl J Med 2015;372: 1261–3.

5. Park SJ, Ahn JM, Kim YH, et al. Trial of everolimus-eluting stents or bypass surgery for coronary disease. N Engl J Med 2015;372:1204–12.

References

1. Farooq V, van Klaveren D, Steyerberg EW, et al. Anatomical and clinical characteristics to guide decision making between coronary artery bypass surgery and percutaneous coronary intervention for individual patients: development and validation of SYNTAX score II. Lancet 2013;381: 639–50.

2. Hannan EL, Racz MJ, Arani DT, et al. A comparison of short- and long-term outcomes for balloon angioplasty and coronary stent placement. J Am Coll Cardiol 2000;36:395–403.

3. Hannan EL, Racz MJ, Walford G, et al. Long-term outcomes of coronary-artery bypass grafting versus stent implantation. N Engl J Med 2005;352: 2174–83.

4. Harrington RA. Selecting revascularization strategies in patients with coronary disease. N Engl J Med 2015;372: 1261–3.

5. Park SJ, Ahn JM, Kim YH, et al. Trial of everolimus-eluting stents or bypass surgery for coronary disease. N Engl J Med 2015;372:1204–12.

Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Which Revascularization Strategy for Multivessel Coronary Disease?
Display Headline
Which Revascularization Strategy for Multivessel Coronary Disease?
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default

Decision Making in Venous Thromboembolism

Article Type
Changed
Thu, 03/01/2018 - 15:34
Display Headline
Decision Making in Venous Thromboembolism

From the Brigham and Women’s Hospital and Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA.

 

Abstract

  • Objective: To review the diagnosis and management of venous thromboembolism (VTE).
  • Methods: Review of the literature.
  • Results: VTE and its associated complications account for significant morbidity and mortality. Various imaging modalities can be employed to support a diagnosis of a VTE and are used based on clinical suspicion arising from the presence of signs and symptoms. Clinical decision rules have been developed  that can help determine which patients warrant further testing. Anticoagulation, the mainstay of VTE treatment, increases bleeding risk, necessitating tailored treatment strategies that must incorporate etiology, risk, benefit, cost, and patient preference.
  • Conclusion: Further study is needed to understand individual patient risks and to identify treatments that will lead to improved patient outcomes.

 

Venous thromboembolism (VTE) and its associated complications account for significant morbidity and mortality. Each year between 100 and 180 persons per 100,000 in Western countries develop VTE. The majority of VTEs are classified as either pulmonary embolism (PE), which accounts for one third of the events, or deep vein thrombosis (DVT), which is responsible for the remaining two thirds. Between 20% and 30% of those patients diagnosed with thrombotic events will die within the first month after diagnosis [1].PE is a common consequence of DVT; 40% of patients who are diagnosed with DVT will be subsequently found to have PE upon further imaging. This high rate of association is also seen in those who present with PE, 70% of whom will also be found to have concomitant DVT [2,3].

There are many risk factors for VTE, including patient-specific demographic factors, environmental factors, and pharmacologic factors (Table 1). One of the main demographic factors associated with development of VTE is age. It is rare for children to suffer a thrombotic event, whereas older persons have a risk of 450 to 600 events per 100,000 [1]. Other demographic risk factors, both inherited and acquired, have been associated with increased risk of VTE. Inherited risk factors include factor V leiden mutation, prothrombin gene mutation, protein C and protein S deficiencies, antithrombin deficiency, and dysfibrinogenemia. The prevalence of these inherited thrombophilias in patients with VTE is about 25% to 35% compared to 10% in controls without VTE [4,5].Acquired risk factors include prior VTE, malignancy, surgery, trauma, obesity, smoking, pregnancy, and immobilization [6–9].Additionally, multiple medical conditions, including the antiphospholipid antibody syndrome, myeloproliferative neoplasms, paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria, renal disease (particularly nephritic syndrome), liver disease, and inflammatory bowel disease have been shown to increase risk of VTE [10–13].

Anatomic risk factors include Paget-Schroetter syndrome (compression of upper extremity veins due to abnormalities at the thoracic outlet), May-Thurner syndrome (significant compression of the left common iliac vein by the right common iliac artery), and abnormalities of the inferior vena cava [14–16].Medications that are associated with increased risk of VTE include but are not limited to estrogen (both in oral contraceptives as well as hormone replacement therapy) [17,18],the selective estrogen receptor modulator tamoxifen [19],testosterone [20],and glucocorticoids [21].It is important to note that many patients with VTE have more than one acquired risk factor for thrombosis [22],and also that acquired risk factors are more likely to lead to VTE in the setting of underlying inherited thrombophilic conditions [23].

Pathogenesis

Abnormalities in both coagulation factors and the vascular bed are at the core of the pathogenesis of VTE. The multifaceted etiology of thrombosis was first described in 1856 by Virchow, who defined a triad of defects in the vessel wall, platelets, and coagulation proteins [24].Usually the vessel wall is lined with endothelial cells that provide a nonthrombotic surface and limit platelet aggregation through release of prostacyclins and nitric oxide. When the endothelial lining is compromised, the homeostatic surveillance system is disturbed and platelet activation and the coagulation system are initiated. Tissue factor exposure in the damaged area of the vessel leads to activation of the coagulation cascade. Collagen that is present in the area of the wound is also exposed and can activate platelets, which provide the phospholipid surface upon which the coagulation cascade occurs. Platelets initially tether to the exposed collagen through binding of glycoprotein Ib-V-IX in association with von Willebrand factor [25].The thrombus is initiated as more platelets are recruited to exposed collagen of the injured endothelium through aggregation in response to the binding of GPIIIb/IIa with fibrinogen. This process is self-perpetuating as these activated platelets release additional proteins such as adenosine diphosphate (ADP), serotonin, and thromboxane A2, all of which fuel the recruitment and activation of additional platelets [26].

Diagnosis

The key to decreasing the morbidity and mortality associated with VTE is timely diagnosis and early initiation of therapy. Various imaging modalities can be employed to support a diagnosis of a VTE and are used based on clinical suspicion arising from the presence of signs and symptoms. DVT is usually associated with pain in calf or thigh, unilateral swelling, tenderness, and redness. PE can present as chest pain, shortness of breath, syncope, hemoptysis, and/or cardiac palpitations.

Decision Rules

Clinical decision rules based on signs, symptoms, and risk factors have been developed to estimate the pretest probability of PE or DVT and to help determine which patients warrant further testing. These clinical decision rules include the Wells criteria (separate rules for DVT and PE) [27,28],as well as the Geneva score [29],which is focused on identifying patients with a likelihood of having a PE. In general, these clinical rules are applied at presentation to predict the risk of VTE, and patients who score high are evaluated by imaging modalities, while those with lower scores should be considered for further stratification based on D-dimer testing. The goal of clinical assessment and use of a decision rule is to identify patients at low risk of VTE to reduce the number of imaging studies performed. Most of the decision rules focus on the use of noninvasive evaluations that are easily implemented, including clinical history and presentation, abnormalities in oxygen saturation, chest radiography findings, and electro-cardiography.

D-Dimer Testing

D-dimer testing is at the core of all predictive models for VTE. D-dimer is a fibrin degradation product that is detectable in the blood during active fibrinolysis and occurs after clot formation. The concentration of D-dimer increases in patients with active clot. D-dimer testing is usually performed as a quantitative ELISA or automated turbidometric assay and is highly sensitive (> 95%) in excluding a diagnosis of VTE if results are in the normal range [30].The presence of a normal D-dimer and a low probability based on clinical assessment criteria can be integrated to determine which patients have a low (generally < 99%) likelihood of having VTE [31].It should be noted that other factors can lead to an increased D-dimer, including malignancy, trauma, critical illness, disseminated intravascular coagulation, pregnancy, infection, and postoperative status, which can produce false-positive results and cloud the utility of the test in excluding those at low risk of VTE from undergoing imaging [32–34].Additionally, D-dimer values naturally increase with age and recent work has shown utility of an age-adjusted D-dimer threshold, though this method is not yet widespread in clinical practice [35,36].

Imaging

After application of a clinical prediction rule, the mainstay of diagnosis of VTE is imaging. For DVT the use of ultrasonography is considered the gold standard, with both high sensitivity (89–100%) and specificity (86–100%), especially when the DVT is located proximally [37–39].We generally recommend compression ultrasound starting with the proximal veins but expanding to include the whole leg if the proximal studies are negative [40–42].Other diagnostic options include computed tomography (CT) venography, which is not first line as it is highly invasive and exposes the patient to iodine-based contrast dyes, and magnetic resonance venography (MRV), which offers superb visualization for diagnosis of pelvic vein thrombosis but is limited because of availability and cost issues.

Helical CT pulmonary angiography (CTPA) is the diagnostic test of choice in PE, with high sensitivity (96%) and specificity (95%), and has replaced conventional ventilation perfusion (VQ) scanning or other methods such as magnetic resonance pulmonary angiography in most settings [43,44].CTPA should be avoided in patients who have severe chronic kidney disease or a contrast allergy, and is often avoided in patients who are pregnant due to potential risk of radiation exposure, and in such situations VQ scanning may be employed.

Algorithmic Approach to Workup

Our general practice is to apply the Wells clinical prediction rule (Table 2 for DVT and Table 3 for PE), as this system is likely the most familiar to a large number of clinicians and a score can be obtained promptly but accurately based on easily accessible data from history and exam. We generally use the simplified modified criteria presented in the Tables. Once the clinical prediction rule has been applied, we use 2 risk-based algorithms for further evaluation (Figure 1 and Figure 2) [45,46]. In general, we initially perform a D-dimer test for low-risk patients, while we advocate for prompt imaging in high-risk patients to avoid delays in treatment should VTE be diagnosed. Once a diagnosis of VTE is established, treatment should be started promptly. One exception may be isolated 
distal DVT, where it is reasonable to defer treatment in favor of serial ultrasound testing to rule to rule out proximal extension unless the patient is significantly symptomatic with the distal DVT alone [40].

Of note, there are multiple clinical situations in which the application of a clinical prediction rule followed by D-dimer testing and/or imaging cannot be “standardized” with such algorithms. These include situations where D-dimer may be falsely positive (as above), situations in which alternative imaging strategies should be used to avoid contrast exposure in workup of PE (as above), and workup of suspected upper extremity DVT. Upper extremity ultrasound comprises about 10% of all DVT and frequently occurs in the setting of risk factors such as central venous catheters or pacemakers; specific upper-extremity risk-assessment rules have been developed [47,48].

 D-dimer is generally not as useful in workup of upper extremity DVT (given high prevalence of factors that lead to false-positive DVT) and we generally perform compression ultrasonography up front in patients in whom we have high clinical suspicion for upper extremity DVT. In all such clinical situations above, workup should be individualized in accordance with patient factors and careful physician assessment.

Acute Treatment Options

The first step in treatment is identification of patients who are at high risk of 

VTE-related mortality, especially those with PE and hemodynamic instability (defined as systolic blood pressure < 90 mm Hg or a drop in pressure more than 40 mm Hg for more than 15 minutes in the absence of new-onset arrhythmia, hypovolemia, and sepsis). This patient population should be considered for emergent management with thrombolytic therapy, typically recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA, alteplase). Thrombolysis should be reserved for those who have not had any surgical procedures in the last 2 weeks, have no evidence of neurosurgical bleeding, and are not at risk of a bleeding diathesis. Patients who present without frank hemodynamic instability but have evidence of right ventricular dysfunction (by echocardiography or biomarkers such as troponin elevation) may be at “intermediate risk” for adverse outcomes and the role of thrombolytics in this population is an area of active investigation [49,50].

In standard cases of DVT and PE without hemodynamic compromise, the current standard of care is to initiate parenteral anticoagulation. The immediate goal of therapy is to treat rapidly with anticoagulants to prevent the thrombus from propagating further and to prevent DVT from embolization to the lungs or other vascular beds. The initial treatment of VTE has been extensively discussed and guidelines have been established with recommendations for initiation of anticoagulation; the American College of Chest Physicians (ACCP) released the 9th edition of their guidelines in 2012 based on consensus agreements derived from primary data [51].

Heparin-based drugs are the mainstay of initial treatment. These drugs act by potentiating antithrombin and therefore inactivating thrombin and other coagulation factors such as Xa. Unfractionated heparin (UFH) can be administered as an initial bolus followed by a continuous infusion with dosing being based on weight and titrated to activated partial thromboplastin time (aPTT) or the anti-factor Xa level. Alternatively, patients may be treated with a low molecular weight heparin (LMWH) administered subcutaneously in fixed weight-adjusted doses, which obviates the need for monitoring in most cases [52].LMWHs work in a similar manner to UFH but have more anti-Xa activity in comparison to anti-thrombin activity. LMWH appears to be more effective than UFH for initial treatment of VTE and has been associated with lower risk of major hemorrhage [53].The options for treatment of VTE have expanded in recent years with the approval of fondparinux, a pentasaccharide specifically targeted to inhibit factor Xa. Fondaparinux has been shown to have similar efficacy to LMWH in patients with DVT [54],and while it has not been evaluated directly against LMWH for initial treatment of PE it has been shown to be at least as effective and safe as UFH [55].

Both LMWH and fondaparinux are cleared renally and therefore have increased bleeding risk in patients with renal impairment. In patients with creatinine clearance of less than 30 mL/min, dose reduction or lengthening of dosing interval may be appropriate. Anti-factor Xa activity can be used as a functional assay to monitor and titrate the level of anticoagulation in patients treated with UFH, LMWH, and fondaparinux. Monitoring is useful in the setting of impaired renal function (as above) in addition to extremes of body weight and pregnancy. When used for monitoring of UFH, the anti-factor Xa activity can be measured at any time during administration with a therapeutic goal range of 0.3–0.7 international units (IU)/mL. When used for LMWH, a “peak” anti-factor Xa should be measured approximately 4 hours after dosing, with therapeutic goals depending on preparation and schedule of treatment but generally between 0.6 to 1.0 IU/mL for twice daily and around 1.0 -2.0 IU/mL for once-daily [56].For patients on dialysis, we generally use intravenous UFH for acute treatment of VTE, though recent work has shown that enoxaparin (doses of 0.4 to 1 mg/kg/day) was as safe as UFH with respect to bleeding and was associated with shorter hospital length of stay [57].For long-term treatment of VTE, warfarin is generally preferred based on clinical experience with this agent, though small studies have suggested that parenteral agents may be useful alternatives to warfarin [58].

In many patients who are clinically stable without significant medical comorbidities, outpatient administration of these medications without hospitalization is considered safe. Patients with DVT are often safe to manage as outpatients unless significant clot burden is present and thrombolysis is being considered. For PE, the pulmonary embolism severity index (PESI) and simplified index (sPESI) may be useful to risk-stratify patients and identify those at low risk of complications who may be suitable for outpatient treatment [59,60].Studies have shown that hemodynamically stable patients who did not require supplemental oxygenation or have contraindications to LMWH therapy were safely managed as outpatients with low risk of recurrent VTE and bleeding [61,62].One exception may be patients with intermediate risk PE, who are hemodynamically stable but have evidence of right ventricular dysfunction and may be better served by an initial in-hospital observation period, especially if thrombolysis is being considered.

Most patients who present with VTE are transitioned to warfarin for long-term therapy. Warfarin can be started on the same day as parenteral anticoagulation. Both drugs are overlapped for at least 5 days, with a target INR of 2.0–3.0. Patients may achieve the target INR level quickly because factor VII has a short half-life and the level drops quickly; however, the overlap of 5 days is essential even when the INR is in the target range because a full anticoagulant affect is not achieved until prothrombin levels decline, and this is a slow process due to the long half-life of prothrombin. Warfarin also causes rapid decrease in levels of natural anticoagulants such as protein C and protein S, which further exacerbates the net hypercoagulable state in the short-term. Warfarin without a bridging parenteral agent carries a risk of warfarin-induced skin necrosis [63]and is not effective as an initial anticoagulant treatment in acute VTE as there is a relatively high risk of symptomatic clot extension or recurrent VTE compared to warfarin with use of a bridging agent [64].In specific cases such as cancer-associated VTE (see discussion below), LMWH is preferred to warfarin for long-term active therapy.

Long-Term Active Therapy After Acute Treatment

Duration of Anticoagulation

Recommended duration of anticoagulation depends on a myriad of factors including severity of VTE, risk of recurrence, bleeding risk, and lifestyle modification issues, as well as on the safety and availability of alternative therapies such as low-intensity warfarin, aspirin, or the new oral anticoagulants. The decision tree for length of treatment starts with whether the VTE was a provoked or a spontaneous event. Provoked events occur when the event is associated with an identifiable risk factor, such as immobilization from prolonged medical illness or surgical intervention, pregnancy or oral contraceptive use, and prolonged air travel.

Consensus guidelines suggest that 3 months of anti-coagulation are generally sufficient treatment for a provoked VTE [51,65,66]. Data from multiple studies and a meta-analysis suggests that less than 3 months of anticoagulation (4 to 6 weeks in most trials) is associated with an approximately 1.5-fold higher risk of recurrent VTE than 3 months [67,68].However, data from this meta-analysis also suggests that anticoagulation for longer than 3 months (6 to 12 months in most trials) is not associated with higher rates of recurrent VTE. We generally anticoagulate for 3 months in patients with provoked VTE.

Determining the duration of anticoagulation is more complex in patients with idiopathic/unprovoked VTE. Kearon and colleagues found that in patients with first idiopathic VTE, patients who were anticoagulated for 24 months versus 3 months had lower risk of recurrent VTE (1.3% per patient-year with 24 months versus 27.4% per patient-year with 3 months) [69].Similar studies and meta-analyses have demonstrated decreased recurrence rates in patients anticoagulated for a prolonged period of time. However, one study of prolonged anticoagulation revealed that at 3 years there was no difference in recurrence rate in patients with PE who were anticoagulated for 6 months versus 1 year [70].The likelihood of recurrent DVT in patients with first episode of idiopathic proximal DVT treated with either 3 months or 12 months of warfarin was similar after treatment was discontinued [71].Prolonged periods of anticoagulation do not directly influence risk of recurrence but instead may only delay occurrence of a second event [72].For that reason, the decision is essentially whether to anticoagulate for 3 months or to continue therapy indefinitely [73]. Current guidelines recommend continuing anticoagulation for 3 months in those at high risk of bleeding, and continuing for an extended duration in those at low or moderate bleeding risk [51]. Patients' values and perferences should be entertained and decisions made on a patient-by-patient basis.

For patients at high risk of recurrent VTE, we generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation unless the patient has a significantly elevated bleeding risk or strongly prefers to discontinue anticoagulation and compliance concerns are evident. High-risk patients are those who have suffered from multiple episodes of recurrent VTE, those who have clotted while being anticoagulated, and those with acquired risk factors, such as antiphospholipid antibodies and malignancy. Other high-risk groups are those with high-risk thrombophilias such as deficiency of protein S, protein C, or antithrombin, homozygous factor V Leiden or prothrombin gene mutations, and compound heterozygous factor V Leiden/prothrombin gene mutation in the setting of an unprovoked event. Further discussion of models for risk assessment of recurrence is provided below.

Assessment of Bleeding Risk

The bleeding risk associated with the use of anticoagulation must be weighed against the risk of clotting events when determining duration of anticoagulation, especially in those patients for whom indefinite anticoagulation is a consideration. Risk of bleeding while on anticoagulation is approximately 1–3% per 100 patient-years [74],but concomitant medical conditions such as renal failure, diabetes-related cerebrovascular disease, malignancy, advanced age, and use of antiplatelet agents all increase the risk of bleeding. Bleeding risk is highest when patients first initiate anticoagulation and is approximately 10 times the risk in the first month of therapy than after the first year of therapy [75].

Risk assessment models such as the RIETE score may be helpful when indefinite anticoagulation is a possibility [76].The RIETE score encompasses 6 risk factors (age > 75 years, recent bleeding, cancer, creatinine level > 1.2 mg/dL, anemia, or PE at baseline) to categorize patients into low risk (0 points, 0.3% risk of bleeding), intermediate risk (1–4 points, 2.6% risk of bleeding) and high risk (> 4 points, 6.2% risk of bleeding) within 3 months of anticoagulant therapy. The ACCP has developed a more extensive list of 17 potential risk factors for bleeding to categorize patients into low risk (no risk factors, 0.8%/year risk of bleeding), intermediate risk (1 risk factor, 1.6%/year risk of bleeding) and high risk (2 or more risk factors, >6.5%/year risk of bleeding) categories [77].The RIETE score is simpler to use but was not developed for assessing risk of bleeding during indefinite therapy, while the ACCP risk categorization predicts a yearly risk and is therefore applicable for long-term risk assessment but is more cumbersome to use. In practice, we generally use a clinical gestalt of a patient’s clinical risk factors (particularly age, renal or hepatic dysfunction, and frequent falls) to assess if they may be at high risk of bleeding and if the risk of indefinite anticoagulation may thus outweigh the potential benefit.

We also note that several scoring systems (HAS-BLED, HEMORR2HAGES, and ATRIA scores) have been developed to predict those at high risk of bleeding on anticoagulation for atrial fibrillation [78–80].These scores generally include similar clinical risk factors to those in the RIETE and ACCP scoring systems. Several studies have compared the HAS-BLED, HEMORR2HAGES, and ATRIA scores and a systematic review and meta-analysis concluded that the HAS-BLED score is recommended, due to increased sensitivity and ease of application [81].However, as these scores have not been validated for anticoagulation in the setting of VTE, we do not use them in this capacity.

Risk Stratification for Recurrent VTE

When predicting risk of recurrent VTE, clinical risk factors including obesity, male gender, and underlying thrombophilia (including the “high risk” inherited thrombophilias identified above) must taken into consideration. Location of the thrombus must also be considered; it has also been demonstrated that patients with DVT involving the iliofemoral veins are at higher risk of recurrence than those without iliac involvement [82].Other factors that may be useful in risk stratification include D-dimer level and ultrasound to search for residual venous thrombosis.

D-dimer Levels

D-dimer levels are one of the more promising methods for assessing the risk of recurrent VTE after cessation of anticoagulation, especially in the case of idiopathic VTE where indefinite anticoagulation should be considered but may pose either risk of bleeding or significant inconvenience to patients. A normal D-dimer measured 1 month after cessation of anticoagulation offers a high negative predictive value for risk of recurrence [83].A number of studies have demonstrated that patients with elevated D-dimer 1 month after anticoagulation cessation are at increased risk for a recurrent event [84–86].Two predictive models that have been developed incorporate D-dimer testing into decision making [87,88].The DASH predictive model relies on the D-dimer result in addition to age, male sex, and use of hormone therapy as a method of risk stratification for recurrent VTE in patients with a first unprovoked event. Using this scoring system, patients with a score of 0 or 1 had a recurrence rate of 3.1%, those with a score of 2 a recurrence rate of 6.4%, and those with a score of 3 or greater a recurrence rate of 12.3%. The authors postulate that by using this assessment scheme they can avoid lifelong anticoagulation in 51% of patients. The Vienna prediction model uses male sex, location of VTE (proximal DVT and PE are at higher risk), and D-dimer level to predict risk of recurrent VTE. This model has recently been updated to include a “dynamic” component to predict risk of recurrence of VTE from multiple random time points [89].

Overall, D-dimer may be useful for risk stratification. We often employ the method of stopping anticoagulation in patients with unprovoked VTE after 3 months (if the patient has no identifiable clinical risk factors that place them at high risk of recurrence) and testing D-dimer 1 month after cessation of anticoagulation. An elevated D-dimer is a solid reason to restart anticoagulation (potentially on an indefinite basis), while a negative D-dimer provides support for withholding further anticoagulation in the absence of other significant risk factors for recurrence. However, lack of agreement regarding assay cut-points as well as multiple reasons other than VTE for D-dimer elevation may limit widespread use of this method. We generally use a cutpoint of 250 ug/L as “negative,” though at least one study showed that cut-points of 250 ug/L versus 500 ug/L did not change the utility of this method [90].In our practice, risk prediction models are most useful to provide patients with additional information and a visual presentation to support our recommendation. This is particularly true of the Vienna prediction rule, which is available in a printable nomogram which can be distributed to patients and completed together during the clinic visit.

Imaging Analysis

Imaging analysis may also assist with risk stratification. Clinical assessment modules have been developed that incorporate repeat imaging studies for assessment of recannulization of affected veins. In patients with residual vein thrombosis (RVT) at the time anticoagulation was stopped, the hazard ratio for recurrence was 2.4 compared to those without RVT [91].There are a number of ways RVT could impact recurrence, including inpaired venous flow leading to stasis and activation of the coagulation cascade. Subsequent studies used serial ultrasound to determine when to stop anticoagulation. In one study, patients were anticoagulated for 3 months and for those that had RVT, anticoagulation was continued for up to 9 months for provoked and 21 months for unprovoked VTE. In comparison to fixed dosing of 6 months of anti-coagulation, those who had their length of anticoagulation tailored to ultrasonography findings had a lower rate of recurrent VTE [92].Limitations to using RVT in clinical decision-making include lack of a standard definition of RVT and variability in both timing of ultrasound (operator variability) and interpretation of results [93].

Other Options

Another option in patients who are being considered for indefinite anticoagulation is to decrease the intensity of anticoagulation. Since this would theoretically lower the risk of bleeding, the perceived benefit of long-term, low-intensity anticoagulation would be reduction in both bleeding and clotting risk. The PREVENT trial randomized patients who had received full-dose anticoagulation for a median of 6.5 months to either low-intensity warfarin (INR goal of 1.5-2.0 instead of 2.0-3.0) or placebo. In the anticoagulation group, there was a 64% risk reduction in recurrent VTE (hazard ratio 0.36, 95% CI 0.19 to 0.67) but an increased risk of bleeding (hazard ratio 1.92, 95% CI 1.26 to 2.93) [94].The ELATE study randomized patients with unprovoked VTE who had completed 3 or more months of full-intensity warfarin therapy (target INR 2.0–3.0) to continue therapy with either low-intensity warfarin (target INR 1.5–2.0) or full-intensity warfarin (target INR 2.0-3.0). Compared to the low-intensity group, the conventional-intensity group had lower rates of recurrent VTE and no increased rates of major bleeding [95].This study, however, has been criticized because of its overall low bleeding rate in both treatment groups.

Aspirin is an option in patients in whom long-term anticoagulation is untenable. The ASPIRE trial demonstrated that in patients with unprovoked VTE who had completed a course of initial anticoagulation, aspirin 100 mg daily reduced the risk of major vascular events compared to placebo with no increase in bleeding [96].However, aspirin was not associated with a significant reduction in risk of VTE alone (only the composite vascular event endpoint). The WARFASA trial, however, demonstrated that aspirin 100 mg daily was associated with a significant reduction in recurrent VTE compared to placebo after 6 to 18 months of anticoagulation without an increase in major bleeding [97].The absolute risk of recurrence was 11% in the placebo group and 5.9% in the aspirin group. More recently, the INSPIRE collaboration analyzed data from both trials and found that aspirin after initial anticoagulation reduced the risk of recurrent VTE by approximately 42% with a low rate of major bleeding [98].The absolute risk reduction was even larger in men and older patients. For this reason, we recommend aspirin to those patients in whom indefinite anticoagulation may be warranted from the standpoint of reducing risk of recurrent VTE but in whom the risk of bleeding precludes its use.

Hypercoagulable States In Specific Populations

Inherited Thrombophilias

Patients with a hereditary thrombophilia are at increased risk for incident VTE [99].These inherited mutations result in either a loss of normal anticoagulant function or gain of a prothrombotic state. Hereditary disorders associated with VTE include deficiency of antithrombin, protein C, or protein S, or the presence of factor V Leiden and/or prothrombin G20210A mutations. Although deficiency of protein C, protein S, or antithrombin is uncommon and affects only 0.5% of the population, these states have been associated with a 10-fold increased risk of thrombosis in comparison to the general population. Factor V Leiden and prothrombin gene mutation are less likely to be associated with incident thrombosis (2 to 5-fold increased risk of VTE) and are more prevalent in the Caucasian population [100].Though these hereditary thrombophilias increase risk of VTE, prophylactic anti-coagulation prior to a first VTE is not generally indicated.

Data regarding the impact of the inherited thrombophilias on risk of recurrent VTE is less well defined. While some data suggest that inherited thrombophilias are associated with increased risk of recurrent VTE, the degree of impact may be clinically modest especially in those with heterozygous factor V Leiden or prothrombin gene mutations [101].Ideally, a clinical trial would be designed to assess whether hereditary thrombophilia testing is beneficial for patients with VTE in decision-making regarding length of anticoagulation, type of anticoagulation, and risk of recurrence. If a patient with a low-risk inherited thrombophilia has a DVT in the setting of an additional provoking risk factor (surgery, pregnancy, etc), a 3-month course of anticoagulation followed by D-dimer assessment as above is reasonable. If a patient with an inherited thrombophilia experiences an idiopathic VTE, or if a patient with a “high-risk” thrombophilia as described above experiences any type of VTE, we generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation in the absence of high bleeding risk, though again this is a very patient-dependent choice.

Acquired Thrombophilias

Antiphospholipid Syndrome

Antibodies directed against proteins that bind phospho-lipids are associated with an acquired hypercoagulable state. The autoantibodies are categorized as antiphospho-lipid antibodies (APLAs), which include anticardiolipin antibodies (IgG and IgM), beta-2 glycoprotein 1 antibodies (anti-B2 GP), and lupus anticoagulant. These antibodies can form autonomously, as seen in primary disorders, or in association with autoimmune disease as a secondary disorder.

Criteria have been developed to distinguish antiphospholipid-associated clotting disorders from other forms of thrombophilia. The updated Sapporo criteria depend on both laboratory and clinical diagnostic criteria [102].The laboratory diagnosis of APLAs requires the presence of lupus anticoagulants, anticardiolipin antibodies, or anti-B2 GP on at least 2 assays at least 12 weeks apart with elevation above the 99th percentile of the testing laboratory’s normal distribution [103].Testing for lupus anticoagulant is based on 3 stages, the first of which is inhibition of phospholipid-dependent coagulation tests with prolonged clotting time (eg, aPTT or dilute Russell’s viper venom time). The diagnosis is confirmed by a secondary test in which excess hexagonal phase phospholipids are added to incubate with the patient’s plasma to absorb the APLA [104].The presence of anticardiolipin antibodies and anti beta-2 GP antibodies is determined using ELISA based immunoassays. Unlike most other thrombophilias, antiphospholipid syndrome is associated with both arterial and venous thromboembolic events and may be an indication for lifelong anticoagulation after a first thrombotic event. We generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation in the absence of significant bleeding risk.

Cancer-Associated Hypercoagulable State

Patients with cancer have a propensity for thromboembolic events. The underlying mechanisms responsible for cancer-associated clotting events are multifactorial and an area of intense research. Tumor cells can initiate activation of the clotting cascade through release of tissue factor and other pro-coagulant molecules [105].Type and stage of cancer impact risk of VTE, and the tumor itself can compress vasculature leading to venous stasis. Furthermore, chemotherapy, hormone therapy, antiangiogenic drugs, erythropoietin agents, and indwelling central venous catheters all are associated with increased risk of thrombotic events. Approximately 25% of all cancer patients will experience a thrombotic event during the course of their disease [106]. In fact, the presence of a spontaneous clot may be a harbinger of underlying malignancy [107].Approximately 10% of patients who present with an idiopathic VTE are diagnosed with cancer in the next 1 to 2 years.

The utility of extensive cancer screening in patients with spontaneous clotting events is often debated. The small studies that have addressed cancer associated clots have not demonstrated any mortality benefit with extensive screening. A prospective cohort study addressed the utility of limited versus extensive screening [108].In this study, all patients underwent a series of basic screening tests such as history taking, physical examination, chest radiograph, and basic laboratory parameters. Approximately half of the patients underwent additional testing (CT of chest and abdomen and mammography for women). Screening did not result in increased survival or fewer cancer-related deaths. 3.5 % of patients in the extensive screening group were diagnosed with malignancy in comparison to 2.4% in the limited screening group. During follow-up, cancer was diagnosed in 3.7% and 5.0% in the extensive and limited screening groups, respectively. The authors concluded that the low yield of extensive screening and lack of survival benefit did not warrant routinely ordering cancer screening tests above and beyond age-appropriate screening in patients with idiopathic VTE. However, it is known that identification of occult malignancy at an earlier stage of disease is beneficial, and cancer diagnosed within one year of an episode of VTE is generally more advanced and associated with a poorer prognosis [109].It is our practice to take a through history from patients with unprovoked clots particularly focusing on symptoms suggestive of an underlying cancer. We recommend that patients be up to date with all age-appropriate cancer screening.

Heparin-based products (rather than warfarin) are recommended for long-term treatment of cancer-associated DVT. Several trials, most prominently the CLOT trial, have demonstrated that LMWH is associated with reduced risk of recurrent VTE compared with warfarin in cancer patients [110].Fondaparinux may be a reasonable alternative if a patient is unable to tolerate a LMWH. In terms of treatment duration, patients with cancer-associated VTE should be anticoagulated indefinitely as long as they continue to have evidence of active malignancy and/or remain on antineoplastic treatment [111].

Heparin has potential anticancer effects beyond its anticoagulation properties. It is believed that heparin use in patients with cancer can influence cancer progression by acting as an antimetastatic agent. The molecular mechanisms underlying this significant observation are not completely understood, although the first documented benefit of these drugs dates back to the 1970s [112].Overall, LMWH have been associated with improved overall survival in cancer patients and this effect appears to be distinct from its ability to prevent life-threatening VTE episodes [113].

Estrogen-Related Thromboembolic Disease

Pregnancy is a well-established acquired hypercoagulable state, and thromboembolic disease accounts for significant morbidity and mortality in pregnancy and the postpartum period. Approximately 1 in 1000 women will suffer from a thrombotic event during pregnancy or shortly after delivery [8]. The etiology of the tendency to clot during pregnancy is multifactorial and mainly reflects venous stasis due to vasculature compression by the uterus, changes in coagulation factors as the pregnancy progresses, and endothelial damage during delivery, especially Cesarean section. Both factor VIII and von Willebrand factor levels increase, especially in the final months of pregnancy. Simultaneously, levels of the natural anticoagulant protein S diminish, leading to an acquired resistance to activated protein C which results in increased thrombin generation and therefore a hypercoagulable state [114].The risk of thrombosis in pregnancy is clearly heightened in women with inherited thrombophilias, especially in the postpartum period [115].

Similarly to pregnancy, hormone-based contraceptive agents and estrogen replacement therapies are also associated with increased thrombotic risk. Over the years, drug manufacturers have tried to mitigate the clotting risk associated with these drugs by reducing the amount of estrogen and altering the type of progesterone used, yet a risk still remains, resulting in a VTE incidence 2 to 7 times higher in this population [116].The risk is highest in the first 4 months of use and is unaffected by duration of use; risk extends for 3 months after cessation of estrogen-containing therapy. Patients who develop VTE while taking an oral contraceptive are generally instructed to stop the contraceptive and consider an alternative form of birth control. Although routine screening for thrombophilia is not offered to women before prescribing oral contraceptives, a thorough personal and family history regarding venous and arterial thrombotic events as well as recurrent pregnancy loss in women should be taken to evaluate thromboembolic risk factors. We generally avoid use of oral contraceptives in patients with a known hereditary thrombophilia, and consider screening prior to initiation of therapy in those with a strong family history of VTE.

Superficial VTE

Although the main disorders that comprise VTE are DVT and PE, another common presentation is superficial venous thromboembolism (SVT). The risk factors for developing an SVT are similar to those for DVT. In addition, varicose veins also increase the incidence of developing SVT [117].SVT is not associated with excessive mortality, and the main concern with it is progression to DVT. About 25% of patients diagnosed with SVT may have DVT or PE at the time of diagnosis and about 3% without DVT or PE at time of diagnosis developed one of these complications over the following 3 months; clot propagation is another common complication [118].Ultrasound may be of utility in diagnosing occult DVT in patients who initially diagnosed with SVT [119].

For patients who have only SVT at baseline without concomitant DVT or PE, it is difficult to determine which patients are at risk for developing DVT. Some risk stratification models include clot location. Since SVT clots usually develop in the saphenous vein, the clot would need to either progress from the sapheno-femoral junction to the common femoral vein; thus, any clots located near the sapheno-femoral junction are at risk of progressing into the deep vasculature [120].Clots within 3 cm of the junction may be more likely to progress to DVT [121].Chengelis and colleagues feel that proximal saphenous vein thrombosis should likely be treated with anticoagulation [122].Others have taken a more general approach, stating that all clots above the knee or in the thigh area should be treated aggressively [123].

There are solid data for the use of anticoagulation in SVT. In the STEFLUX (Superficial ThromboEmbolism and Fluxum) study, participants received the LMWH parnaparin at one of 3 doses: 8500 IU once daily for 10 days followed by placebo for 20 days, 8500 IU once daily for 10 days and then 6400 IU once daily for 20 days, or 4250 IU once daily for 30 days. Those who received the intermediate dosing had lower rates of DVT, PE, and relapse/SVT recurrence in the first 33 days [124].In the CALISTO trial, fondaparinux 2.5mg per day for 45 days effectively reduced the risk of symptomatic DVT, PE, or SVT recurrence or extension and was not associated with any increased major bleeding compared to placebo [125].A Cochrane review included 30 studies involving over 6500 participants with SVT of the lower extremities. The treatments used in these studies included fondaparinux, LMWH, UFH, non-steriodal anti-inflammatory agents, topical treatment, and surgery. According to the findings, use of fondaparinux at prophylactic dosing for 6 weeks is considered a valid therapeutic option for SVT [126].It is our practice to consider the use of anticoagulants (generally LMWH or fondaparinux) as part of the treatment regimen for SVT.

Target-Specific Oral Anticoagulants And Treatment of VTE

Because of warfarin’s narrow therapeutic window, need for frequent monitoring, significant drug and food interactions, and unfavorable kinetics, the target-specific oral anticoagulants (TSOACs) have been developed with the aim of offering alternatives to warfarin therapy (Figure 3). These drugs have been developed to inhibit either thrombin or factor Xa to disrupt the coagulation cascade. Since these drugs bind directly to coagulation factor, they are associated with rapid onset of action, a wide therapeutic window, fewer drug interactions than warfarin, and predictable dose-response allowing for fixed dosing without lab monitoring.

The direct thrombin inhibitor dabigatran directly binds to thrombin in a concentration-dependent manner [127].Peak plasma concentration is achieved within 0.5 to 2.0 hours after ingestion, and its half-life is 12 to 17 hours. Use of dabigatran in both primary and secondary prevention of VTE has been extensively studied, especially in orthopedic surgery where there have been 4 main trials (RE-MOBILIZE, RE-MODEL, RE-NOVATE, and RE-NOVATE I and II). While RE-MOBILIZE showed that dabigatran 220 mg or 150 mg once daily was inferior to enoxaparin 30 mg twice daily in preventing VTE after total knee arthroplasty, RE-MODEL and RE-NOVATE I and II demonstrated that dabigatran 150 mg or 220 mg once daily was noninferior to enoxaparin 40 mg once daily for prevention of VTE in patients undergoing total knee replacement and hip replacement [128–131].The side effect profile was also promising, with no significant differences in the frequency of major bleeding between dabigatran and enoxaparin. Pooled data and meta-analyses from these trials have demonstrated that for prevention of VTE associated with hip or knee surgery, dabigatran 220 mg or 150 mg once daily is as effective as 40 mg of enoxaparin given daily or 30 mg given twice a day, with a similar bleeding profile [132,133].

More recently, dabigatran been used in the acute treatment and secondary prevention of VTE. In the RE-COVER trial, dabigatran 150 mg twice daily was compared to warfarin (INR 2–3) in the treatment of acute VTE for 6 months, after an initial treatment period of up to 9 days with LMWH or UFH. Dabigatran was noninferior to warfarin with respect to 6-month incidence of recurrent symptomatic objectively confirmed VTE and related deaths, and was not associated with increased bleeding [134].In the RE-MEDY and RE-SONATE trials of extended anticoagulation, dabigatran was as effective as warfarin for prevention of recurrent VTE when continued after 3 months of initial anticoagulation and associated with less bleeding, and was more effective than placebo in preventing recurrent VTE but associated with a higher risk of bleeding [135].Unexpectedly, the risk of acute coronary syndrome was slightly higher in the dabigatran group than the warfarin group, as seen in other studies.

Rivaroxaban, a TSOAC that targets factor Xa, has also shown efficacy in preventing VTE after knee or hip surgery. The RE-CORD 1-4 studies all focused on the use of rivaroxaban in comparison to enoxaparin and found that rivaroxaban 10 mg once daily was superior to enoxaparin 40 mg once daily in prevention of VTE in total knee and total hip arthroplasty [136–138].Meta-analysis of multiple rivaroxaban VTE prophylaxis trials also demonstrated that rivaroxaban significantly lowered the risk of VTE in these surgical patients in comparison to the use of enoxaparin [139].Prophylactic use of rivaroxaban was also studied in acutely ill hospitalized patients in the MAGELLAN trial. Rivaroxaban 10 mg daily for 35 days was compared to enoxaparin 40 mg daily for 10 days followed by placebo and was found to be noninferior to enoxaparin in reduction of VTE risk at day 10 and superior to placebo at day 35 [140].However, the rate of bleeding, although low in both arms, was higher in the rivaroxaban arm.

Rivaroxaban has been studied in randomized clinical trials for acute treatment of DVT and PE and for extended prophylaxis for recurrent VTE (EINSTEIN-DVT, EINSTEIN-PE and EINSTEIN-Extension, respectively).  The treatment strategy for use of rivaroxaban differed from that of dabigatran (in the RE-COVER trial), as rivaroxaban was used upfront as initial anticoagulation rather than after an initial period of parenteral therapy with LMWH or UFH. In both the DVT and PE trials, rivaroxaban was noninferior to standard treatment with enoxaparin followed by warfarin therapy, with no significant difference in major bleeding at 6 months of treatment [141,142].The extension trial also demonstrated that use of rivaroxaban in comparison to placebo for an additional 6 or 12 months after standard therapy was associated with significantly fewer recurrent VTE [141]. These studies led to FDA approval for rivaroxaban for primary prevention of VTE in patients undergoing elective total hip or knee repair surgery, for treatment of acute DVT or PE, and for extended prophylaxis in patients following initial treatment.

The anti-factor Xa TSOAC apixaban has been studied in similar fashion as rivaroxaban. In the AMPLIFY study, apixaban was given at a dose of 10 mg twice daily for 7 days followed by 5 mg twice daily for 6 months (as monotherapy, without initial parenteral agent) and compared to enoxaparin followed by warfarin for treatment of acute VTE. Apixaban was as effective as warfarin in terms of recurrent symptomatic VTE or VTE-related death, and was associated with significantly fewer bleeding events [143].Extended-duration apixaban given at treatment dose (5 mg twice daily) or at prophylactic dose (2.5 mg twice daily) for 12 months after completion of treatment-dose apixaban for VTE demonstrated superiority to placebo for extended prophylaxis in AMPLIFY-EXT, and there was no increase in major bleeding compared to placebo [144].Apixaban was recently approved by the FDA for both treatment and secondary prophylaxis of VTE.

More recently, a third anti-factor Xa TSOAC edoxaban demonstrated noninferiority to warfarin in prevention of recurrent symptomatic VTE when administered to patients with DVT or PE at 60 mg once daily for 3 to 12 months [145].Edoxaban also led to significantly less bleeding than warfarin. Edoxaban was recently approved by the FDA for treatment of VTE.

These TSOACs show promise in treatment and prevention of VTE but should be used in patients who meet appropriate criteria for renal function, age, and bleeding risk, as there are currently no available antidotes to reverse their effects. If significant bleeding occurs and cannot be controlled by usual maneuvers such as mechanical compression or surgical intervention, there is little data to guide the use of pharmacologic interventions. Plasma dabigatran levels can be reduced through the use of hemodialysis [146].Antibodies capable of neutralizing dabigatran have been developed, and one specific antibody, idarucizumab, was well-tolerated and showed immediate and complete reversal of dabigatran in subjects of different age and renal function [147,148].Andexanet, a modified recombinant derivative of factor Xa with no catalytic activty, acts as a “decoy receptor” with higher affinity to factor Xa inhibitors than natural factor Xa.  Phase II studies in healthy volunteers demonstrated that andexanet immediately reversed the anticoagulation activity of apixaban, rivaroxaban, enoxaparin, and most recently edoxaban without thrombotic consequences [149].Two randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled phase III studies (ANNEXA-A, looking at the reversal of apixaban, and ANNEXA-R, looking at reversal of rivaroxaban) are underway, and preliminary results show that a single intravenous bolus of andexanet demonstrated almost complete reversal [150].Finally, aripazine (PER977), a synthetic small molecule that binds to heparins as well as all TSOACs, was shown in a phase II trial to decrease blood clotting time to within 10% above baseline value in 10 minutes or less with an effect lasting for 24 hours [151].

Some have advocated for use of prothrombin complex concentrate (PCC) or recombinant factor VIIa for reversal of TSOAC-associated bleeding. Rivaroxaban was demonstrated to be partially reversible by PCC, whereas this approach was not as successful for dabigatran in healthy volunteers [152].In vitro evidence, however, showed that PCC did not significantly change aPTT [153].At present, the use of nonspecific hemostatic agents (including recombinant factor VIIa, 4-factor prothrombin complex concentrate, and activated prothrombin complex concentrates) is suggested for reversal of TSOACs in patients who present with life-threatening bleeding [154,155].

Conclusion

Patients with VTE present with a wide range of findings and factors that impact management. Decision making in VTE management is a fluid process that should be re-evaluated as new data emerge and individual circumstances change. There is more focus on VTE prevention and treatment today than there was even a decade ago. Diagnostic algorithms, identification of new risk factors, refinement in understanding of the pathogenesis of thrombosis, and identification of new anticoagulants with more favorable risk-benefit profiles will all ultimately contribute to improved patient care.

 

Corresponding author: Jean M. Connors, MD, Brigham and Women's Hospital, 75 Francis St., Boston, MA 02215.

References

1. White RH. The epidemiology of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003;107(Suppl 1):I4-8.

2. Moster KM and Fedullo PF. The diagnosis of deep-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1994;330:863–4.

3. Kearon C. Natural history of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003;(Suppl 1):122–30.

4. Heijboer H, Brandjes DP, Buller HR, et al. Deficiencies of coagulation-inhibiting and fibrinolytic proteins in outpatients with deep-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1990;323:1512–6.

5. Mateo J, Oliver A, Borrell M, et al. Laboratory evaluation and clinical characteristics of 2,132 consecutive unselected patients with venous thromboembolism—results of the Spanish Multicentric Study on Thrombophilia (EMET-Study). Thromb Haemost 1997;77:441–51.

6. Lyman GH. Venous thromboembolism in the patient with cancer: focus on burden of disease and benefits of thromboprophylaxis. Cancer 2011;117:1334–49.

7. White RH, Zhou H, Romano PS. Incidence of symptomatic venous thromboembolism after different elective or urgent surgical procedures. Thromb Haemost 2003;90:446–55.

8. Marik PE, Plante LA. Venous thromboembolic disease and pregnancy. N Engl J Med 2008;359:2025–33.

9. Ageno W, Becattini C, Brighton T, et al. Cardiovascular risk factors and venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis. Circulation 2008;117:93–102.

10. Mahmoodi BK, Gansevoort RT, Naess IA, et al. Association of mild to moderate chronic kidney disease with venous thromboembolism: pooled analysis of five prospective general population cohorts. Circulation 2012;126:1964–71.

11. Landolfi R, Marchioli R, Patrono C. Mechanisms of bleeding and thrombosis in myeloproliferative disorders. Thromb Haemost 1997;78:617–21.

12. Hillmen P, Lewis SM, Bessler M, et al. Natural history of paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria. N Engl J Med1995;333:1253–8.

13.Grainge MJ, West J, Card TR. Venous thromboembolism during active disease and remission in inflammatory bowel disease: a cohort study. Lancet 2010;375:657–63.

14. Flinterman LE, Van Der Meer FJ, Rosendaal FR, Doggen CJ. Current perspective of venous thrombosis in the upper extremity. J Thromb Haemost 2008;6:1262–6.

15. Kibbe MR, Ujiki M, Goodwin AL, et al. Iliac vein compression in an aymptomatic patient population. J Vasc Surg 2004;39:937–43.

16. Chee YL, Culligan DJ, Watson HG. Inferior vena cava malformation as a risk factor for deep venous thrombosis in the young. Br J Haematol 2001;114:878–80.

17. Stegeman BH, de Bastos M, Rosendaal FR, et al. Different combined oral contraceptives and the risk of venous thrombosis: systematic review and network meta-analysis. BMJ 2013;347:f5298.

18. Cushman M, Kuller LH, Prentice R, et al. Estrogen plus progestin and risk of venous thrombosis. JAMA 2004;292:1573–80.

19. Fisher B, Costantino JP, Wickerham DL, et al. Tamoxifen for prevention of breast cancer: report of the National Surgical Adjuvant Breast and Bowel Project P-1 study. J Natl Cancer Inst 1998;90:1371–88.

20. Glueck CJ, Richardson-Royer C, Schultz R, et al. Testosterone therapy, thrombophilia-hypofibrinolysis, and hospitalization for deep venous thrombosis-pulmonary embolus: an exploratory, hypothesis-generating study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost 2014;20:244–9.

21. Johannesdottir SA, Horvath-Puho E, Dekkers OM, et al. Use of glucocorticoids and risk of venous thromboembolism: a nationwide population-based case-control study. JAMA Intern Med 2013;173:743–52.

22. Spencer FA, Emery C, Lessard D, et al. The Worcester Venous Thromboembolism study: a population-based study of the clinical epidemiology of venous thromboembolism. J Gen Intern Med 2006;21:722–7.

23. Ocak G, Vossen CY, Verduijn M, et al. Risk of venous thrombosis in patients with major illnesses: results from the MEGA study. J Thromb Haemost 2013;11:116-23.

24. Anderson FA Jr, Spencer FA. Risk factors for venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003; 107 (Suppl 1): I9–16.

25. Clemetson KJ. Platelet GPIb-V-IX complex. Thromb Haemost 1997;78:266–70.

26. Kroll MH, Schafer AI. Biochemical mechanisms of platelet activation. Blood 1989;74:1181–95.

27. Wells PS, Anderson DR, Bormanis J, et al. Value of assessment of pretest probability of deep-vein thrombosis in clinical management. Lancet 1997;350:1795–8.

28. Wells PS, Anderson DR, Rodger M, et al. Derivation of a simple clinical model to categorize patients’ probability of pulmonary embolism: increasing the model’s utility with the SimpliRED D-dimer. Thromb Haemost 2000;416–20.

29. Le Gal G, Righini M, Roy PM, et al. Prediction of pulmonary embolism in the emergency department: the revised Geneva score. Ann Intern Med 2006; 144:165–71.

30. Stein PD, Hull RD, Patel KC, et al. D-dimer for the exclusion of acute venous thrombosis and pulmonary embolism: a systematic review. Ann Intern Med 2004;140:589–602.

31. Pasha SM, Klok FA, Snoep JD, et al. Safety of excluding acute pulmonary embolism based on an unlikely clinical probability by the Wells rule and normal D-dimer concentration: a meta-analysis. Thromb Res 2010;125:e123–27.

32. Crowther MA, Cook DJ, Griffith LE, et al. Neither baseline tests of molecular hypercoagulability nor D-dimer levels predict deep venous thrombosis in critically ill medical-surgical patients. Intensive Care Med 2005;31:48–55.

33. Karami-Djurabi R, Klok FA, Kooiman J, et al. D-dimer testing in patients with suspected pulmonary embolism and impaired renal function. Am J Med 2009;122:1050–3.

34. Chan WS, Chunilal S, Lee A, et al. A red blood cell agglutination D-dimer test to exclude deep venous thrombosis in pregnancy. Ann Intern Med 2007;147:165–70.

35. Righini M, Goehring C, Bounameaux H, Perrier A. Effects of age on the performance of common diagnostic tests for pulmonary embolism. Am J Med 2000; 109:357–61.

36. Woller SC, Stevens SM, Adams DM, et al. Assessment of the safety and efficiency of using an age-adjusted D-dimer threshold to exclude suspected pulmonary embolism. Chest 2014; 146:1444–51.

37. Zierler BK. Ultrasonography and diagnosis of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2004; 109 (Suppl 1): I9–14.

38. Hirsh J, Lee AY. How we diagnose and treat deep vein thrombosis. Blood 2002;99:3102–10.

39. Tapson VF, Carroll BA, Davidson BL, et al. The diagnostic approach to acute venous thromboembolism. Clinical practice guideline. American Thoracic Society. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1999;160:1043–66.

40. Bates SM, Jaeschke R, Stevens SM, et al. Diagnosis of DVT: Antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012; 141 (2 Suppl): e351S–418S.

41. Pezzullo JA, Perkins AB, Cronan JJ. Symptomatic deep vein thrombosis: diagnosis with limited compression US. Radiology 1996;198:67–70.

42. Frederick MG, Hertzberg BS, Kliewer MA, et al. Can the US examination for lower extremity deep venous thrombosis be abbreviated? A prospective study of 755 examinations Radiology 1996;199:45–7.

43. Remy-Jardin M, Remy J, Deschidre F, et al. Diagnosis of pulmonary embolism with spiral CT: comparison with pulmonary angiography and scintigraphy. Radiology 1996;200:699–706.

44. Stein PD, Fowler SE, Goodman LR, et al. Multidetector computed tomography for acute pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2006;354:2317–27.

45. Goodacre S. In the clinic. Deep venous thrombosis. Ann Intern Med 2008;149:ITC3–1.

46. Agnelli G, Becattini C. Acute pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2010;363:266–74.

47. Kucher N. Clinical practice. Deep-vein thrombosis of the upper extremities. N Engl J Med 2011;364:861–9.

48. Constans J, Salmi LR, Sevestre-Pietri MA, et al. A clinical prediction score for upper extremity deep venous thrombosis. Thromb Haemost 2008;99:202–7.

49. Meyer G, Vicault E, Danasys T, et al. Fibrinolysis for patients with intermediate-risk pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2014;370:1402–11.

50. Kline JA, Nordenholz KE, Courtney DM, et al. Treatment of submassive pulmonary embolism with tenecteplase or placebo: cardiopulmonary outcomes at 3 months: multicenter double-bline, placebo-controlled randomized trial. J Thromb Haemost 2014;12:459–68.

51. Guyatt GH, Akl EA, Crowther M, et al. Executive summary: Antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012;141(2 Suppl):7S–47S.

52. Bounameaux H. Unfractionated versus low-molecular-weight heparin in the treatment of venous thromboembolism. Vasc Med 1998;3:41–6.

53. Erkens PM, Prins MH. Fixed dose subcutaneous low molecular weight heparins versus adjusted dose unfractionated heparin for venous thromboembolism. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2010;9:CD001100.

54. Buller HR, Davidson BL, Decousus H, et al. Fondaprinux or enoxaparin for the initial treatment of symptomatic deep venous thrombosis: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2004;140: 867–73.

55. Buller HR, Davidson BL, Decousus H, et al. Subcutaenous fondaparinux versus intravenous unfractionated heparin in the initial treatment of pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2003;349:1695–702.

56. Bates SM, Weitz JI. Coagulation assays. Circulation 2005;112:e53–60.

57. Pon TK, Dager WE, Roberts AJ, White RH. Subcutaneous enoxaparin for therapeutic anticoagulation in hemodialysis patients. Thromb Res 2014;133:1023–8.

58. Speeckaert MM, Devreese KM, Vanholder RC, Dhondt A. Fondaparinux as an alternative to vitamin K antagonists in haemodialysis patients. Nephrol Dial Transplant 2013;28:3090–5.

59. Aujesky D, Obrosky DS, Stone RA, et al. Derivation and validation of a prognostic model for pulmonary embolism. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2005;172:1041–6.

60. Jiminez D, Aujesky D, Moores L, et al. Simplification of the pulmonary embolism severity index for prognostication in patients with acute symptomatic pulmonary embolism. Arch Intern Med 2010; 170:1383–9.

61. Schulman S. Advances in the management of venous thromboembolism. Best Pract Res Clin Haematol 2012;25:361–77.

62. Erkens PM, Gandara E, Wells P, et al. Safety of outpatient treatment in acute pulmonary embolism. J Thromb Haemost 2010;8:2412–7.

63. Chan YC, Valenti D, Mansfield AO, Stansby G. Warfarin induced skin necrosis. Br J Surg 2000; 87:266–72.

64. Brandjes DP, Heijboer H, Buller HR, et al. Acenocoumarol and heparin compared with acenocoumarol alone in the initial treatment of proximal-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1992;327:1485–9.

65. Segal JB, Streiff MB, Hofmann LV, et al. Management of venous thromboembolism: a systematic review for a practice guideline. Ann Intern Med 2007;146:211–22.

66. Pinede L, Duhaut P, Cucherat M, et al. Comparison of long versus short duration of anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis of randomized, controlled trials. J Intern Med 2000;247:553–62.

67. Schulman S, Rhedin AS, Lindmarker P, et al. A comparison of six weeks with six months of oral anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of venous thromboembolism. Duration of anticoagulation trial study group. N Engl J Med 1995;332:1661–5.

68. Boutitie F, Pinede L, Schulman S, et al. Influence of preceding length of anticoagulant treatment and initial presentation of venous thromboembolism on risk of recurrence after stopping treatment: analysis of individual participants’ data from seven trials. BMJ 2011;342:d3036.

69. Kearon C, Gent M, Hirsh J, et al. A comparison of three months of anticoagulation with extended anticoagulation for a first episode of idiopathic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 1999;340:901-07.

70. Agnelli G, Prandoni P, Becattini C, et al. Extended oral anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of pulmonary embolism. Ann Intern Med 2003;139:19–25.

71. Agnelli G, Prandoni P, Santamaria MG, et al. Three months versus one year of oral anticoagulant therapy for idiopathic deep venous thrombosis. Warfarin optimal duration Italian trial investigators. N Engl J Med 2001;345:165–9.

72. Bauer KA. Long-term management of venous thromboembolism: a 61-year old woman with unprovoked venous thromboembolism. JAMA 2011;305:1336–45.

73. Kearon C, Akl EA. Duration of anticoagulant therapy for deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism. Blood 2014;123:
1794–801.

74. Schulman S, Beyth RJ, Kearon C, et al. Hemorrhagic complications of anticoagulant and thrombolytic treatment: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines (8th edition). Chest 2008;133(6 Suppl):257S–298S.

75. Landefeld CS, Beyth RJ. Anticoagulant-related bleeding: clinical epidemiology, prediction, and prevention. Am J Med 1993;95:315–28.

76. Ruiz-Gimenez N, Suarez C, Gonzalez R, et al. Predictive variables for major bleeding events in patients presenting with documented acute venous thromboembolism. Findings from the RIETE registry. Thromb Haemost 2008;100:26–31.

77. Kearon C, Akl EA, Comerota AJ. Antithrombotic therapy for VTE disease: antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012; 141 (2 Suppl): e419S–94S.

78. Pisters R, Lane DA, Nieuwlaat R, et al. A novel user-friendly score (HAS-BLED) to assess one-year risk of major bleeding in atrial fibrillation patients: The Euro Heart Survey. Chest 2010;138:1093–1100.

79. Gage BF, Yan Y, Milligan PE, et al. Clinical classification schemes for predicting hemorrhage: results from the National Registry of Atrial Fibrillation (NRAF). Am Heart J 2006;151:713–9.

80. Fang MC, Go AS, Chang Y, et al. A new risk scheme to predict warfarin-associated hemorrhage: the ATRIA (Anticoagulation and risk factors in atrial fibrillation) study. J Am Coll Cardiol 2011;58:395–401.

81. Caldeira D, Costa J, Fernandes RM, et al. Performance of the HAS-BLED high bleeding-risk category, compared to ATRIA and HEMORR2HAGES in patients with atrial fibrillation: a systematic review and meta-analysis. J Interv Card Electrophysiol 2014;40:277–84.

82. Douketis JD, Crowther MA, Foster GA, Ginsberg JS. Does the location of thrombosis determine the risk of disease recurrence in patients with proximal deep vein thrombosis? Am J Med 2001;110:515–9.

83. Palareti G, Legnani C, Cosmi B, et al. Risk of venous thromboembolism recurrence: high negative predictive value of D-dimer performed after oral anticoagulation is stopped. Thromb Haemost 2002; 87:7–12.

84. Palareti G, Cosmi B, Legnani C, et al. D-dimer testing to determine the duration of anticoagulation therapy. N Engl J Med 2006;355:1780–9.

85. Bruinstroop E, Klok FA, Van De Ree MA, et al. Elevated D-dimer levels predict recurrence in patients with idiopathic venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis. J Thromb Haemost 2009;611–8.

86. Verhovsek M, Douketis JD, Yi Q, et al. Systematic review: D-dimer to predict recurrent disease after stopping anticoagulant therapy for unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2008;149:481–90.

87. Tosetto A, Iorio A, Marcucci M, et al. Predicting disease recurrence in patients with previous unprovoked venous thromboembolism: a proposed prediction score (DASH). J Thromb Haemost 2012;10:1019–25.

88. Eichinger S, Heinze G, Jandeck LM, et al. Risk assessment of recurrence in patients with unprovoked deep vein thrombosis or pulmonary embolism: the Vienna Prediction Model. Circulation2010; 121:1630–6.

89. Eichinger S, Heinze G, Kyrle PA. D-dimer levels over time and the risk of recurrent venous thromboembolism: an update of the Vienna prediction model. J Am Heart Assoc 2014; 3: e000467.

90. Douketis J, Tosetto A, Marcucci M, et al. Patient-level meta-analysis: effect of measurement timing, threshold, and patient age on ability of D-dimer testing to assess recurrence risk after unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2010;153:523–31.

91. Prandoni P, Lensing AW, Prins MH, et al. Residual venous thrombosis as a predictive factor of recurrent venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2002;137:955–60.

92. Prandoni P, Prins MH, Lensing AW, et al. Residual thrombosis on ultrasonography to guide the duration of anticoagulation in patients with deep venous thrombosis: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2009;150:577–85.

93. Marcucci M, Iorio A, Douketis J. Management of patients with unprovoked venous thromboembolism: an evidence-based and practical approach. Curr Treat Options Cardiovasc Med 2013;15:224–39.

94. Ridker PM, Goldhaber SZ, Danielson E, et al. Long-term, low-intensity warfarin therapy for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2003;348:1425–34.

95. Kearon C, Ginsberg JS, Kovacs MJ, et al. Comparison of low-intensity warfarin therapy with conventional-intensity warfarin therapy for long-term prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2003;349:631–9.

96. Brighton TA, Eikelboom JW, Mann K, et al. Low-dose aspirin for preventing recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2012;367:1979–87.

97. Becattini C, Agnelli G, Schenone A, et al. Aspirin for preventing the recurrence of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2012;366:1959–67.

98. Simes J, Becattini C, Agnelli G, et al. Aspirin for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism: the INSPIRE collaboration. Circulation 2014;130:1062–71.

99. Makris M. Thrombophilia: grading the risk. Blood 2009;113:5038–9.

100. Segal JB, Brotman DJ, Necochea AJ, et al. Predictive value of factor V Leiden and prothrombin G20210A in adults with venous thromboembolism and in family members of those with a mutation: a systematic review. JAMA 2009;30:2472.

101. Ho WK, Hankey GH, Quinlan DJ, Eikelboom JW. Risk of recurrent venous thromboembolism in patients with common thrombophilia: a systematic review. Arch Intern Med 2006;166:729–36.

102. Miyakis S, Lockshin MD, Atsumi T, et al. International consensus statement on an update of the classification criteria for definite antiphospholipid syndrome (APS). J Thromb Haemost 2006; 4:295–306.

103. Pengo V, Tripodi A, Reber G, et al. Update of the guidelines for lupus anticoagulant detection. Subcommittee on lupus anticoagulant/antiphospholipid antibody of the scientific and standardization committee of the international society on thrombosis and haemostasis. J Thromb Haemost 2009; 7:1737–40.

104. Brandt JT, Barna LK, Triplett DA. Laboratory identification of lupus anticoagulants: results of the Second International Workship for identification of lupus anticoagulants. On behalf of the subcommittee on lupus anticoagulants/antiphospholipid antibodies of the ISTH. Thromb Haemost 1995;74: 1597–603.

105. Gale AJ, Gordon SG. Update on tumor cell procoagulant factors. Acta Haematol 2001;106:25-32.

106. Timp JF, Braekkan SK, Versteeg HH, Cannegieter SC. Epidemiology of cancer-associated venous thrombosis. Blood 2013;122:1712–23.

107. Lee AY, Levine MN. Venous thromboembolism and cancer: risks and outcomes. Circulation 2003; 107 (Suppl 1): I17–21.

108. Van Doormaal FF, Terpstra W, Van Der Griend R, et al. Is extensive screening for cancer in idiopathic venous thromboembolism warranted? J Thromb Haemost 2011;9:79–84.

109. Sorensen HT, Mellemkjaer L, Olsen JH, Baron JA. Prognosis of cancers associated with venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2000;343:1846–50.

110. Lee AY, Levine MN, Baker RI, et al. Low-molecular-weight heparin versus a coumarin for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism in patients with cancer. N Engl J Med 2003;349:146-53.

111. Streiff MB, Bockenstedt PL, Cataland SR, et al. Venous thromboembolic disease. J Natl Compr Canc Netw 2013;11:1402-29.

112. Elias EG, Sepulveda F, Mink IB. Increasing the efficiency of cancer chemotherapy with heparin: “clinical study.” J Surg Oncol 1973;5:189–93.

113. Lazo-Langner A, Goss GD, Spaans JN, Rodger MA. The effect of low-molecular-weight heparin on cancer survival. A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized trials. J Thromb Haemost 2007;5:729–37.

114. Bremme KA. Haemostatic changes in pregnancy. Best Pract Res Clin Haematol 2003;16:153–68.

115. Gerhardt A, Scharf RE, Beckmann MW, et al. Prothrombin and factor V mutations in women with a history of thrombosis during pregnancy and the puerperium. N Engl J Med 2000;342:374–80.

116. Rott H. Thrombotic risks of oral contraceptives. Curr Opin Obstet Gynecol 2012;24:235-40.

117. Marchiori A, Mosena L, Prandoni P. Superficial vein thrombosis: risk factors, diagnosis, and treatment. Semin Thromb Hemost 2006;32:737–43.

118. Decousus H, Quere I, Presles E, et al. Superficial venous thrombosis and venous thromboembolism: a large, prospective epidemiologic study. Ann Intern Med 2010;152:218–24.

119. Galanaud JP, Genty C, Sevestre MA, et al. Predictive factors for concurrent deep-vein thrombosis and symptomatic venous thromboembolic recurrence in case of superficial venous thrombosis. The OPTIMEV study. Thromb Haemost 2011;105:31–9.

120. Sullivan V, Denk PM, Sonnad SS, et al. Ligation versus anticoagulation: treatment of above-knee superficial thrombophlebitis not involving the deep venous system. J Am Coll Surg 2001;193:556–62.

121. Lohr JM, McDevitt DT, Lutter KS, et al. Operative management of greater saphenous thrombophlebitis involving the saphenofemoral junction. Am J Surg 1992;164:269–75.

122. Chengelis DL, Benedick PJ, Glover JL, et al. Progression of superficial venous thrombosis to deep vein thrombosis. J Vasc Surg 1996;24:745–9.

123. Verlato F, Zuccetta P, Prandoni P, et al. An unexpectedly high rate of pulmonary embolism in patients with superficial thrombophlebitis of the leg. J Vasc Surg 1999;30:1113–5.

124. Cosmi B, Filippini M, Tonti D, et al. A randomized double-blind study of low-molecular-weight heparin (parnaparin) for superficial vein thrombosis: STEFLUX (Superficial ThromboEmbolism and Fluxum). J Thromb Haemost 2012;10:1026–35.

125. Decousus H, Prandoni P, Mismetti P, et al. Fondaparinux for the treatment of superficial-vein thrombosis in the legs. N Engl J Med 2010;363:1222–32.

126. Di Nisio M, Wichers IM, Middeldorp S. Treatment for superficial thrombophlebitis of the leg. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2013;4:CD004982.

127. Stangier J, Rathgen K, Stahle H, et al. The pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics and tolerability of dabigatran etexilate, a new oral direct thrombin inhibitor, in healthy male subjects. Br J Clin Pharmacol 2007;64:292–303.

128. RE-MOBILIZE Writing Committee, Ginsberg JS, Davidson BL, et al. Oral thrombin inhibitor dabigatran etexilate vs North American enoxaparin regimen for prevention of venous thromboembolism after knee arthroplasty surgery. J Arthroplasty 2009;24:1–9.

129. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Oral dabigatran etexilate vs. subcutaneous enoxaparin for the prevention of venous thromboembolism after total knee replacement: the RE-MODEL randomized trial. J Thromb Haemost 2007;5:2178–85.

130. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Dabigatran etexilate versus enoxaparin for prevention of venous thromboembolism after total hip replacement: a randomized, double-blind, non-inferiority trial. Lancet 2007;370:949–56.

131. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Huo MH, et al. Oral dabigatran versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after primary total hip arthroplasty (RE-NOVATE II*). A randomized, double-blind, non-inferiority trial. Thromb Haemost2011;105:721–9.

132. Friedman RJ, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Dabigatran versus enoxaparin for prevention of venous thromboembolism after hip or knee arthroplasty: a pooled analysis of three trials. Thromb Res 2010;126:175–82.

133. Wolowacz SE, Roskell NS, Plumb JM, et al. Efficacy and safety of dabigatran etexilate for the prevention of venous thromboembolism following total hip or knee arthroplasty. A meta-analysis. Thromb Haemost 2009;101:77–85.

134. Schulman S, Kearon C, Kakkar AK, et al. Dabigatran versus warfarin in the treatment of acute venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2009;36:2342–52.

135. Schulman S, Kearon C, Kakkar AK, et al. Extended use of dabigatran, warfarin, or placebo in venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;368:709–18.

136. Eriksson BI, Borris LC, Friedman RJ, et al. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after hip arthroplasty. N Engl J Med 2008;358:2765–75.

137. Kakkar AK, Brenner B, Dahl OE, et al. Extended duration rivaroxaban versus short-term enoxaparin for the prevention of venous thromboembolism after total hip arthroplasty: a double-blind, randomized controlled trial. Lancet 2008;372:31–9.

138. Lassen MR, Ageno W, Borris LC, et al. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after total knee arthroplasty. N Engl J Med 2008;358:2776–86.

139. Cao YB, Zhang JD, Shen H, Jiang YY. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after total hip or knee arthroplasty: a meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Eur J Clin Pharmacol 2010;66:1099–108.

140. Cohen AT, Spiro TE, Buller HR, et al. Rivaroxaban for thromboprophylaxis in acutely ill medical patients. N Engl J Med 2013;368:513–23.

141. EINSTEIN Investigators, Bauersachs R, Berkowitz SD, et al. Oral rivaroxaban for symptomatic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2010;363:2499–510.

142. EINSTEIN-PE Investigators, Buller HR, Prins MH, et al. Oral rivaroxaban for the treatment of symptomatic pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2012;366:1287–97.

143. Agnelli G, Buller HR, Cohen A, et al. Oral apixaban for the treatment of acute venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;369:799–808.

144. Agnelli G, Buller HR, Cohen A, et al. Apixaban for extended treatment of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;368:699–708.

145. Hokusai-VTE investigators, Buller HR, Decousus H, et al. Edoxaban versus warfarin for the treatment of symptomatic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;369:1406–15.

146. Khadzhynov D, Wagner F, Formella S, et al. Effective elimination of dabigatran by haemodialysis. A phase I single-centre study in patients with end-stage renal disease. Thromb Haemost 2013;109:596–605.

147. Schiele F, van Ryn J, Canada K, et al. A specific antidote for dabigatran: functional and structural characterization. Blood 2013;121:3554–62.

148. Glund S, Stangier J, Schmohl M, et al. Idarucizumab, a specific antidote for dabigatran: immediate, complete, and sustained reversal of dabigatran induced anticoagulation in elderly and renally impaired subjects. Presented at the American Society of Hematology 2014 Annual Meeting; San Francisco, CA.

149. Crowther MA, Levy GG, Lu G, et al. A phase 2 randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial demonstrating reversal of edoxaban-induced anticoagulation in healthy subjects by andexanet alfa (PRT064445), a universal antidote for factor Xa (fXa) inhibitors. Abstract #4269. Presented at the American Society of Hematology 2014 Annual Meeting, San Francisco, CA.

150. Crowther M, Levy GG, Lu G, et al. ANNEXATM-A: A phase 3 randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial, demonstrating reversal of apixaban-induced anticoagulation in older subjects by andexanet alfa (PRT 064445), a universal antidote for factor Xa (fa) inhibitors. Presented at the American Heart Association 2014 Annual Meeting, Chicago, IL.

151. Ansell JE, Bakhru SH, Lauliche BE, et al. Use of PER977 to reverse the anticoagulant effect of edoxaban. N Engl J Med 2014;371:2141–2.

152. Eerenberg ES, Kamphuisen PW, Sijpkens MK, et al. Reversal of rivaroxaban and dabigatran by prothrombin complex concentrate: a randomized, placebo-controlled, crossover study in healthy subjects. Circulation 2011;124:1573–9.

153. Korber MK, Langer E, Ziemer S, et al. Measurement and reversal of prophylactic and therapeutic peak levels of rivaroxaban: an in vitro study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost 2014;20:735–40.

154. Fawole A, Daw HA, Crowther MA. Practical management of bleeding due to the anticoagulants dabigatran, rivaroxaban, and apixaban. Cleve Clin J Med 2013;80:443–51.

155. Siegal DM, Garcia DA, Crowther MA. How I treat target-specific oral anticoagulant-associated bleeding. Blood 2014;123:1152–8.

Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Publications
Topics
Sections

From the Brigham and Women’s Hospital and Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA.

 

Abstract

  • Objective: To review the diagnosis and management of venous thromboembolism (VTE).
  • Methods: Review of the literature.
  • Results: VTE and its associated complications account for significant morbidity and mortality. Various imaging modalities can be employed to support a diagnosis of a VTE and are used based on clinical suspicion arising from the presence of signs and symptoms. Clinical decision rules have been developed  that can help determine which patients warrant further testing. Anticoagulation, the mainstay of VTE treatment, increases bleeding risk, necessitating tailored treatment strategies that must incorporate etiology, risk, benefit, cost, and patient preference.
  • Conclusion: Further study is needed to understand individual patient risks and to identify treatments that will lead to improved patient outcomes.

 

Venous thromboembolism (VTE) and its associated complications account for significant morbidity and mortality. Each year between 100 and 180 persons per 100,000 in Western countries develop VTE. The majority of VTEs are classified as either pulmonary embolism (PE), which accounts for one third of the events, or deep vein thrombosis (DVT), which is responsible for the remaining two thirds. Between 20% and 30% of those patients diagnosed with thrombotic events will die within the first month after diagnosis [1].PE is a common consequence of DVT; 40% of patients who are diagnosed with DVT will be subsequently found to have PE upon further imaging. This high rate of association is also seen in those who present with PE, 70% of whom will also be found to have concomitant DVT [2,3].

There are many risk factors for VTE, including patient-specific demographic factors, environmental factors, and pharmacologic factors (Table 1). One of the main demographic factors associated with development of VTE is age. It is rare for children to suffer a thrombotic event, whereas older persons have a risk of 450 to 600 events per 100,000 [1]. Other demographic risk factors, both inherited and acquired, have been associated with increased risk of VTE. Inherited risk factors include factor V leiden mutation, prothrombin gene mutation, protein C and protein S deficiencies, antithrombin deficiency, and dysfibrinogenemia. The prevalence of these inherited thrombophilias in patients with VTE is about 25% to 35% compared to 10% in controls without VTE [4,5].Acquired risk factors include prior VTE, malignancy, surgery, trauma, obesity, smoking, pregnancy, and immobilization [6–9].Additionally, multiple medical conditions, including the antiphospholipid antibody syndrome, myeloproliferative neoplasms, paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria, renal disease (particularly nephritic syndrome), liver disease, and inflammatory bowel disease have been shown to increase risk of VTE [10–13].

Anatomic risk factors include Paget-Schroetter syndrome (compression of upper extremity veins due to abnormalities at the thoracic outlet), May-Thurner syndrome (significant compression of the left common iliac vein by the right common iliac artery), and abnormalities of the inferior vena cava [14–16].Medications that are associated with increased risk of VTE include but are not limited to estrogen (both in oral contraceptives as well as hormone replacement therapy) [17,18],the selective estrogen receptor modulator tamoxifen [19],testosterone [20],and glucocorticoids [21].It is important to note that many patients with VTE have more than one acquired risk factor for thrombosis [22],and also that acquired risk factors are more likely to lead to VTE in the setting of underlying inherited thrombophilic conditions [23].

Pathogenesis

Abnormalities in both coagulation factors and the vascular bed are at the core of the pathogenesis of VTE. The multifaceted etiology of thrombosis was first described in 1856 by Virchow, who defined a triad of defects in the vessel wall, platelets, and coagulation proteins [24].Usually the vessel wall is lined with endothelial cells that provide a nonthrombotic surface and limit platelet aggregation through release of prostacyclins and nitric oxide. When the endothelial lining is compromised, the homeostatic surveillance system is disturbed and platelet activation and the coagulation system are initiated. Tissue factor exposure in the damaged area of the vessel leads to activation of the coagulation cascade. Collagen that is present in the area of the wound is also exposed and can activate platelets, which provide the phospholipid surface upon which the coagulation cascade occurs. Platelets initially tether to the exposed collagen through binding of glycoprotein Ib-V-IX in association with von Willebrand factor [25].The thrombus is initiated as more platelets are recruited to exposed collagen of the injured endothelium through aggregation in response to the binding of GPIIIb/IIa with fibrinogen. This process is self-perpetuating as these activated platelets release additional proteins such as adenosine diphosphate (ADP), serotonin, and thromboxane A2, all of which fuel the recruitment and activation of additional platelets [26].

Diagnosis

The key to decreasing the morbidity and mortality associated with VTE is timely diagnosis and early initiation of therapy. Various imaging modalities can be employed to support a diagnosis of a VTE and are used based on clinical suspicion arising from the presence of signs and symptoms. DVT is usually associated with pain in calf or thigh, unilateral swelling, tenderness, and redness. PE can present as chest pain, shortness of breath, syncope, hemoptysis, and/or cardiac palpitations.

Decision Rules

Clinical decision rules based on signs, symptoms, and risk factors have been developed to estimate the pretest probability of PE or DVT and to help determine which patients warrant further testing. These clinical decision rules include the Wells criteria (separate rules for DVT and PE) [27,28],as well as the Geneva score [29],which is focused on identifying patients with a likelihood of having a PE. In general, these clinical rules are applied at presentation to predict the risk of VTE, and patients who score high are evaluated by imaging modalities, while those with lower scores should be considered for further stratification based on D-dimer testing. The goal of clinical assessment and use of a decision rule is to identify patients at low risk of VTE to reduce the number of imaging studies performed. Most of the decision rules focus on the use of noninvasive evaluations that are easily implemented, including clinical history and presentation, abnormalities in oxygen saturation, chest radiography findings, and electro-cardiography.

D-Dimer Testing

D-dimer testing is at the core of all predictive models for VTE. D-dimer is a fibrin degradation product that is detectable in the blood during active fibrinolysis and occurs after clot formation. The concentration of D-dimer increases in patients with active clot. D-dimer testing is usually performed as a quantitative ELISA or automated turbidometric assay and is highly sensitive (> 95%) in excluding a diagnosis of VTE if results are in the normal range [30].The presence of a normal D-dimer and a low probability based on clinical assessment criteria can be integrated to determine which patients have a low (generally < 99%) likelihood of having VTE [31].It should be noted that other factors can lead to an increased D-dimer, including malignancy, trauma, critical illness, disseminated intravascular coagulation, pregnancy, infection, and postoperative status, which can produce false-positive results and cloud the utility of the test in excluding those at low risk of VTE from undergoing imaging [32–34].Additionally, D-dimer values naturally increase with age and recent work has shown utility of an age-adjusted D-dimer threshold, though this method is not yet widespread in clinical practice [35,36].

Imaging

After application of a clinical prediction rule, the mainstay of diagnosis of VTE is imaging. For DVT the use of ultrasonography is considered the gold standard, with both high sensitivity (89–100%) and specificity (86–100%), especially when the DVT is located proximally [37–39].We generally recommend compression ultrasound starting with the proximal veins but expanding to include the whole leg if the proximal studies are negative [40–42].Other diagnostic options include computed tomography (CT) venography, which is not first line as it is highly invasive and exposes the patient to iodine-based contrast dyes, and magnetic resonance venography (MRV), which offers superb visualization for diagnosis of pelvic vein thrombosis but is limited because of availability and cost issues.

Helical CT pulmonary angiography (CTPA) is the diagnostic test of choice in PE, with high sensitivity (96%) and specificity (95%), and has replaced conventional ventilation perfusion (VQ) scanning or other methods such as magnetic resonance pulmonary angiography in most settings [43,44].CTPA should be avoided in patients who have severe chronic kidney disease or a contrast allergy, and is often avoided in patients who are pregnant due to potential risk of radiation exposure, and in such situations VQ scanning may be employed.

Algorithmic Approach to Workup

Our general practice is to apply the Wells clinical prediction rule (Table 2 for DVT and Table 3 for PE), as this system is likely the most familiar to a large number of clinicians and a score can be obtained promptly but accurately based on easily accessible data from history and exam. We generally use the simplified modified criteria presented in the Tables. Once the clinical prediction rule has been applied, we use 2 risk-based algorithms for further evaluation (Figure 1 and Figure 2) [45,46]. In general, we initially perform a D-dimer test for low-risk patients, while we advocate for prompt imaging in high-risk patients to avoid delays in treatment should VTE be diagnosed. Once a diagnosis of VTE is established, treatment should be started promptly. One exception may be isolated 
distal DVT, where it is reasonable to defer treatment in favor of serial ultrasound testing to rule to rule out proximal extension unless the patient is significantly symptomatic with the distal DVT alone [40].

Of note, there are multiple clinical situations in which the application of a clinical prediction rule followed by D-dimer testing and/or imaging cannot be “standardized” with such algorithms. These include situations where D-dimer may be falsely positive (as above), situations in which alternative imaging strategies should be used to avoid contrast exposure in workup of PE (as above), and workup of suspected upper extremity DVT. Upper extremity ultrasound comprises about 10% of all DVT and frequently occurs in the setting of risk factors such as central venous catheters or pacemakers; specific upper-extremity risk-assessment rules have been developed [47,48].

 D-dimer is generally not as useful in workup of upper extremity DVT (given high prevalence of factors that lead to false-positive DVT) and we generally perform compression ultrasonography up front in patients in whom we have high clinical suspicion for upper extremity DVT. In all such clinical situations above, workup should be individualized in accordance with patient factors and careful physician assessment.

Acute Treatment Options

The first step in treatment is identification of patients who are at high risk of 

VTE-related mortality, especially those with PE and hemodynamic instability (defined as systolic blood pressure < 90 mm Hg or a drop in pressure more than 40 mm Hg for more than 15 minutes in the absence of new-onset arrhythmia, hypovolemia, and sepsis). This patient population should be considered for emergent management with thrombolytic therapy, typically recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA, alteplase). Thrombolysis should be reserved for those who have not had any surgical procedures in the last 2 weeks, have no evidence of neurosurgical bleeding, and are not at risk of a bleeding diathesis. Patients who present without frank hemodynamic instability but have evidence of right ventricular dysfunction (by echocardiography or biomarkers such as troponin elevation) may be at “intermediate risk” for adverse outcomes and the role of thrombolytics in this population is an area of active investigation [49,50].

In standard cases of DVT and PE without hemodynamic compromise, the current standard of care is to initiate parenteral anticoagulation. The immediate goal of therapy is to treat rapidly with anticoagulants to prevent the thrombus from propagating further and to prevent DVT from embolization to the lungs or other vascular beds. The initial treatment of VTE has been extensively discussed and guidelines have been established with recommendations for initiation of anticoagulation; the American College of Chest Physicians (ACCP) released the 9th edition of their guidelines in 2012 based on consensus agreements derived from primary data [51].

Heparin-based drugs are the mainstay of initial treatment. These drugs act by potentiating antithrombin and therefore inactivating thrombin and other coagulation factors such as Xa. Unfractionated heparin (UFH) can be administered as an initial bolus followed by a continuous infusion with dosing being based on weight and titrated to activated partial thromboplastin time (aPTT) or the anti-factor Xa level. Alternatively, patients may be treated with a low molecular weight heparin (LMWH) administered subcutaneously in fixed weight-adjusted doses, which obviates the need for monitoring in most cases [52].LMWHs work in a similar manner to UFH but have more anti-Xa activity in comparison to anti-thrombin activity. LMWH appears to be more effective than UFH for initial treatment of VTE and has been associated with lower risk of major hemorrhage [53].The options for treatment of VTE have expanded in recent years with the approval of fondparinux, a pentasaccharide specifically targeted to inhibit factor Xa. Fondaparinux has been shown to have similar efficacy to LMWH in patients with DVT [54],and while it has not been evaluated directly against LMWH for initial treatment of PE it has been shown to be at least as effective and safe as UFH [55].

Both LMWH and fondaparinux are cleared renally and therefore have increased bleeding risk in patients with renal impairment. In patients with creatinine clearance of less than 30 mL/min, dose reduction or lengthening of dosing interval may be appropriate. Anti-factor Xa activity can be used as a functional assay to monitor and titrate the level of anticoagulation in patients treated with UFH, LMWH, and fondaparinux. Monitoring is useful in the setting of impaired renal function (as above) in addition to extremes of body weight and pregnancy. When used for monitoring of UFH, the anti-factor Xa activity can be measured at any time during administration with a therapeutic goal range of 0.3–0.7 international units (IU)/mL. When used for LMWH, a “peak” anti-factor Xa should be measured approximately 4 hours after dosing, with therapeutic goals depending on preparation and schedule of treatment but generally between 0.6 to 1.0 IU/mL for twice daily and around 1.0 -2.0 IU/mL for once-daily [56].For patients on dialysis, we generally use intravenous UFH for acute treatment of VTE, though recent work has shown that enoxaparin (doses of 0.4 to 1 mg/kg/day) was as safe as UFH with respect to bleeding and was associated with shorter hospital length of stay [57].For long-term treatment of VTE, warfarin is generally preferred based on clinical experience with this agent, though small studies have suggested that parenteral agents may be useful alternatives to warfarin [58].

In many patients who are clinically stable without significant medical comorbidities, outpatient administration of these medications without hospitalization is considered safe. Patients with DVT are often safe to manage as outpatients unless significant clot burden is present and thrombolysis is being considered. For PE, the pulmonary embolism severity index (PESI) and simplified index (sPESI) may be useful to risk-stratify patients and identify those at low risk of complications who may be suitable for outpatient treatment [59,60].Studies have shown that hemodynamically stable patients who did not require supplemental oxygenation or have contraindications to LMWH therapy were safely managed as outpatients with low risk of recurrent VTE and bleeding [61,62].One exception may be patients with intermediate risk PE, who are hemodynamically stable but have evidence of right ventricular dysfunction and may be better served by an initial in-hospital observation period, especially if thrombolysis is being considered.

Most patients who present with VTE are transitioned to warfarin for long-term therapy. Warfarin can be started on the same day as parenteral anticoagulation. Both drugs are overlapped for at least 5 days, with a target INR of 2.0–3.0. Patients may achieve the target INR level quickly because factor VII has a short half-life and the level drops quickly; however, the overlap of 5 days is essential even when the INR is in the target range because a full anticoagulant affect is not achieved until prothrombin levels decline, and this is a slow process due to the long half-life of prothrombin. Warfarin also causes rapid decrease in levels of natural anticoagulants such as protein C and protein S, which further exacerbates the net hypercoagulable state in the short-term. Warfarin without a bridging parenteral agent carries a risk of warfarin-induced skin necrosis [63]and is not effective as an initial anticoagulant treatment in acute VTE as there is a relatively high risk of symptomatic clot extension or recurrent VTE compared to warfarin with use of a bridging agent [64].In specific cases such as cancer-associated VTE (see discussion below), LMWH is preferred to warfarin for long-term active therapy.

Long-Term Active Therapy After Acute Treatment

Duration of Anticoagulation

Recommended duration of anticoagulation depends on a myriad of factors including severity of VTE, risk of recurrence, bleeding risk, and lifestyle modification issues, as well as on the safety and availability of alternative therapies such as low-intensity warfarin, aspirin, or the new oral anticoagulants. The decision tree for length of treatment starts with whether the VTE was a provoked or a spontaneous event. Provoked events occur when the event is associated with an identifiable risk factor, such as immobilization from prolonged medical illness or surgical intervention, pregnancy or oral contraceptive use, and prolonged air travel.

Consensus guidelines suggest that 3 months of anti-coagulation are generally sufficient treatment for a provoked VTE [51,65,66]. Data from multiple studies and a meta-analysis suggests that less than 3 months of anticoagulation (4 to 6 weeks in most trials) is associated with an approximately 1.5-fold higher risk of recurrent VTE than 3 months [67,68].However, data from this meta-analysis also suggests that anticoagulation for longer than 3 months (6 to 12 months in most trials) is not associated with higher rates of recurrent VTE. We generally anticoagulate for 3 months in patients with provoked VTE.

Determining the duration of anticoagulation is more complex in patients with idiopathic/unprovoked VTE. Kearon and colleagues found that in patients with first idiopathic VTE, patients who were anticoagulated for 24 months versus 3 months had lower risk of recurrent VTE (1.3% per patient-year with 24 months versus 27.4% per patient-year with 3 months) [69].Similar studies and meta-analyses have demonstrated decreased recurrence rates in patients anticoagulated for a prolonged period of time. However, one study of prolonged anticoagulation revealed that at 3 years there was no difference in recurrence rate in patients with PE who were anticoagulated for 6 months versus 1 year [70].The likelihood of recurrent DVT in patients with first episode of idiopathic proximal DVT treated with either 3 months or 12 months of warfarin was similar after treatment was discontinued [71].Prolonged periods of anticoagulation do not directly influence risk of recurrence but instead may only delay occurrence of a second event [72].For that reason, the decision is essentially whether to anticoagulate for 3 months or to continue therapy indefinitely [73]. Current guidelines recommend continuing anticoagulation for 3 months in those at high risk of bleeding, and continuing for an extended duration in those at low or moderate bleeding risk [51]. Patients' values and perferences should be entertained and decisions made on a patient-by-patient basis.

For patients at high risk of recurrent VTE, we generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation unless the patient has a significantly elevated bleeding risk or strongly prefers to discontinue anticoagulation and compliance concerns are evident. High-risk patients are those who have suffered from multiple episodes of recurrent VTE, those who have clotted while being anticoagulated, and those with acquired risk factors, such as antiphospholipid antibodies and malignancy. Other high-risk groups are those with high-risk thrombophilias such as deficiency of protein S, protein C, or antithrombin, homozygous factor V Leiden or prothrombin gene mutations, and compound heterozygous factor V Leiden/prothrombin gene mutation in the setting of an unprovoked event. Further discussion of models for risk assessment of recurrence is provided below.

Assessment of Bleeding Risk

The bleeding risk associated with the use of anticoagulation must be weighed against the risk of clotting events when determining duration of anticoagulation, especially in those patients for whom indefinite anticoagulation is a consideration. Risk of bleeding while on anticoagulation is approximately 1–3% per 100 patient-years [74],but concomitant medical conditions such as renal failure, diabetes-related cerebrovascular disease, malignancy, advanced age, and use of antiplatelet agents all increase the risk of bleeding. Bleeding risk is highest when patients first initiate anticoagulation and is approximately 10 times the risk in the first month of therapy than after the first year of therapy [75].

Risk assessment models such as the RIETE score may be helpful when indefinite anticoagulation is a possibility [76].The RIETE score encompasses 6 risk factors (age > 75 years, recent bleeding, cancer, creatinine level > 1.2 mg/dL, anemia, or PE at baseline) to categorize patients into low risk (0 points, 0.3% risk of bleeding), intermediate risk (1–4 points, 2.6% risk of bleeding) and high risk (> 4 points, 6.2% risk of bleeding) within 3 months of anticoagulant therapy. The ACCP has developed a more extensive list of 17 potential risk factors for bleeding to categorize patients into low risk (no risk factors, 0.8%/year risk of bleeding), intermediate risk (1 risk factor, 1.6%/year risk of bleeding) and high risk (2 or more risk factors, >6.5%/year risk of bleeding) categories [77].The RIETE score is simpler to use but was not developed for assessing risk of bleeding during indefinite therapy, while the ACCP risk categorization predicts a yearly risk and is therefore applicable for long-term risk assessment but is more cumbersome to use. In practice, we generally use a clinical gestalt of a patient’s clinical risk factors (particularly age, renal or hepatic dysfunction, and frequent falls) to assess if they may be at high risk of bleeding and if the risk of indefinite anticoagulation may thus outweigh the potential benefit.

We also note that several scoring systems (HAS-BLED, HEMORR2HAGES, and ATRIA scores) have been developed to predict those at high risk of bleeding on anticoagulation for atrial fibrillation [78–80].These scores generally include similar clinical risk factors to those in the RIETE and ACCP scoring systems. Several studies have compared the HAS-BLED, HEMORR2HAGES, and ATRIA scores and a systematic review and meta-analysis concluded that the HAS-BLED score is recommended, due to increased sensitivity and ease of application [81].However, as these scores have not been validated for anticoagulation in the setting of VTE, we do not use them in this capacity.

Risk Stratification for Recurrent VTE

When predicting risk of recurrent VTE, clinical risk factors including obesity, male gender, and underlying thrombophilia (including the “high risk” inherited thrombophilias identified above) must taken into consideration. Location of the thrombus must also be considered; it has also been demonstrated that patients with DVT involving the iliofemoral veins are at higher risk of recurrence than those without iliac involvement [82].Other factors that may be useful in risk stratification include D-dimer level and ultrasound to search for residual venous thrombosis.

D-dimer Levels

D-dimer levels are one of the more promising methods for assessing the risk of recurrent VTE after cessation of anticoagulation, especially in the case of idiopathic VTE where indefinite anticoagulation should be considered but may pose either risk of bleeding or significant inconvenience to patients. A normal D-dimer measured 1 month after cessation of anticoagulation offers a high negative predictive value for risk of recurrence [83].A number of studies have demonstrated that patients with elevated D-dimer 1 month after anticoagulation cessation are at increased risk for a recurrent event [84–86].Two predictive models that have been developed incorporate D-dimer testing into decision making [87,88].The DASH predictive model relies on the D-dimer result in addition to age, male sex, and use of hormone therapy as a method of risk stratification for recurrent VTE in patients with a first unprovoked event. Using this scoring system, patients with a score of 0 or 1 had a recurrence rate of 3.1%, those with a score of 2 a recurrence rate of 6.4%, and those with a score of 3 or greater a recurrence rate of 12.3%. The authors postulate that by using this assessment scheme they can avoid lifelong anticoagulation in 51% of patients. The Vienna prediction model uses male sex, location of VTE (proximal DVT and PE are at higher risk), and D-dimer level to predict risk of recurrent VTE. This model has recently been updated to include a “dynamic” component to predict risk of recurrence of VTE from multiple random time points [89].

Overall, D-dimer may be useful for risk stratification. We often employ the method of stopping anticoagulation in patients with unprovoked VTE after 3 months (if the patient has no identifiable clinical risk factors that place them at high risk of recurrence) and testing D-dimer 1 month after cessation of anticoagulation. An elevated D-dimer is a solid reason to restart anticoagulation (potentially on an indefinite basis), while a negative D-dimer provides support for withholding further anticoagulation in the absence of other significant risk factors for recurrence. However, lack of agreement regarding assay cut-points as well as multiple reasons other than VTE for D-dimer elevation may limit widespread use of this method. We generally use a cutpoint of 250 ug/L as “negative,” though at least one study showed that cut-points of 250 ug/L versus 500 ug/L did not change the utility of this method [90].In our practice, risk prediction models are most useful to provide patients with additional information and a visual presentation to support our recommendation. This is particularly true of the Vienna prediction rule, which is available in a printable nomogram which can be distributed to patients and completed together during the clinic visit.

Imaging Analysis

Imaging analysis may also assist with risk stratification. Clinical assessment modules have been developed that incorporate repeat imaging studies for assessment of recannulization of affected veins. In patients with residual vein thrombosis (RVT) at the time anticoagulation was stopped, the hazard ratio for recurrence was 2.4 compared to those without RVT [91].There are a number of ways RVT could impact recurrence, including inpaired venous flow leading to stasis and activation of the coagulation cascade. Subsequent studies used serial ultrasound to determine when to stop anticoagulation. In one study, patients were anticoagulated for 3 months and for those that had RVT, anticoagulation was continued for up to 9 months for provoked and 21 months for unprovoked VTE. In comparison to fixed dosing of 6 months of anti-coagulation, those who had their length of anticoagulation tailored to ultrasonography findings had a lower rate of recurrent VTE [92].Limitations to using RVT in clinical decision-making include lack of a standard definition of RVT and variability in both timing of ultrasound (operator variability) and interpretation of results [93].

Other Options

Another option in patients who are being considered for indefinite anticoagulation is to decrease the intensity of anticoagulation. Since this would theoretically lower the risk of bleeding, the perceived benefit of long-term, low-intensity anticoagulation would be reduction in both bleeding and clotting risk. The PREVENT trial randomized patients who had received full-dose anticoagulation for a median of 6.5 months to either low-intensity warfarin (INR goal of 1.5-2.0 instead of 2.0-3.0) or placebo. In the anticoagulation group, there was a 64% risk reduction in recurrent VTE (hazard ratio 0.36, 95% CI 0.19 to 0.67) but an increased risk of bleeding (hazard ratio 1.92, 95% CI 1.26 to 2.93) [94].The ELATE study randomized patients with unprovoked VTE who had completed 3 or more months of full-intensity warfarin therapy (target INR 2.0–3.0) to continue therapy with either low-intensity warfarin (target INR 1.5–2.0) or full-intensity warfarin (target INR 2.0-3.0). Compared to the low-intensity group, the conventional-intensity group had lower rates of recurrent VTE and no increased rates of major bleeding [95].This study, however, has been criticized because of its overall low bleeding rate in both treatment groups.

Aspirin is an option in patients in whom long-term anticoagulation is untenable. The ASPIRE trial demonstrated that in patients with unprovoked VTE who had completed a course of initial anticoagulation, aspirin 100 mg daily reduced the risk of major vascular events compared to placebo with no increase in bleeding [96].However, aspirin was not associated with a significant reduction in risk of VTE alone (only the composite vascular event endpoint). The WARFASA trial, however, demonstrated that aspirin 100 mg daily was associated with a significant reduction in recurrent VTE compared to placebo after 6 to 18 months of anticoagulation without an increase in major bleeding [97].The absolute risk of recurrence was 11% in the placebo group and 5.9% in the aspirin group. More recently, the INSPIRE collaboration analyzed data from both trials and found that aspirin after initial anticoagulation reduced the risk of recurrent VTE by approximately 42% with a low rate of major bleeding [98].The absolute risk reduction was even larger in men and older patients. For this reason, we recommend aspirin to those patients in whom indefinite anticoagulation may be warranted from the standpoint of reducing risk of recurrent VTE but in whom the risk of bleeding precludes its use.

Hypercoagulable States In Specific Populations

Inherited Thrombophilias

Patients with a hereditary thrombophilia are at increased risk for incident VTE [99].These inherited mutations result in either a loss of normal anticoagulant function or gain of a prothrombotic state. Hereditary disorders associated with VTE include deficiency of antithrombin, protein C, or protein S, or the presence of factor V Leiden and/or prothrombin G20210A mutations. Although deficiency of protein C, protein S, or antithrombin is uncommon and affects only 0.5% of the population, these states have been associated with a 10-fold increased risk of thrombosis in comparison to the general population. Factor V Leiden and prothrombin gene mutation are less likely to be associated with incident thrombosis (2 to 5-fold increased risk of VTE) and are more prevalent in the Caucasian population [100].Though these hereditary thrombophilias increase risk of VTE, prophylactic anti-coagulation prior to a first VTE is not generally indicated.

Data regarding the impact of the inherited thrombophilias on risk of recurrent VTE is less well defined. While some data suggest that inherited thrombophilias are associated with increased risk of recurrent VTE, the degree of impact may be clinically modest especially in those with heterozygous factor V Leiden or prothrombin gene mutations [101].Ideally, a clinical trial would be designed to assess whether hereditary thrombophilia testing is beneficial for patients with VTE in decision-making regarding length of anticoagulation, type of anticoagulation, and risk of recurrence. If a patient with a low-risk inherited thrombophilia has a DVT in the setting of an additional provoking risk factor (surgery, pregnancy, etc), a 3-month course of anticoagulation followed by D-dimer assessment as above is reasonable. If a patient with an inherited thrombophilia experiences an idiopathic VTE, or if a patient with a “high-risk” thrombophilia as described above experiences any type of VTE, we generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation in the absence of high bleeding risk, though again this is a very patient-dependent choice.

Acquired Thrombophilias

Antiphospholipid Syndrome

Antibodies directed against proteins that bind phospho-lipids are associated with an acquired hypercoagulable state. The autoantibodies are categorized as antiphospho-lipid antibodies (APLAs), which include anticardiolipin antibodies (IgG and IgM), beta-2 glycoprotein 1 antibodies (anti-B2 GP), and lupus anticoagulant. These antibodies can form autonomously, as seen in primary disorders, or in association with autoimmune disease as a secondary disorder.

Criteria have been developed to distinguish antiphospholipid-associated clotting disorders from other forms of thrombophilia. The updated Sapporo criteria depend on both laboratory and clinical diagnostic criteria [102].The laboratory diagnosis of APLAs requires the presence of lupus anticoagulants, anticardiolipin antibodies, or anti-B2 GP on at least 2 assays at least 12 weeks apart with elevation above the 99th percentile of the testing laboratory’s normal distribution [103].Testing for lupus anticoagulant is based on 3 stages, the first of which is inhibition of phospholipid-dependent coagulation tests with prolonged clotting time (eg, aPTT or dilute Russell’s viper venom time). The diagnosis is confirmed by a secondary test in which excess hexagonal phase phospholipids are added to incubate with the patient’s plasma to absorb the APLA [104].The presence of anticardiolipin antibodies and anti beta-2 GP antibodies is determined using ELISA based immunoassays. Unlike most other thrombophilias, antiphospholipid syndrome is associated with both arterial and venous thromboembolic events and may be an indication for lifelong anticoagulation after a first thrombotic event. We generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation in the absence of significant bleeding risk.

Cancer-Associated Hypercoagulable State

Patients with cancer have a propensity for thromboembolic events. The underlying mechanisms responsible for cancer-associated clotting events are multifactorial and an area of intense research. Tumor cells can initiate activation of the clotting cascade through release of tissue factor and other pro-coagulant molecules [105].Type and stage of cancer impact risk of VTE, and the tumor itself can compress vasculature leading to venous stasis. Furthermore, chemotherapy, hormone therapy, antiangiogenic drugs, erythropoietin agents, and indwelling central venous catheters all are associated with increased risk of thrombotic events. Approximately 25% of all cancer patients will experience a thrombotic event during the course of their disease [106]. In fact, the presence of a spontaneous clot may be a harbinger of underlying malignancy [107].Approximately 10% of patients who present with an idiopathic VTE are diagnosed with cancer in the next 1 to 2 years.

The utility of extensive cancer screening in patients with spontaneous clotting events is often debated. The small studies that have addressed cancer associated clots have not demonstrated any mortality benefit with extensive screening. A prospective cohort study addressed the utility of limited versus extensive screening [108].In this study, all patients underwent a series of basic screening tests such as history taking, physical examination, chest radiograph, and basic laboratory parameters. Approximately half of the patients underwent additional testing (CT of chest and abdomen and mammography for women). Screening did not result in increased survival or fewer cancer-related deaths. 3.5 % of patients in the extensive screening group were diagnosed with malignancy in comparison to 2.4% in the limited screening group. During follow-up, cancer was diagnosed in 3.7% and 5.0% in the extensive and limited screening groups, respectively. The authors concluded that the low yield of extensive screening and lack of survival benefit did not warrant routinely ordering cancer screening tests above and beyond age-appropriate screening in patients with idiopathic VTE. However, it is known that identification of occult malignancy at an earlier stage of disease is beneficial, and cancer diagnosed within one year of an episode of VTE is generally more advanced and associated with a poorer prognosis [109].It is our practice to take a through history from patients with unprovoked clots particularly focusing on symptoms suggestive of an underlying cancer. We recommend that patients be up to date with all age-appropriate cancer screening.

Heparin-based products (rather than warfarin) are recommended for long-term treatment of cancer-associated DVT. Several trials, most prominently the CLOT trial, have demonstrated that LMWH is associated with reduced risk of recurrent VTE compared with warfarin in cancer patients [110].Fondaparinux may be a reasonable alternative if a patient is unable to tolerate a LMWH. In terms of treatment duration, patients with cancer-associated VTE should be anticoagulated indefinitely as long as they continue to have evidence of active malignancy and/or remain on antineoplastic treatment [111].

Heparin has potential anticancer effects beyond its anticoagulation properties. It is believed that heparin use in patients with cancer can influence cancer progression by acting as an antimetastatic agent. The molecular mechanisms underlying this significant observation are not completely understood, although the first documented benefit of these drugs dates back to the 1970s [112].Overall, LMWH have been associated with improved overall survival in cancer patients and this effect appears to be distinct from its ability to prevent life-threatening VTE episodes [113].

Estrogen-Related Thromboembolic Disease

Pregnancy is a well-established acquired hypercoagulable state, and thromboembolic disease accounts for significant morbidity and mortality in pregnancy and the postpartum period. Approximately 1 in 1000 women will suffer from a thrombotic event during pregnancy or shortly after delivery [8]. The etiology of the tendency to clot during pregnancy is multifactorial and mainly reflects venous stasis due to vasculature compression by the uterus, changes in coagulation factors as the pregnancy progresses, and endothelial damage during delivery, especially Cesarean section. Both factor VIII and von Willebrand factor levels increase, especially in the final months of pregnancy. Simultaneously, levels of the natural anticoagulant protein S diminish, leading to an acquired resistance to activated protein C which results in increased thrombin generation and therefore a hypercoagulable state [114].The risk of thrombosis in pregnancy is clearly heightened in women with inherited thrombophilias, especially in the postpartum period [115].

Similarly to pregnancy, hormone-based contraceptive agents and estrogen replacement therapies are also associated with increased thrombotic risk. Over the years, drug manufacturers have tried to mitigate the clotting risk associated with these drugs by reducing the amount of estrogen and altering the type of progesterone used, yet a risk still remains, resulting in a VTE incidence 2 to 7 times higher in this population [116].The risk is highest in the first 4 months of use and is unaffected by duration of use; risk extends for 3 months after cessation of estrogen-containing therapy. Patients who develop VTE while taking an oral contraceptive are generally instructed to stop the contraceptive and consider an alternative form of birth control. Although routine screening for thrombophilia is not offered to women before prescribing oral contraceptives, a thorough personal and family history regarding venous and arterial thrombotic events as well as recurrent pregnancy loss in women should be taken to evaluate thromboembolic risk factors. We generally avoid use of oral contraceptives in patients with a known hereditary thrombophilia, and consider screening prior to initiation of therapy in those with a strong family history of VTE.

Superficial VTE

Although the main disorders that comprise VTE are DVT and PE, another common presentation is superficial venous thromboembolism (SVT). The risk factors for developing an SVT are similar to those for DVT. In addition, varicose veins also increase the incidence of developing SVT [117].SVT is not associated with excessive mortality, and the main concern with it is progression to DVT. About 25% of patients diagnosed with SVT may have DVT or PE at the time of diagnosis and about 3% without DVT or PE at time of diagnosis developed one of these complications over the following 3 months; clot propagation is another common complication [118].Ultrasound may be of utility in diagnosing occult DVT in patients who initially diagnosed with SVT [119].

For patients who have only SVT at baseline without concomitant DVT or PE, it is difficult to determine which patients are at risk for developing DVT. Some risk stratification models include clot location. Since SVT clots usually develop in the saphenous vein, the clot would need to either progress from the sapheno-femoral junction to the common femoral vein; thus, any clots located near the sapheno-femoral junction are at risk of progressing into the deep vasculature [120].Clots within 3 cm of the junction may be more likely to progress to DVT [121].Chengelis and colleagues feel that proximal saphenous vein thrombosis should likely be treated with anticoagulation [122].Others have taken a more general approach, stating that all clots above the knee or in the thigh area should be treated aggressively [123].

There are solid data for the use of anticoagulation in SVT. In the STEFLUX (Superficial ThromboEmbolism and Fluxum) study, participants received the LMWH parnaparin at one of 3 doses: 8500 IU once daily for 10 days followed by placebo for 20 days, 8500 IU once daily for 10 days and then 6400 IU once daily for 20 days, or 4250 IU once daily for 30 days. Those who received the intermediate dosing had lower rates of DVT, PE, and relapse/SVT recurrence in the first 33 days [124].In the CALISTO trial, fondaparinux 2.5mg per day for 45 days effectively reduced the risk of symptomatic DVT, PE, or SVT recurrence or extension and was not associated with any increased major bleeding compared to placebo [125].A Cochrane review included 30 studies involving over 6500 participants with SVT of the lower extremities. The treatments used in these studies included fondaparinux, LMWH, UFH, non-steriodal anti-inflammatory agents, topical treatment, and surgery. According to the findings, use of fondaparinux at prophylactic dosing for 6 weeks is considered a valid therapeutic option for SVT [126].It is our practice to consider the use of anticoagulants (generally LMWH or fondaparinux) as part of the treatment regimen for SVT.

Target-Specific Oral Anticoagulants And Treatment of VTE

Because of warfarin’s narrow therapeutic window, need for frequent monitoring, significant drug and food interactions, and unfavorable kinetics, the target-specific oral anticoagulants (TSOACs) have been developed with the aim of offering alternatives to warfarin therapy (Figure 3). These drugs have been developed to inhibit either thrombin or factor Xa to disrupt the coagulation cascade. Since these drugs bind directly to coagulation factor, they are associated with rapid onset of action, a wide therapeutic window, fewer drug interactions than warfarin, and predictable dose-response allowing for fixed dosing without lab monitoring.

The direct thrombin inhibitor dabigatran directly binds to thrombin in a concentration-dependent manner [127].Peak plasma concentration is achieved within 0.5 to 2.0 hours after ingestion, and its half-life is 12 to 17 hours. Use of dabigatran in both primary and secondary prevention of VTE has been extensively studied, especially in orthopedic surgery where there have been 4 main trials (RE-MOBILIZE, RE-MODEL, RE-NOVATE, and RE-NOVATE I and II). While RE-MOBILIZE showed that dabigatran 220 mg or 150 mg once daily was inferior to enoxaparin 30 mg twice daily in preventing VTE after total knee arthroplasty, RE-MODEL and RE-NOVATE I and II demonstrated that dabigatran 150 mg or 220 mg once daily was noninferior to enoxaparin 40 mg once daily for prevention of VTE in patients undergoing total knee replacement and hip replacement [128–131].The side effect profile was also promising, with no significant differences in the frequency of major bleeding between dabigatran and enoxaparin. Pooled data and meta-analyses from these trials have demonstrated that for prevention of VTE associated with hip or knee surgery, dabigatran 220 mg or 150 mg once daily is as effective as 40 mg of enoxaparin given daily or 30 mg given twice a day, with a similar bleeding profile [132,133].

More recently, dabigatran been used in the acute treatment and secondary prevention of VTE. In the RE-COVER trial, dabigatran 150 mg twice daily was compared to warfarin (INR 2–3) in the treatment of acute VTE for 6 months, after an initial treatment period of up to 9 days with LMWH or UFH. Dabigatran was noninferior to warfarin with respect to 6-month incidence of recurrent symptomatic objectively confirmed VTE and related deaths, and was not associated with increased bleeding [134].In the RE-MEDY and RE-SONATE trials of extended anticoagulation, dabigatran was as effective as warfarin for prevention of recurrent VTE when continued after 3 months of initial anticoagulation and associated with less bleeding, and was more effective than placebo in preventing recurrent VTE but associated with a higher risk of bleeding [135].Unexpectedly, the risk of acute coronary syndrome was slightly higher in the dabigatran group than the warfarin group, as seen in other studies.

Rivaroxaban, a TSOAC that targets factor Xa, has also shown efficacy in preventing VTE after knee or hip surgery. The RE-CORD 1-4 studies all focused on the use of rivaroxaban in comparison to enoxaparin and found that rivaroxaban 10 mg once daily was superior to enoxaparin 40 mg once daily in prevention of VTE in total knee and total hip arthroplasty [136–138].Meta-analysis of multiple rivaroxaban VTE prophylaxis trials also demonstrated that rivaroxaban significantly lowered the risk of VTE in these surgical patients in comparison to the use of enoxaparin [139].Prophylactic use of rivaroxaban was also studied in acutely ill hospitalized patients in the MAGELLAN trial. Rivaroxaban 10 mg daily for 35 days was compared to enoxaparin 40 mg daily for 10 days followed by placebo and was found to be noninferior to enoxaparin in reduction of VTE risk at day 10 and superior to placebo at day 35 [140].However, the rate of bleeding, although low in both arms, was higher in the rivaroxaban arm.

Rivaroxaban has been studied in randomized clinical trials for acute treatment of DVT and PE and for extended prophylaxis for recurrent VTE (EINSTEIN-DVT, EINSTEIN-PE and EINSTEIN-Extension, respectively).  The treatment strategy for use of rivaroxaban differed from that of dabigatran (in the RE-COVER trial), as rivaroxaban was used upfront as initial anticoagulation rather than after an initial period of parenteral therapy with LMWH or UFH. In both the DVT and PE trials, rivaroxaban was noninferior to standard treatment with enoxaparin followed by warfarin therapy, with no significant difference in major bleeding at 6 months of treatment [141,142].The extension trial also demonstrated that use of rivaroxaban in comparison to placebo for an additional 6 or 12 months after standard therapy was associated with significantly fewer recurrent VTE [141]. These studies led to FDA approval for rivaroxaban for primary prevention of VTE in patients undergoing elective total hip or knee repair surgery, for treatment of acute DVT or PE, and for extended prophylaxis in patients following initial treatment.

The anti-factor Xa TSOAC apixaban has been studied in similar fashion as rivaroxaban. In the AMPLIFY study, apixaban was given at a dose of 10 mg twice daily for 7 days followed by 5 mg twice daily for 6 months (as monotherapy, without initial parenteral agent) and compared to enoxaparin followed by warfarin for treatment of acute VTE. Apixaban was as effective as warfarin in terms of recurrent symptomatic VTE or VTE-related death, and was associated with significantly fewer bleeding events [143].Extended-duration apixaban given at treatment dose (5 mg twice daily) or at prophylactic dose (2.5 mg twice daily) for 12 months after completion of treatment-dose apixaban for VTE demonstrated superiority to placebo for extended prophylaxis in AMPLIFY-EXT, and there was no increase in major bleeding compared to placebo [144].Apixaban was recently approved by the FDA for both treatment and secondary prophylaxis of VTE.

More recently, a third anti-factor Xa TSOAC edoxaban demonstrated noninferiority to warfarin in prevention of recurrent symptomatic VTE when administered to patients with DVT or PE at 60 mg once daily for 3 to 12 months [145].Edoxaban also led to significantly less bleeding than warfarin. Edoxaban was recently approved by the FDA for treatment of VTE.

These TSOACs show promise in treatment and prevention of VTE but should be used in patients who meet appropriate criteria for renal function, age, and bleeding risk, as there are currently no available antidotes to reverse their effects. If significant bleeding occurs and cannot be controlled by usual maneuvers such as mechanical compression or surgical intervention, there is little data to guide the use of pharmacologic interventions. Plasma dabigatran levels can be reduced through the use of hemodialysis [146].Antibodies capable of neutralizing dabigatran have been developed, and one specific antibody, idarucizumab, was well-tolerated and showed immediate and complete reversal of dabigatran in subjects of different age and renal function [147,148].Andexanet, a modified recombinant derivative of factor Xa with no catalytic activty, acts as a “decoy receptor” with higher affinity to factor Xa inhibitors than natural factor Xa.  Phase II studies in healthy volunteers demonstrated that andexanet immediately reversed the anticoagulation activity of apixaban, rivaroxaban, enoxaparin, and most recently edoxaban without thrombotic consequences [149].Two randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled phase III studies (ANNEXA-A, looking at the reversal of apixaban, and ANNEXA-R, looking at reversal of rivaroxaban) are underway, and preliminary results show that a single intravenous bolus of andexanet demonstrated almost complete reversal [150].Finally, aripazine (PER977), a synthetic small molecule that binds to heparins as well as all TSOACs, was shown in a phase II trial to decrease blood clotting time to within 10% above baseline value in 10 minutes or less with an effect lasting for 24 hours [151].

Some have advocated for use of prothrombin complex concentrate (PCC) or recombinant factor VIIa for reversal of TSOAC-associated bleeding. Rivaroxaban was demonstrated to be partially reversible by PCC, whereas this approach was not as successful for dabigatran in healthy volunteers [152].In vitro evidence, however, showed that PCC did not significantly change aPTT [153].At present, the use of nonspecific hemostatic agents (including recombinant factor VIIa, 4-factor prothrombin complex concentrate, and activated prothrombin complex concentrates) is suggested for reversal of TSOACs in patients who present with life-threatening bleeding [154,155].

Conclusion

Patients with VTE present with a wide range of findings and factors that impact management. Decision making in VTE management is a fluid process that should be re-evaluated as new data emerge and individual circumstances change. There is more focus on VTE prevention and treatment today than there was even a decade ago. Diagnostic algorithms, identification of new risk factors, refinement in understanding of the pathogenesis of thrombosis, and identification of new anticoagulants with more favorable risk-benefit profiles will all ultimately contribute to improved patient care.

 

Corresponding author: Jean M. Connors, MD, Brigham and Women's Hospital, 75 Francis St., Boston, MA 02215.

From the Brigham and Women’s Hospital and Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA.

 

Abstract

  • Objective: To review the diagnosis and management of venous thromboembolism (VTE).
  • Methods: Review of the literature.
  • Results: VTE and its associated complications account for significant morbidity and mortality. Various imaging modalities can be employed to support a diagnosis of a VTE and are used based on clinical suspicion arising from the presence of signs and symptoms. Clinical decision rules have been developed  that can help determine which patients warrant further testing. Anticoagulation, the mainstay of VTE treatment, increases bleeding risk, necessitating tailored treatment strategies that must incorporate etiology, risk, benefit, cost, and patient preference.
  • Conclusion: Further study is needed to understand individual patient risks and to identify treatments that will lead to improved patient outcomes.

 

Venous thromboembolism (VTE) and its associated complications account for significant morbidity and mortality. Each year between 100 and 180 persons per 100,000 in Western countries develop VTE. The majority of VTEs are classified as either pulmonary embolism (PE), which accounts for one third of the events, or deep vein thrombosis (DVT), which is responsible for the remaining two thirds. Between 20% and 30% of those patients diagnosed with thrombotic events will die within the first month after diagnosis [1].PE is a common consequence of DVT; 40% of patients who are diagnosed with DVT will be subsequently found to have PE upon further imaging. This high rate of association is also seen in those who present with PE, 70% of whom will also be found to have concomitant DVT [2,3].

There are many risk factors for VTE, including patient-specific demographic factors, environmental factors, and pharmacologic factors (Table 1). One of the main demographic factors associated with development of VTE is age. It is rare for children to suffer a thrombotic event, whereas older persons have a risk of 450 to 600 events per 100,000 [1]. Other demographic risk factors, both inherited and acquired, have been associated with increased risk of VTE. Inherited risk factors include factor V leiden mutation, prothrombin gene mutation, protein C and protein S deficiencies, antithrombin deficiency, and dysfibrinogenemia. The prevalence of these inherited thrombophilias in patients with VTE is about 25% to 35% compared to 10% in controls without VTE [4,5].Acquired risk factors include prior VTE, malignancy, surgery, trauma, obesity, smoking, pregnancy, and immobilization [6–9].Additionally, multiple medical conditions, including the antiphospholipid antibody syndrome, myeloproliferative neoplasms, paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria, renal disease (particularly nephritic syndrome), liver disease, and inflammatory bowel disease have been shown to increase risk of VTE [10–13].

Anatomic risk factors include Paget-Schroetter syndrome (compression of upper extremity veins due to abnormalities at the thoracic outlet), May-Thurner syndrome (significant compression of the left common iliac vein by the right common iliac artery), and abnormalities of the inferior vena cava [14–16].Medications that are associated with increased risk of VTE include but are not limited to estrogen (both in oral contraceptives as well as hormone replacement therapy) [17,18],the selective estrogen receptor modulator tamoxifen [19],testosterone [20],and glucocorticoids [21].It is important to note that many patients with VTE have more than one acquired risk factor for thrombosis [22],and also that acquired risk factors are more likely to lead to VTE in the setting of underlying inherited thrombophilic conditions [23].

Pathogenesis

Abnormalities in both coagulation factors and the vascular bed are at the core of the pathogenesis of VTE. The multifaceted etiology of thrombosis was first described in 1856 by Virchow, who defined a triad of defects in the vessel wall, platelets, and coagulation proteins [24].Usually the vessel wall is lined with endothelial cells that provide a nonthrombotic surface and limit platelet aggregation through release of prostacyclins and nitric oxide. When the endothelial lining is compromised, the homeostatic surveillance system is disturbed and platelet activation and the coagulation system are initiated. Tissue factor exposure in the damaged area of the vessel leads to activation of the coagulation cascade. Collagen that is present in the area of the wound is also exposed and can activate platelets, which provide the phospholipid surface upon which the coagulation cascade occurs. Platelets initially tether to the exposed collagen through binding of glycoprotein Ib-V-IX in association with von Willebrand factor [25].The thrombus is initiated as more platelets are recruited to exposed collagen of the injured endothelium through aggregation in response to the binding of GPIIIb/IIa with fibrinogen. This process is self-perpetuating as these activated platelets release additional proteins such as adenosine diphosphate (ADP), serotonin, and thromboxane A2, all of which fuel the recruitment and activation of additional platelets [26].

Diagnosis

The key to decreasing the morbidity and mortality associated with VTE is timely diagnosis and early initiation of therapy. Various imaging modalities can be employed to support a diagnosis of a VTE and are used based on clinical suspicion arising from the presence of signs and symptoms. DVT is usually associated with pain in calf or thigh, unilateral swelling, tenderness, and redness. PE can present as chest pain, shortness of breath, syncope, hemoptysis, and/or cardiac palpitations.

Decision Rules

Clinical decision rules based on signs, symptoms, and risk factors have been developed to estimate the pretest probability of PE or DVT and to help determine which patients warrant further testing. These clinical decision rules include the Wells criteria (separate rules for DVT and PE) [27,28],as well as the Geneva score [29],which is focused on identifying patients with a likelihood of having a PE. In general, these clinical rules are applied at presentation to predict the risk of VTE, and patients who score high are evaluated by imaging modalities, while those with lower scores should be considered for further stratification based on D-dimer testing. The goal of clinical assessment and use of a decision rule is to identify patients at low risk of VTE to reduce the number of imaging studies performed. Most of the decision rules focus on the use of noninvasive evaluations that are easily implemented, including clinical history and presentation, abnormalities in oxygen saturation, chest radiography findings, and electro-cardiography.

D-Dimer Testing

D-dimer testing is at the core of all predictive models for VTE. D-dimer is a fibrin degradation product that is detectable in the blood during active fibrinolysis and occurs after clot formation. The concentration of D-dimer increases in patients with active clot. D-dimer testing is usually performed as a quantitative ELISA or automated turbidometric assay and is highly sensitive (> 95%) in excluding a diagnosis of VTE if results are in the normal range [30].The presence of a normal D-dimer and a low probability based on clinical assessment criteria can be integrated to determine which patients have a low (generally < 99%) likelihood of having VTE [31].It should be noted that other factors can lead to an increased D-dimer, including malignancy, trauma, critical illness, disseminated intravascular coagulation, pregnancy, infection, and postoperative status, which can produce false-positive results and cloud the utility of the test in excluding those at low risk of VTE from undergoing imaging [32–34].Additionally, D-dimer values naturally increase with age and recent work has shown utility of an age-adjusted D-dimer threshold, though this method is not yet widespread in clinical practice [35,36].

Imaging

After application of a clinical prediction rule, the mainstay of diagnosis of VTE is imaging. For DVT the use of ultrasonography is considered the gold standard, with both high sensitivity (89–100%) and specificity (86–100%), especially when the DVT is located proximally [37–39].We generally recommend compression ultrasound starting with the proximal veins but expanding to include the whole leg if the proximal studies are negative [40–42].Other diagnostic options include computed tomography (CT) venography, which is not first line as it is highly invasive and exposes the patient to iodine-based contrast dyes, and magnetic resonance venography (MRV), which offers superb visualization for diagnosis of pelvic vein thrombosis but is limited because of availability and cost issues.

Helical CT pulmonary angiography (CTPA) is the diagnostic test of choice in PE, with high sensitivity (96%) and specificity (95%), and has replaced conventional ventilation perfusion (VQ) scanning or other methods such as magnetic resonance pulmonary angiography in most settings [43,44].CTPA should be avoided in patients who have severe chronic kidney disease or a contrast allergy, and is often avoided in patients who are pregnant due to potential risk of radiation exposure, and in such situations VQ scanning may be employed.

Algorithmic Approach to Workup

Our general practice is to apply the Wells clinical prediction rule (Table 2 for DVT and Table 3 for PE), as this system is likely the most familiar to a large number of clinicians and a score can be obtained promptly but accurately based on easily accessible data from history and exam. We generally use the simplified modified criteria presented in the Tables. Once the clinical prediction rule has been applied, we use 2 risk-based algorithms for further evaluation (Figure 1 and Figure 2) [45,46]. In general, we initially perform a D-dimer test for low-risk patients, while we advocate for prompt imaging in high-risk patients to avoid delays in treatment should VTE be diagnosed. Once a diagnosis of VTE is established, treatment should be started promptly. One exception may be isolated 
distal DVT, where it is reasonable to defer treatment in favor of serial ultrasound testing to rule to rule out proximal extension unless the patient is significantly symptomatic with the distal DVT alone [40].

Of note, there are multiple clinical situations in which the application of a clinical prediction rule followed by D-dimer testing and/or imaging cannot be “standardized” with such algorithms. These include situations where D-dimer may be falsely positive (as above), situations in which alternative imaging strategies should be used to avoid contrast exposure in workup of PE (as above), and workup of suspected upper extremity DVT. Upper extremity ultrasound comprises about 10% of all DVT and frequently occurs in the setting of risk factors such as central venous catheters or pacemakers; specific upper-extremity risk-assessment rules have been developed [47,48].

 D-dimer is generally not as useful in workup of upper extremity DVT (given high prevalence of factors that lead to false-positive DVT) and we generally perform compression ultrasonography up front in patients in whom we have high clinical suspicion for upper extremity DVT. In all such clinical situations above, workup should be individualized in accordance with patient factors and careful physician assessment.

Acute Treatment Options

The first step in treatment is identification of patients who are at high risk of 

VTE-related mortality, especially those with PE and hemodynamic instability (defined as systolic blood pressure < 90 mm Hg or a drop in pressure more than 40 mm Hg for more than 15 minutes in the absence of new-onset arrhythmia, hypovolemia, and sepsis). This patient population should be considered for emergent management with thrombolytic therapy, typically recombinant tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA, alteplase). Thrombolysis should be reserved for those who have not had any surgical procedures in the last 2 weeks, have no evidence of neurosurgical bleeding, and are not at risk of a bleeding diathesis. Patients who present without frank hemodynamic instability but have evidence of right ventricular dysfunction (by echocardiography or biomarkers such as troponin elevation) may be at “intermediate risk” for adverse outcomes and the role of thrombolytics in this population is an area of active investigation [49,50].

In standard cases of DVT and PE without hemodynamic compromise, the current standard of care is to initiate parenteral anticoagulation. The immediate goal of therapy is to treat rapidly with anticoagulants to prevent the thrombus from propagating further and to prevent DVT from embolization to the lungs or other vascular beds. The initial treatment of VTE has been extensively discussed and guidelines have been established with recommendations for initiation of anticoagulation; the American College of Chest Physicians (ACCP) released the 9th edition of their guidelines in 2012 based on consensus agreements derived from primary data [51].

Heparin-based drugs are the mainstay of initial treatment. These drugs act by potentiating antithrombin and therefore inactivating thrombin and other coagulation factors such as Xa. Unfractionated heparin (UFH) can be administered as an initial bolus followed by a continuous infusion with dosing being based on weight and titrated to activated partial thromboplastin time (aPTT) or the anti-factor Xa level. Alternatively, patients may be treated with a low molecular weight heparin (LMWH) administered subcutaneously in fixed weight-adjusted doses, which obviates the need for monitoring in most cases [52].LMWHs work in a similar manner to UFH but have more anti-Xa activity in comparison to anti-thrombin activity. LMWH appears to be more effective than UFH for initial treatment of VTE and has been associated with lower risk of major hemorrhage [53].The options for treatment of VTE have expanded in recent years with the approval of fondparinux, a pentasaccharide specifically targeted to inhibit factor Xa. Fondaparinux has been shown to have similar efficacy to LMWH in patients with DVT [54],and while it has not been evaluated directly against LMWH for initial treatment of PE it has been shown to be at least as effective and safe as UFH [55].

Both LMWH and fondaparinux are cleared renally and therefore have increased bleeding risk in patients with renal impairment. In patients with creatinine clearance of less than 30 mL/min, dose reduction or lengthening of dosing interval may be appropriate. Anti-factor Xa activity can be used as a functional assay to monitor and titrate the level of anticoagulation in patients treated with UFH, LMWH, and fondaparinux. Monitoring is useful in the setting of impaired renal function (as above) in addition to extremes of body weight and pregnancy. When used for monitoring of UFH, the anti-factor Xa activity can be measured at any time during administration with a therapeutic goal range of 0.3–0.7 international units (IU)/mL. When used for LMWH, a “peak” anti-factor Xa should be measured approximately 4 hours after dosing, with therapeutic goals depending on preparation and schedule of treatment but generally between 0.6 to 1.0 IU/mL for twice daily and around 1.0 -2.0 IU/mL for once-daily [56].For patients on dialysis, we generally use intravenous UFH for acute treatment of VTE, though recent work has shown that enoxaparin (doses of 0.4 to 1 mg/kg/day) was as safe as UFH with respect to bleeding and was associated with shorter hospital length of stay [57].For long-term treatment of VTE, warfarin is generally preferred based on clinical experience with this agent, though small studies have suggested that parenteral agents may be useful alternatives to warfarin [58].

In many patients who are clinically stable without significant medical comorbidities, outpatient administration of these medications without hospitalization is considered safe. Patients with DVT are often safe to manage as outpatients unless significant clot burden is present and thrombolysis is being considered. For PE, the pulmonary embolism severity index (PESI) and simplified index (sPESI) may be useful to risk-stratify patients and identify those at low risk of complications who may be suitable for outpatient treatment [59,60].Studies have shown that hemodynamically stable patients who did not require supplemental oxygenation or have contraindications to LMWH therapy were safely managed as outpatients with low risk of recurrent VTE and bleeding [61,62].One exception may be patients with intermediate risk PE, who are hemodynamically stable but have evidence of right ventricular dysfunction and may be better served by an initial in-hospital observation period, especially if thrombolysis is being considered.

Most patients who present with VTE are transitioned to warfarin for long-term therapy. Warfarin can be started on the same day as parenteral anticoagulation. Both drugs are overlapped for at least 5 days, with a target INR of 2.0–3.0. Patients may achieve the target INR level quickly because factor VII has a short half-life and the level drops quickly; however, the overlap of 5 days is essential even when the INR is in the target range because a full anticoagulant affect is not achieved until prothrombin levels decline, and this is a slow process due to the long half-life of prothrombin. Warfarin also causes rapid decrease in levels of natural anticoagulants such as protein C and protein S, which further exacerbates the net hypercoagulable state in the short-term. Warfarin without a bridging parenteral agent carries a risk of warfarin-induced skin necrosis [63]and is not effective as an initial anticoagulant treatment in acute VTE as there is a relatively high risk of symptomatic clot extension or recurrent VTE compared to warfarin with use of a bridging agent [64].In specific cases such as cancer-associated VTE (see discussion below), LMWH is preferred to warfarin for long-term active therapy.

Long-Term Active Therapy After Acute Treatment

Duration of Anticoagulation

Recommended duration of anticoagulation depends on a myriad of factors including severity of VTE, risk of recurrence, bleeding risk, and lifestyle modification issues, as well as on the safety and availability of alternative therapies such as low-intensity warfarin, aspirin, or the new oral anticoagulants. The decision tree for length of treatment starts with whether the VTE was a provoked or a spontaneous event. Provoked events occur when the event is associated with an identifiable risk factor, such as immobilization from prolonged medical illness or surgical intervention, pregnancy or oral contraceptive use, and prolonged air travel.

Consensus guidelines suggest that 3 months of anti-coagulation are generally sufficient treatment for a provoked VTE [51,65,66]. Data from multiple studies and a meta-analysis suggests that less than 3 months of anticoagulation (4 to 6 weeks in most trials) is associated with an approximately 1.5-fold higher risk of recurrent VTE than 3 months [67,68].However, data from this meta-analysis also suggests that anticoagulation for longer than 3 months (6 to 12 months in most trials) is not associated with higher rates of recurrent VTE. We generally anticoagulate for 3 months in patients with provoked VTE.

Determining the duration of anticoagulation is more complex in patients with idiopathic/unprovoked VTE. Kearon and colleagues found that in patients with first idiopathic VTE, patients who were anticoagulated for 24 months versus 3 months had lower risk of recurrent VTE (1.3% per patient-year with 24 months versus 27.4% per patient-year with 3 months) [69].Similar studies and meta-analyses have demonstrated decreased recurrence rates in patients anticoagulated for a prolonged period of time. However, one study of prolonged anticoagulation revealed that at 3 years there was no difference in recurrence rate in patients with PE who were anticoagulated for 6 months versus 1 year [70].The likelihood of recurrent DVT in patients with first episode of idiopathic proximal DVT treated with either 3 months or 12 months of warfarin was similar after treatment was discontinued [71].Prolonged periods of anticoagulation do not directly influence risk of recurrence but instead may only delay occurrence of a second event [72].For that reason, the decision is essentially whether to anticoagulate for 3 months or to continue therapy indefinitely [73]. Current guidelines recommend continuing anticoagulation for 3 months in those at high risk of bleeding, and continuing for an extended duration in those at low or moderate bleeding risk [51]. Patients' values and perferences should be entertained and decisions made on a patient-by-patient basis.

For patients at high risk of recurrent VTE, we generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation unless the patient has a significantly elevated bleeding risk or strongly prefers to discontinue anticoagulation and compliance concerns are evident. High-risk patients are those who have suffered from multiple episodes of recurrent VTE, those who have clotted while being anticoagulated, and those with acquired risk factors, such as antiphospholipid antibodies and malignancy. Other high-risk groups are those with high-risk thrombophilias such as deficiency of protein S, protein C, or antithrombin, homozygous factor V Leiden or prothrombin gene mutations, and compound heterozygous factor V Leiden/prothrombin gene mutation in the setting of an unprovoked event. Further discussion of models for risk assessment of recurrence is provided below.

Assessment of Bleeding Risk

The bleeding risk associated with the use of anticoagulation must be weighed against the risk of clotting events when determining duration of anticoagulation, especially in those patients for whom indefinite anticoagulation is a consideration. Risk of bleeding while on anticoagulation is approximately 1–3% per 100 patient-years [74],but concomitant medical conditions such as renal failure, diabetes-related cerebrovascular disease, malignancy, advanced age, and use of antiplatelet agents all increase the risk of bleeding. Bleeding risk is highest when patients first initiate anticoagulation and is approximately 10 times the risk in the first month of therapy than after the first year of therapy [75].

Risk assessment models such as the RIETE score may be helpful when indefinite anticoagulation is a possibility [76].The RIETE score encompasses 6 risk factors (age > 75 years, recent bleeding, cancer, creatinine level > 1.2 mg/dL, anemia, or PE at baseline) to categorize patients into low risk (0 points, 0.3% risk of bleeding), intermediate risk (1–4 points, 2.6% risk of bleeding) and high risk (> 4 points, 6.2% risk of bleeding) within 3 months of anticoagulant therapy. The ACCP has developed a more extensive list of 17 potential risk factors for bleeding to categorize patients into low risk (no risk factors, 0.8%/year risk of bleeding), intermediate risk (1 risk factor, 1.6%/year risk of bleeding) and high risk (2 or more risk factors, >6.5%/year risk of bleeding) categories [77].The RIETE score is simpler to use but was not developed for assessing risk of bleeding during indefinite therapy, while the ACCP risk categorization predicts a yearly risk and is therefore applicable for long-term risk assessment but is more cumbersome to use. In practice, we generally use a clinical gestalt of a patient’s clinical risk factors (particularly age, renal or hepatic dysfunction, and frequent falls) to assess if they may be at high risk of bleeding and if the risk of indefinite anticoagulation may thus outweigh the potential benefit.

We also note that several scoring systems (HAS-BLED, HEMORR2HAGES, and ATRIA scores) have been developed to predict those at high risk of bleeding on anticoagulation for atrial fibrillation [78–80].These scores generally include similar clinical risk factors to those in the RIETE and ACCP scoring systems. Several studies have compared the HAS-BLED, HEMORR2HAGES, and ATRIA scores and a systematic review and meta-analysis concluded that the HAS-BLED score is recommended, due to increased sensitivity and ease of application [81].However, as these scores have not been validated for anticoagulation in the setting of VTE, we do not use them in this capacity.

Risk Stratification for Recurrent VTE

When predicting risk of recurrent VTE, clinical risk factors including obesity, male gender, and underlying thrombophilia (including the “high risk” inherited thrombophilias identified above) must taken into consideration. Location of the thrombus must also be considered; it has also been demonstrated that patients with DVT involving the iliofemoral veins are at higher risk of recurrence than those without iliac involvement [82].Other factors that may be useful in risk stratification include D-dimer level and ultrasound to search for residual venous thrombosis.

D-dimer Levels

D-dimer levels are one of the more promising methods for assessing the risk of recurrent VTE after cessation of anticoagulation, especially in the case of idiopathic VTE where indefinite anticoagulation should be considered but may pose either risk of bleeding or significant inconvenience to patients. A normal D-dimer measured 1 month after cessation of anticoagulation offers a high negative predictive value for risk of recurrence [83].A number of studies have demonstrated that patients with elevated D-dimer 1 month after anticoagulation cessation are at increased risk for a recurrent event [84–86].Two predictive models that have been developed incorporate D-dimer testing into decision making [87,88].The DASH predictive model relies on the D-dimer result in addition to age, male sex, and use of hormone therapy as a method of risk stratification for recurrent VTE in patients with a first unprovoked event. Using this scoring system, patients with a score of 0 or 1 had a recurrence rate of 3.1%, those with a score of 2 a recurrence rate of 6.4%, and those with a score of 3 or greater a recurrence rate of 12.3%. The authors postulate that by using this assessment scheme they can avoid lifelong anticoagulation in 51% of patients. The Vienna prediction model uses male sex, location of VTE (proximal DVT and PE are at higher risk), and D-dimer level to predict risk of recurrent VTE. This model has recently been updated to include a “dynamic” component to predict risk of recurrence of VTE from multiple random time points [89].

Overall, D-dimer may be useful for risk stratification. We often employ the method of stopping anticoagulation in patients with unprovoked VTE after 3 months (if the patient has no identifiable clinical risk factors that place them at high risk of recurrence) and testing D-dimer 1 month after cessation of anticoagulation. An elevated D-dimer is a solid reason to restart anticoagulation (potentially on an indefinite basis), while a negative D-dimer provides support for withholding further anticoagulation in the absence of other significant risk factors for recurrence. However, lack of agreement regarding assay cut-points as well as multiple reasons other than VTE for D-dimer elevation may limit widespread use of this method. We generally use a cutpoint of 250 ug/L as “negative,” though at least one study showed that cut-points of 250 ug/L versus 500 ug/L did not change the utility of this method [90].In our practice, risk prediction models are most useful to provide patients with additional information and a visual presentation to support our recommendation. This is particularly true of the Vienna prediction rule, which is available in a printable nomogram which can be distributed to patients and completed together during the clinic visit.

Imaging Analysis

Imaging analysis may also assist with risk stratification. Clinical assessment modules have been developed that incorporate repeat imaging studies for assessment of recannulization of affected veins. In patients with residual vein thrombosis (RVT) at the time anticoagulation was stopped, the hazard ratio for recurrence was 2.4 compared to those without RVT [91].There are a number of ways RVT could impact recurrence, including inpaired venous flow leading to stasis and activation of the coagulation cascade. Subsequent studies used serial ultrasound to determine when to stop anticoagulation. In one study, patients were anticoagulated for 3 months and for those that had RVT, anticoagulation was continued for up to 9 months for provoked and 21 months for unprovoked VTE. In comparison to fixed dosing of 6 months of anti-coagulation, those who had their length of anticoagulation tailored to ultrasonography findings had a lower rate of recurrent VTE [92].Limitations to using RVT in clinical decision-making include lack of a standard definition of RVT and variability in both timing of ultrasound (operator variability) and interpretation of results [93].

Other Options

Another option in patients who are being considered for indefinite anticoagulation is to decrease the intensity of anticoagulation. Since this would theoretically lower the risk of bleeding, the perceived benefit of long-term, low-intensity anticoagulation would be reduction in both bleeding and clotting risk. The PREVENT trial randomized patients who had received full-dose anticoagulation for a median of 6.5 months to either low-intensity warfarin (INR goal of 1.5-2.0 instead of 2.0-3.0) or placebo. In the anticoagulation group, there was a 64% risk reduction in recurrent VTE (hazard ratio 0.36, 95% CI 0.19 to 0.67) but an increased risk of bleeding (hazard ratio 1.92, 95% CI 1.26 to 2.93) [94].The ELATE study randomized patients with unprovoked VTE who had completed 3 or more months of full-intensity warfarin therapy (target INR 2.0–3.0) to continue therapy with either low-intensity warfarin (target INR 1.5–2.0) or full-intensity warfarin (target INR 2.0-3.0). Compared to the low-intensity group, the conventional-intensity group had lower rates of recurrent VTE and no increased rates of major bleeding [95].This study, however, has been criticized because of its overall low bleeding rate in both treatment groups.

Aspirin is an option in patients in whom long-term anticoagulation is untenable. The ASPIRE trial demonstrated that in patients with unprovoked VTE who had completed a course of initial anticoagulation, aspirin 100 mg daily reduced the risk of major vascular events compared to placebo with no increase in bleeding [96].However, aspirin was not associated with a significant reduction in risk of VTE alone (only the composite vascular event endpoint). The WARFASA trial, however, demonstrated that aspirin 100 mg daily was associated with a significant reduction in recurrent VTE compared to placebo after 6 to 18 months of anticoagulation without an increase in major bleeding [97].The absolute risk of recurrence was 11% in the placebo group and 5.9% in the aspirin group. More recently, the INSPIRE collaboration analyzed data from both trials and found that aspirin after initial anticoagulation reduced the risk of recurrent VTE by approximately 42% with a low rate of major bleeding [98].The absolute risk reduction was even larger in men and older patients. For this reason, we recommend aspirin to those patients in whom indefinite anticoagulation may be warranted from the standpoint of reducing risk of recurrent VTE but in whom the risk of bleeding precludes its use.

Hypercoagulable States In Specific Populations

Inherited Thrombophilias

Patients with a hereditary thrombophilia are at increased risk for incident VTE [99].These inherited mutations result in either a loss of normal anticoagulant function or gain of a prothrombotic state. Hereditary disorders associated with VTE include deficiency of antithrombin, protein C, or protein S, or the presence of factor V Leiden and/or prothrombin G20210A mutations. Although deficiency of protein C, protein S, or antithrombin is uncommon and affects only 0.5% of the population, these states have been associated with a 10-fold increased risk of thrombosis in comparison to the general population. Factor V Leiden and prothrombin gene mutation are less likely to be associated with incident thrombosis (2 to 5-fold increased risk of VTE) and are more prevalent in the Caucasian population [100].Though these hereditary thrombophilias increase risk of VTE, prophylactic anti-coagulation prior to a first VTE is not generally indicated.

Data regarding the impact of the inherited thrombophilias on risk of recurrent VTE is less well defined. While some data suggest that inherited thrombophilias are associated with increased risk of recurrent VTE, the degree of impact may be clinically modest especially in those with heterozygous factor V Leiden or prothrombin gene mutations [101].Ideally, a clinical trial would be designed to assess whether hereditary thrombophilia testing is beneficial for patients with VTE in decision-making regarding length of anticoagulation, type of anticoagulation, and risk of recurrence. If a patient with a low-risk inherited thrombophilia has a DVT in the setting of an additional provoking risk factor (surgery, pregnancy, etc), a 3-month course of anticoagulation followed by D-dimer assessment as above is reasonable. If a patient with an inherited thrombophilia experiences an idiopathic VTE, or if a patient with a “high-risk” thrombophilia as described above experiences any type of VTE, we generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation in the absence of high bleeding risk, though again this is a very patient-dependent choice.

Acquired Thrombophilias

Antiphospholipid Syndrome

Antibodies directed against proteins that bind phospho-lipids are associated with an acquired hypercoagulable state. The autoantibodies are categorized as antiphospho-lipid antibodies (APLAs), which include anticardiolipin antibodies (IgG and IgM), beta-2 glycoprotein 1 antibodies (anti-B2 GP), and lupus anticoagulant. These antibodies can form autonomously, as seen in primary disorders, or in association with autoimmune disease as a secondary disorder.

Criteria have been developed to distinguish antiphospholipid-associated clotting disorders from other forms of thrombophilia. The updated Sapporo criteria depend on both laboratory and clinical diagnostic criteria [102].The laboratory diagnosis of APLAs requires the presence of lupus anticoagulants, anticardiolipin antibodies, or anti-B2 GP on at least 2 assays at least 12 weeks apart with elevation above the 99th percentile of the testing laboratory’s normal distribution [103].Testing for lupus anticoagulant is based on 3 stages, the first of which is inhibition of phospholipid-dependent coagulation tests with prolonged clotting time (eg, aPTT or dilute Russell’s viper venom time). The diagnosis is confirmed by a secondary test in which excess hexagonal phase phospholipids are added to incubate with the patient’s plasma to absorb the APLA [104].The presence of anticardiolipin antibodies and anti beta-2 GP antibodies is determined using ELISA based immunoassays. Unlike most other thrombophilias, antiphospholipid syndrome is associated with both arterial and venous thromboembolic events and may be an indication for lifelong anticoagulation after a first thrombotic event. We generally recommend indefinite anticoagulation in the absence of significant bleeding risk.

Cancer-Associated Hypercoagulable State

Patients with cancer have a propensity for thromboembolic events. The underlying mechanisms responsible for cancer-associated clotting events are multifactorial and an area of intense research. Tumor cells can initiate activation of the clotting cascade through release of tissue factor and other pro-coagulant molecules [105].Type and stage of cancer impact risk of VTE, and the tumor itself can compress vasculature leading to venous stasis. Furthermore, chemotherapy, hormone therapy, antiangiogenic drugs, erythropoietin agents, and indwelling central venous catheters all are associated with increased risk of thrombotic events. Approximately 25% of all cancer patients will experience a thrombotic event during the course of their disease [106]. In fact, the presence of a spontaneous clot may be a harbinger of underlying malignancy [107].Approximately 10% of patients who present with an idiopathic VTE are diagnosed with cancer in the next 1 to 2 years.

The utility of extensive cancer screening in patients with spontaneous clotting events is often debated. The small studies that have addressed cancer associated clots have not demonstrated any mortality benefit with extensive screening. A prospective cohort study addressed the utility of limited versus extensive screening [108].In this study, all patients underwent a series of basic screening tests such as history taking, physical examination, chest radiograph, and basic laboratory parameters. Approximately half of the patients underwent additional testing (CT of chest and abdomen and mammography for women). Screening did not result in increased survival or fewer cancer-related deaths. 3.5 % of patients in the extensive screening group were diagnosed with malignancy in comparison to 2.4% in the limited screening group. During follow-up, cancer was diagnosed in 3.7% and 5.0% in the extensive and limited screening groups, respectively. The authors concluded that the low yield of extensive screening and lack of survival benefit did not warrant routinely ordering cancer screening tests above and beyond age-appropriate screening in patients with idiopathic VTE. However, it is known that identification of occult malignancy at an earlier stage of disease is beneficial, and cancer diagnosed within one year of an episode of VTE is generally more advanced and associated with a poorer prognosis [109].It is our practice to take a through history from patients with unprovoked clots particularly focusing on symptoms suggestive of an underlying cancer. We recommend that patients be up to date with all age-appropriate cancer screening.

Heparin-based products (rather than warfarin) are recommended for long-term treatment of cancer-associated DVT. Several trials, most prominently the CLOT trial, have demonstrated that LMWH is associated with reduced risk of recurrent VTE compared with warfarin in cancer patients [110].Fondaparinux may be a reasonable alternative if a patient is unable to tolerate a LMWH. In terms of treatment duration, patients with cancer-associated VTE should be anticoagulated indefinitely as long as they continue to have evidence of active malignancy and/or remain on antineoplastic treatment [111].

Heparin has potential anticancer effects beyond its anticoagulation properties. It is believed that heparin use in patients with cancer can influence cancer progression by acting as an antimetastatic agent. The molecular mechanisms underlying this significant observation are not completely understood, although the first documented benefit of these drugs dates back to the 1970s [112].Overall, LMWH have been associated with improved overall survival in cancer patients and this effect appears to be distinct from its ability to prevent life-threatening VTE episodes [113].

Estrogen-Related Thromboembolic Disease

Pregnancy is a well-established acquired hypercoagulable state, and thromboembolic disease accounts for significant morbidity and mortality in pregnancy and the postpartum period. Approximately 1 in 1000 women will suffer from a thrombotic event during pregnancy or shortly after delivery [8]. The etiology of the tendency to clot during pregnancy is multifactorial and mainly reflects venous stasis due to vasculature compression by the uterus, changes in coagulation factors as the pregnancy progresses, and endothelial damage during delivery, especially Cesarean section. Both factor VIII and von Willebrand factor levels increase, especially in the final months of pregnancy. Simultaneously, levels of the natural anticoagulant protein S diminish, leading to an acquired resistance to activated protein C which results in increased thrombin generation and therefore a hypercoagulable state [114].The risk of thrombosis in pregnancy is clearly heightened in women with inherited thrombophilias, especially in the postpartum period [115].

Similarly to pregnancy, hormone-based contraceptive agents and estrogen replacement therapies are also associated with increased thrombotic risk. Over the years, drug manufacturers have tried to mitigate the clotting risk associated with these drugs by reducing the amount of estrogen and altering the type of progesterone used, yet a risk still remains, resulting in a VTE incidence 2 to 7 times higher in this population [116].The risk is highest in the first 4 months of use and is unaffected by duration of use; risk extends for 3 months after cessation of estrogen-containing therapy. Patients who develop VTE while taking an oral contraceptive are generally instructed to stop the contraceptive and consider an alternative form of birth control. Although routine screening for thrombophilia is not offered to women before prescribing oral contraceptives, a thorough personal and family history regarding venous and arterial thrombotic events as well as recurrent pregnancy loss in women should be taken to evaluate thromboembolic risk factors. We generally avoid use of oral contraceptives in patients with a known hereditary thrombophilia, and consider screening prior to initiation of therapy in those with a strong family history of VTE.

Superficial VTE

Although the main disorders that comprise VTE are DVT and PE, another common presentation is superficial venous thromboembolism (SVT). The risk factors for developing an SVT are similar to those for DVT. In addition, varicose veins also increase the incidence of developing SVT [117].SVT is not associated with excessive mortality, and the main concern with it is progression to DVT. About 25% of patients diagnosed with SVT may have DVT or PE at the time of diagnosis and about 3% without DVT or PE at time of diagnosis developed one of these complications over the following 3 months; clot propagation is another common complication [118].Ultrasound may be of utility in diagnosing occult DVT in patients who initially diagnosed with SVT [119].

For patients who have only SVT at baseline without concomitant DVT or PE, it is difficult to determine which patients are at risk for developing DVT. Some risk stratification models include clot location. Since SVT clots usually develop in the saphenous vein, the clot would need to either progress from the sapheno-femoral junction to the common femoral vein; thus, any clots located near the sapheno-femoral junction are at risk of progressing into the deep vasculature [120].Clots within 3 cm of the junction may be more likely to progress to DVT [121].Chengelis and colleagues feel that proximal saphenous vein thrombosis should likely be treated with anticoagulation [122].Others have taken a more general approach, stating that all clots above the knee or in the thigh area should be treated aggressively [123].

There are solid data for the use of anticoagulation in SVT. In the STEFLUX (Superficial ThromboEmbolism and Fluxum) study, participants received the LMWH parnaparin at one of 3 doses: 8500 IU once daily for 10 days followed by placebo for 20 days, 8500 IU once daily for 10 days and then 6400 IU once daily for 20 days, or 4250 IU once daily for 30 days. Those who received the intermediate dosing had lower rates of DVT, PE, and relapse/SVT recurrence in the first 33 days [124].In the CALISTO trial, fondaparinux 2.5mg per day for 45 days effectively reduced the risk of symptomatic DVT, PE, or SVT recurrence or extension and was not associated with any increased major bleeding compared to placebo [125].A Cochrane review included 30 studies involving over 6500 participants with SVT of the lower extremities. The treatments used in these studies included fondaparinux, LMWH, UFH, non-steriodal anti-inflammatory agents, topical treatment, and surgery. According to the findings, use of fondaparinux at prophylactic dosing for 6 weeks is considered a valid therapeutic option for SVT [126].It is our practice to consider the use of anticoagulants (generally LMWH or fondaparinux) as part of the treatment regimen for SVT.

Target-Specific Oral Anticoagulants And Treatment of VTE

Because of warfarin’s narrow therapeutic window, need for frequent monitoring, significant drug and food interactions, and unfavorable kinetics, the target-specific oral anticoagulants (TSOACs) have been developed with the aim of offering alternatives to warfarin therapy (Figure 3). These drugs have been developed to inhibit either thrombin or factor Xa to disrupt the coagulation cascade. Since these drugs bind directly to coagulation factor, they are associated with rapid onset of action, a wide therapeutic window, fewer drug interactions than warfarin, and predictable dose-response allowing for fixed dosing without lab monitoring.

The direct thrombin inhibitor dabigatran directly binds to thrombin in a concentration-dependent manner [127].Peak plasma concentration is achieved within 0.5 to 2.0 hours after ingestion, and its half-life is 12 to 17 hours. Use of dabigatran in both primary and secondary prevention of VTE has been extensively studied, especially in orthopedic surgery where there have been 4 main trials (RE-MOBILIZE, RE-MODEL, RE-NOVATE, and RE-NOVATE I and II). While RE-MOBILIZE showed that dabigatran 220 mg or 150 mg once daily was inferior to enoxaparin 30 mg twice daily in preventing VTE after total knee arthroplasty, RE-MODEL and RE-NOVATE I and II demonstrated that dabigatran 150 mg or 220 mg once daily was noninferior to enoxaparin 40 mg once daily for prevention of VTE in patients undergoing total knee replacement and hip replacement [128–131].The side effect profile was also promising, with no significant differences in the frequency of major bleeding between dabigatran and enoxaparin. Pooled data and meta-analyses from these trials have demonstrated that for prevention of VTE associated with hip or knee surgery, dabigatran 220 mg or 150 mg once daily is as effective as 40 mg of enoxaparin given daily or 30 mg given twice a day, with a similar bleeding profile [132,133].

More recently, dabigatran been used in the acute treatment and secondary prevention of VTE. In the RE-COVER trial, dabigatran 150 mg twice daily was compared to warfarin (INR 2–3) in the treatment of acute VTE for 6 months, after an initial treatment period of up to 9 days with LMWH or UFH. Dabigatran was noninferior to warfarin with respect to 6-month incidence of recurrent symptomatic objectively confirmed VTE and related deaths, and was not associated with increased bleeding [134].In the RE-MEDY and RE-SONATE trials of extended anticoagulation, dabigatran was as effective as warfarin for prevention of recurrent VTE when continued after 3 months of initial anticoagulation and associated with less bleeding, and was more effective than placebo in preventing recurrent VTE but associated with a higher risk of bleeding [135].Unexpectedly, the risk of acute coronary syndrome was slightly higher in the dabigatran group than the warfarin group, as seen in other studies.

Rivaroxaban, a TSOAC that targets factor Xa, has also shown efficacy in preventing VTE after knee or hip surgery. The RE-CORD 1-4 studies all focused on the use of rivaroxaban in comparison to enoxaparin and found that rivaroxaban 10 mg once daily was superior to enoxaparin 40 mg once daily in prevention of VTE in total knee and total hip arthroplasty [136–138].Meta-analysis of multiple rivaroxaban VTE prophylaxis trials also demonstrated that rivaroxaban significantly lowered the risk of VTE in these surgical patients in comparison to the use of enoxaparin [139].Prophylactic use of rivaroxaban was also studied in acutely ill hospitalized patients in the MAGELLAN trial. Rivaroxaban 10 mg daily for 35 days was compared to enoxaparin 40 mg daily for 10 days followed by placebo and was found to be noninferior to enoxaparin in reduction of VTE risk at day 10 and superior to placebo at day 35 [140].However, the rate of bleeding, although low in both arms, was higher in the rivaroxaban arm.

Rivaroxaban has been studied in randomized clinical trials for acute treatment of DVT and PE and for extended prophylaxis for recurrent VTE (EINSTEIN-DVT, EINSTEIN-PE and EINSTEIN-Extension, respectively).  The treatment strategy for use of rivaroxaban differed from that of dabigatran (in the RE-COVER trial), as rivaroxaban was used upfront as initial anticoagulation rather than after an initial period of parenteral therapy with LMWH or UFH. In both the DVT and PE trials, rivaroxaban was noninferior to standard treatment with enoxaparin followed by warfarin therapy, with no significant difference in major bleeding at 6 months of treatment [141,142].The extension trial also demonstrated that use of rivaroxaban in comparison to placebo for an additional 6 or 12 months after standard therapy was associated with significantly fewer recurrent VTE [141]. These studies led to FDA approval for rivaroxaban for primary prevention of VTE in patients undergoing elective total hip or knee repair surgery, for treatment of acute DVT or PE, and for extended prophylaxis in patients following initial treatment.

The anti-factor Xa TSOAC apixaban has been studied in similar fashion as rivaroxaban. In the AMPLIFY study, apixaban was given at a dose of 10 mg twice daily for 7 days followed by 5 mg twice daily for 6 months (as monotherapy, without initial parenteral agent) and compared to enoxaparin followed by warfarin for treatment of acute VTE. Apixaban was as effective as warfarin in terms of recurrent symptomatic VTE or VTE-related death, and was associated with significantly fewer bleeding events [143].Extended-duration apixaban given at treatment dose (5 mg twice daily) or at prophylactic dose (2.5 mg twice daily) for 12 months after completion of treatment-dose apixaban for VTE demonstrated superiority to placebo for extended prophylaxis in AMPLIFY-EXT, and there was no increase in major bleeding compared to placebo [144].Apixaban was recently approved by the FDA for both treatment and secondary prophylaxis of VTE.

More recently, a third anti-factor Xa TSOAC edoxaban demonstrated noninferiority to warfarin in prevention of recurrent symptomatic VTE when administered to patients with DVT or PE at 60 mg once daily for 3 to 12 months [145].Edoxaban also led to significantly less bleeding than warfarin. Edoxaban was recently approved by the FDA for treatment of VTE.

These TSOACs show promise in treatment and prevention of VTE but should be used in patients who meet appropriate criteria for renal function, age, and bleeding risk, as there are currently no available antidotes to reverse their effects. If significant bleeding occurs and cannot be controlled by usual maneuvers such as mechanical compression or surgical intervention, there is little data to guide the use of pharmacologic interventions. Plasma dabigatran levels can be reduced through the use of hemodialysis [146].Antibodies capable of neutralizing dabigatran have been developed, and one specific antibody, idarucizumab, was well-tolerated and showed immediate and complete reversal of dabigatran in subjects of different age and renal function [147,148].Andexanet, a modified recombinant derivative of factor Xa with no catalytic activty, acts as a “decoy receptor” with higher affinity to factor Xa inhibitors than natural factor Xa.  Phase II studies in healthy volunteers demonstrated that andexanet immediately reversed the anticoagulation activity of apixaban, rivaroxaban, enoxaparin, and most recently edoxaban without thrombotic consequences [149].Two randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled phase III studies (ANNEXA-A, looking at the reversal of apixaban, and ANNEXA-R, looking at reversal of rivaroxaban) are underway, and preliminary results show that a single intravenous bolus of andexanet demonstrated almost complete reversal [150].Finally, aripazine (PER977), a synthetic small molecule that binds to heparins as well as all TSOACs, was shown in a phase II trial to decrease blood clotting time to within 10% above baseline value in 10 minutes or less with an effect lasting for 24 hours [151].

Some have advocated for use of prothrombin complex concentrate (PCC) or recombinant factor VIIa for reversal of TSOAC-associated bleeding. Rivaroxaban was demonstrated to be partially reversible by PCC, whereas this approach was not as successful for dabigatran in healthy volunteers [152].In vitro evidence, however, showed that PCC did not significantly change aPTT [153].At present, the use of nonspecific hemostatic agents (including recombinant factor VIIa, 4-factor prothrombin complex concentrate, and activated prothrombin complex concentrates) is suggested for reversal of TSOACs in patients who present with life-threatening bleeding [154,155].

Conclusion

Patients with VTE present with a wide range of findings and factors that impact management. Decision making in VTE management is a fluid process that should be re-evaluated as new data emerge and individual circumstances change. There is more focus on VTE prevention and treatment today than there was even a decade ago. Diagnostic algorithms, identification of new risk factors, refinement in understanding of the pathogenesis of thrombosis, and identification of new anticoagulants with more favorable risk-benefit profiles will all ultimately contribute to improved patient care.

 

Corresponding author: Jean M. Connors, MD, Brigham and Women's Hospital, 75 Francis St., Boston, MA 02215.

References

1. White RH. The epidemiology of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003;107(Suppl 1):I4-8.

2. Moster KM and Fedullo PF. The diagnosis of deep-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1994;330:863–4.

3. Kearon C. Natural history of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003;(Suppl 1):122–30.

4. Heijboer H, Brandjes DP, Buller HR, et al. Deficiencies of coagulation-inhibiting and fibrinolytic proteins in outpatients with deep-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1990;323:1512–6.

5. Mateo J, Oliver A, Borrell M, et al. Laboratory evaluation and clinical characteristics of 2,132 consecutive unselected patients with venous thromboembolism—results of the Spanish Multicentric Study on Thrombophilia (EMET-Study). Thromb Haemost 1997;77:441–51.

6. Lyman GH. Venous thromboembolism in the patient with cancer: focus on burden of disease and benefits of thromboprophylaxis. Cancer 2011;117:1334–49.

7. White RH, Zhou H, Romano PS. Incidence of symptomatic venous thromboembolism after different elective or urgent surgical procedures. Thromb Haemost 2003;90:446–55.

8. Marik PE, Plante LA. Venous thromboembolic disease and pregnancy. N Engl J Med 2008;359:2025–33.

9. Ageno W, Becattini C, Brighton T, et al. Cardiovascular risk factors and venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis. Circulation 2008;117:93–102.

10. Mahmoodi BK, Gansevoort RT, Naess IA, et al. Association of mild to moderate chronic kidney disease with venous thromboembolism: pooled analysis of five prospective general population cohorts. Circulation 2012;126:1964–71.

11. Landolfi R, Marchioli R, Patrono C. Mechanisms of bleeding and thrombosis in myeloproliferative disorders. Thromb Haemost 1997;78:617–21.

12. Hillmen P, Lewis SM, Bessler M, et al. Natural history of paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria. N Engl J Med1995;333:1253–8.

13.Grainge MJ, West J, Card TR. Venous thromboembolism during active disease and remission in inflammatory bowel disease: a cohort study. Lancet 2010;375:657–63.

14. Flinterman LE, Van Der Meer FJ, Rosendaal FR, Doggen CJ. Current perspective of venous thrombosis in the upper extremity. J Thromb Haemost 2008;6:1262–6.

15. Kibbe MR, Ujiki M, Goodwin AL, et al. Iliac vein compression in an aymptomatic patient population. J Vasc Surg 2004;39:937–43.

16. Chee YL, Culligan DJ, Watson HG. Inferior vena cava malformation as a risk factor for deep venous thrombosis in the young. Br J Haematol 2001;114:878–80.

17. Stegeman BH, de Bastos M, Rosendaal FR, et al. Different combined oral contraceptives and the risk of venous thrombosis: systematic review and network meta-analysis. BMJ 2013;347:f5298.

18. Cushman M, Kuller LH, Prentice R, et al. Estrogen plus progestin and risk of venous thrombosis. JAMA 2004;292:1573–80.

19. Fisher B, Costantino JP, Wickerham DL, et al. Tamoxifen for prevention of breast cancer: report of the National Surgical Adjuvant Breast and Bowel Project P-1 study. J Natl Cancer Inst 1998;90:1371–88.

20. Glueck CJ, Richardson-Royer C, Schultz R, et al. Testosterone therapy, thrombophilia-hypofibrinolysis, and hospitalization for deep venous thrombosis-pulmonary embolus: an exploratory, hypothesis-generating study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost 2014;20:244–9.

21. Johannesdottir SA, Horvath-Puho E, Dekkers OM, et al. Use of glucocorticoids and risk of venous thromboembolism: a nationwide population-based case-control study. JAMA Intern Med 2013;173:743–52.

22. Spencer FA, Emery C, Lessard D, et al. The Worcester Venous Thromboembolism study: a population-based study of the clinical epidemiology of venous thromboembolism. J Gen Intern Med 2006;21:722–7.

23. Ocak G, Vossen CY, Verduijn M, et al. Risk of venous thrombosis in patients with major illnesses: results from the MEGA study. J Thromb Haemost 2013;11:116-23.

24. Anderson FA Jr, Spencer FA. Risk factors for venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003; 107 (Suppl 1): I9–16.

25. Clemetson KJ. Platelet GPIb-V-IX complex. Thromb Haemost 1997;78:266–70.

26. Kroll MH, Schafer AI. Biochemical mechanisms of platelet activation. Blood 1989;74:1181–95.

27. Wells PS, Anderson DR, Bormanis J, et al. Value of assessment of pretest probability of deep-vein thrombosis in clinical management. Lancet 1997;350:1795–8.

28. Wells PS, Anderson DR, Rodger M, et al. Derivation of a simple clinical model to categorize patients’ probability of pulmonary embolism: increasing the model’s utility with the SimpliRED D-dimer. Thromb Haemost 2000;416–20.

29. Le Gal G, Righini M, Roy PM, et al. Prediction of pulmonary embolism in the emergency department: the revised Geneva score. Ann Intern Med 2006; 144:165–71.

30. Stein PD, Hull RD, Patel KC, et al. D-dimer for the exclusion of acute venous thrombosis and pulmonary embolism: a systematic review. Ann Intern Med 2004;140:589–602.

31. Pasha SM, Klok FA, Snoep JD, et al. Safety of excluding acute pulmonary embolism based on an unlikely clinical probability by the Wells rule and normal D-dimer concentration: a meta-analysis. Thromb Res 2010;125:e123–27.

32. Crowther MA, Cook DJ, Griffith LE, et al. Neither baseline tests of molecular hypercoagulability nor D-dimer levels predict deep venous thrombosis in critically ill medical-surgical patients. Intensive Care Med 2005;31:48–55.

33. Karami-Djurabi R, Klok FA, Kooiman J, et al. D-dimer testing in patients with suspected pulmonary embolism and impaired renal function. Am J Med 2009;122:1050–3.

34. Chan WS, Chunilal S, Lee A, et al. A red blood cell agglutination D-dimer test to exclude deep venous thrombosis in pregnancy. Ann Intern Med 2007;147:165–70.

35. Righini M, Goehring C, Bounameaux H, Perrier A. Effects of age on the performance of common diagnostic tests for pulmonary embolism. Am J Med 2000; 109:357–61.

36. Woller SC, Stevens SM, Adams DM, et al. Assessment of the safety and efficiency of using an age-adjusted D-dimer threshold to exclude suspected pulmonary embolism. Chest 2014; 146:1444–51.

37. Zierler BK. Ultrasonography and diagnosis of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2004; 109 (Suppl 1): I9–14.

38. Hirsh J, Lee AY. How we diagnose and treat deep vein thrombosis. Blood 2002;99:3102–10.

39. Tapson VF, Carroll BA, Davidson BL, et al. The diagnostic approach to acute venous thromboembolism. Clinical practice guideline. American Thoracic Society. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1999;160:1043–66.

40. Bates SM, Jaeschke R, Stevens SM, et al. Diagnosis of DVT: Antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012; 141 (2 Suppl): e351S–418S.

41. Pezzullo JA, Perkins AB, Cronan JJ. Symptomatic deep vein thrombosis: diagnosis with limited compression US. Radiology 1996;198:67–70.

42. Frederick MG, Hertzberg BS, Kliewer MA, et al. Can the US examination for lower extremity deep venous thrombosis be abbreviated? A prospective study of 755 examinations Radiology 1996;199:45–7.

43. Remy-Jardin M, Remy J, Deschidre F, et al. Diagnosis of pulmonary embolism with spiral CT: comparison with pulmonary angiography and scintigraphy. Radiology 1996;200:699–706.

44. Stein PD, Fowler SE, Goodman LR, et al. Multidetector computed tomography for acute pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2006;354:2317–27.

45. Goodacre S. In the clinic. Deep venous thrombosis. Ann Intern Med 2008;149:ITC3–1.

46. Agnelli G, Becattini C. Acute pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2010;363:266–74.

47. Kucher N. Clinical practice. Deep-vein thrombosis of the upper extremities. N Engl J Med 2011;364:861–9.

48. Constans J, Salmi LR, Sevestre-Pietri MA, et al. A clinical prediction score for upper extremity deep venous thrombosis. Thromb Haemost 2008;99:202–7.

49. Meyer G, Vicault E, Danasys T, et al. Fibrinolysis for patients with intermediate-risk pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2014;370:1402–11.

50. Kline JA, Nordenholz KE, Courtney DM, et al. Treatment of submassive pulmonary embolism with tenecteplase or placebo: cardiopulmonary outcomes at 3 months: multicenter double-bline, placebo-controlled randomized trial. J Thromb Haemost 2014;12:459–68.

51. Guyatt GH, Akl EA, Crowther M, et al. Executive summary: Antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012;141(2 Suppl):7S–47S.

52. Bounameaux H. Unfractionated versus low-molecular-weight heparin in the treatment of venous thromboembolism. Vasc Med 1998;3:41–6.

53. Erkens PM, Prins MH. Fixed dose subcutaneous low molecular weight heparins versus adjusted dose unfractionated heparin for venous thromboembolism. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2010;9:CD001100.

54. Buller HR, Davidson BL, Decousus H, et al. Fondaprinux or enoxaparin for the initial treatment of symptomatic deep venous thrombosis: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2004;140: 867–73.

55. Buller HR, Davidson BL, Decousus H, et al. Subcutaenous fondaparinux versus intravenous unfractionated heparin in the initial treatment of pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2003;349:1695–702.

56. Bates SM, Weitz JI. Coagulation assays. Circulation 2005;112:e53–60.

57. Pon TK, Dager WE, Roberts AJ, White RH. Subcutaneous enoxaparin for therapeutic anticoagulation in hemodialysis patients. Thromb Res 2014;133:1023–8.

58. Speeckaert MM, Devreese KM, Vanholder RC, Dhondt A. Fondaparinux as an alternative to vitamin K antagonists in haemodialysis patients. Nephrol Dial Transplant 2013;28:3090–5.

59. Aujesky D, Obrosky DS, Stone RA, et al. Derivation and validation of a prognostic model for pulmonary embolism. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2005;172:1041–6.

60. Jiminez D, Aujesky D, Moores L, et al. Simplification of the pulmonary embolism severity index for prognostication in patients with acute symptomatic pulmonary embolism. Arch Intern Med 2010; 170:1383–9.

61. Schulman S. Advances in the management of venous thromboembolism. Best Pract Res Clin Haematol 2012;25:361–77.

62. Erkens PM, Gandara E, Wells P, et al. Safety of outpatient treatment in acute pulmonary embolism. J Thromb Haemost 2010;8:2412–7.

63. Chan YC, Valenti D, Mansfield AO, Stansby G. Warfarin induced skin necrosis. Br J Surg 2000; 87:266–72.

64. Brandjes DP, Heijboer H, Buller HR, et al. Acenocoumarol and heparin compared with acenocoumarol alone in the initial treatment of proximal-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1992;327:1485–9.

65. Segal JB, Streiff MB, Hofmann LV, et al. Management of venous thromboembolism: a systematic review for a practice guideline. Ann Intern Med 2007;146:211–22.

66. Pinede L, Duhaut P, Cucherat M, et al. Comparison of long versus short duration of anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis of randomized, controlled trials. J Intern Med 2000;247:553–62.

67. Schulman S, Rhedin AS, Lindmarker P, et al. A comparison of six weeks with six months of oral anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of venous thromboembolism. Duration of anticoagulation trial study group. N Engl J Med 1995;332:1661–5.

68. Boutitie F, Pinede L, Schulman S, et al. Influence of preceding length of anticoagulant treatment and initial presentation of venous thromboembolism on risk of recurrence after stopping treatment: analysis of individual participants’ data from seven trials. BMJ 2011;342:d3036.

69. Kearon C, Gent M, Hirsh J, et al. A comparison of three months of anticoagulation with extended anticoagulation for a first episode of idiopathic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 1999;340:901-07.

70. Agnelli G, Prandoni P, Becattini C, et al. Extended oral anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of pulmonary embolism. Ann Intern Med 2003;139:19–25.

71. Agnelli G, Prandoni P, Santamaria MG, et al. Three months versus one year of oral anticoagulant therapy for idiopathic deep venous thrombosis. Warfarin optimal duration Italian trial investigators. N Engl J Med 2001;345:165–9.

72. Bauer KA. Long-term management of venous thromboembolism: a 61-year old woman with unprovoked venous thromboembolism. JAMA 2011;305:1336–45.

73. Kearon C, Akl EA. Duration of anticoagulant therapy for deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism. Blood 2014;123:
1794–801.

74. Schulman S, Beyth RJ, Kearon C, et al. Hemorrhagic complications of anticoagulant and thrombolytic treatment: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines (8th edition). Chest 2008;133(6 Suppl):257S–298S.

75. Landefeld CS, Beyth RJ. Anticoagulant-related bleeding: clinical epidemiology, prediction, and prevention. Am J Med 1993;95:315–28.

76. Ruiz-Gimenez N, Suarez C, Gonzalez R, et al. Predictive variables for major bleeding events in patients presenting with documented acute venous thromboembolism. Findings from the RIETE registry. Thromb Haemost 2008;100:26–31.

77. Kearon C, Akl EA, Comerota AJ. Antithrombotic therapy for VTE disease: antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012; 141 (2 Suppl): e419S–94S.

78. Pisters R, Lane DA, Nieuwlaat R, et al. A novel user-friendly score (HAS-BLED) to assess one-year risk of major bleeding in atrial fibrillation patients: The Euro Heart Survey. Chest 2010;138:1093–1100.

79. Gage BF, Yan Y, Milligan PE, et al. Clinical classification schemes for predicting hemorrhage: results from the National Registry of Atrial Fibrillation (NRAF). Am Heart J 2006;151:713–9.

80. Fang MC, Go AS, Chang Y, et al. A new risk scheme to predict warfarin-associated hemorrhage: the ATRIA (Anticoagulation and risk factors in atrial fibrillation) study. J Am Coll Cardiol 2011;58:395–401.

81. Caldeira D, Costa J, Fernandes RM, et al. Performance of the HAS-BLED high bleeding-risk category, compared to ATRIA and HEMORR2HAGES in patients with atrial fibrillation: a systematic review and meta-analysis. J Interv Card Electrophysiol 2014;40:277–84.

82. Douketis JD, Crowther MA, Foster GA, Ginsberg JS. Does the location of thrombosis determine the risk of disease recurrence in patients with proximal deep vein thrombosis? Am J Med 2001;110:515–9.

83. Palareti G, Legnani C, Cosmi B, et al. Risk of venous thromboembolism recurrence: high negative predictive value of D-dimer performed after oral anticoagulation is stopped. Thromb Haemost 2002; 87:7–12.

84. Palareti G, Cosmi B, Legnani C, et al. D-dimer testing to determine the duration of anticoagulation therapy. N Engl J Med 2006;355:1780–9.

85. Bruinstroop E, Klok FA, Van De Ree MA, et al. Elevated D-dimer levels predict recurrence in patients with idiopathic venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis. J Thromb Haemost 2009;611–8.

86. Verhovsek M, Douketis JD, Yi Q, et al. Systematic review: D-dimer to predict recurrent disease after stopping anticoagulant therapy for unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2008;149:481–90.

87. Tosetto A, Iorio A, Marcucci M, et al. Predicting disease recurrence in patients with previous unprovoked venous thromboembolism: a proposed prediction score (DASH). J Thromb Haemost 2012;10:1019–25.

88. Eichinger S, Heinze G, Jandeck LM, et al. Risk assessment of recurrence in patients with unprovoked deep vein thrombosis or pulmonary embolism: the Vienna Prediction Model. Circulation2010; 121:1630–6.

89. Eichinger S, Heinze G, Kyrle PA. D-dimer levels over time and the risk of recurrent venous thromboembolism: an update of the Vienna prediction model. J Am Heart Assoc 2014; 3: e000467.

90. Douketis J, Tosetto A, Marcucci M, et al. Patient-level meta-analysis: effect of measurement timing, threshold, and patient age on ability of D-dimer testing to assess recurrence risk after unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2010;153:523–31.

91. Prandoni P, Lensing AW, Prins MH, et al. Residual venous thrombosis as a predictive factor of recurrent venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2002;137:955–60.

92. Prandoni P, Prins MH, Lensing AW, et al. Residual thrombosis on ultrasonography to guide the duration of anticoagulation in patients with deep venous thrombosis: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2009;150:577–85.

93. Marcucci M, Iorio A, Douketis J. Management of patients with unprovoked venous thromboembolism: an evidence-based and practical approach. Curr Treat Options Cardiovasc Med 2013;15:224–39.

94. Ridker PM, Goldhaber SZ, Danielson E, et al. Long-term, low-intensity warfarin therapy for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2003;348:1425–34.

95. Kearon C, Ginsberg JS, Kovacs MJ, et al. Comparison of low-intensity warfarin therapy with conventional-intensity warfarin therapy for long-term prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2003;349:631–9.

96. Brighton TA, Eikelboom JW, Mann K, et al. Low-dose aspirin for preventing recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2012;367:1979–87.

97. Becattini C, Agnelli G, Schenone A, et al. Aspirin for preventing the recurrence of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2012;366:1959–67.

98. Simes J, Becattini C, Agnelli G, et al. Aspirin for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism: the INSPIRE collaboration. Circulation 2014;130:1062–71.

99. Makris M. Thrombophilia: grading the risk. Blood 2009;113:5038–9.

100. Segal JB, Brotman DJ, Necochea AJ, et al. Predictive value of factor V Leiden and prothrombin G20210A in adults with venous thromboembolism and in family members of those with a mutation: a systematic review. JAMA 2009;30:2472.

101. Ho WK, Hankey GH, Quinlan DJ, Eikelboom JW. Risk of recurrent venous thromboembolism in patients with common thrombophilia: a systematic review. Arch Intern Med 2006;166:729–36.

102. Miyakis S, Lockshin MD, Atsumi T, et al. International consensus statement on an update of the classification criteria for definite antiphospholipid syndrome (APS). J Thromb Haemost 2006; 4:295–306.

103. Pengo V, Tripodi A, Reber G, et al. Update of the guidelines for lupus anticoagulant detection. Subcommittee on lupus anticoagulant/antiphospholipid antibody of the scientific and standardization committee of the international society on thrombosis and haemostasis. J Thromb Haemost 2009; 7:1737–40.

104. Brandt JT, Barna LK, Triplett DA. Laboratory identification of lupus anticoagulants: results of the Second International Workship for identification of lupus anticoagulants. On behalf of the subcommittee on lupus anticoagulants/antiphospholipid antibodies of the ISTH. Thromb Haemost 1995;74: 1597–603.

105. Gale AJ, Gordon SG. Update on tumor cell procoagulant factors. Acta Haematol 2001;106:25-32.

106. Timp JF, Braekkan SK, Versteeg HH, Cannegieter SC. Epidemiology of cancer-associated venous thrombosis. Blood 2013;122:1712–23.

107. Lee AY, Levine MN. Venous thromboembolism and cancer: risks and outcomes. Circulation 2003; 107 (Suppl 1): I17–21.

108. Van Doormaal FF, Terpstra W, Van Der Griend R, et al. Is extensive screening for cancer in idiopathic venous thromboembolism warranted? J Thromb Haemost 2011;9:79–84.

109. Sorensen HT, Mellemkjaer L, Olsen JH, Baron JA. Prognosis of cancers associated with venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2000;343:1846–50.

110. Lee AY, Levine MN, Baker RI, et al. Low-molecular-weight heparin versus a coumarin for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism in patients with cancer. N Engl J Med 2003;349:146-53.

111. Streiff MB, Bockenstedt PL, Cataland SR, et al. Venous thromboembolic disease. J Natl Compr Canc Netw 2013;11:1402-29.

112. Elias EG, Sepulveda F, Mink IB. Increasing the efficiency of cancer chemotherapy with heparin: “clinical study.” J Surg Oncol 1973;5:189–93.

113. Lazo-Langner A, Goss GD, Spaans JN, Rodger MA. The effect of low-molecular-weight heparin on cancer survival. A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized trials. J Thromb Haemost 2007;5:729–37.

114. Bremme KA. Haemostatic changes in pregnancy. Best Pract Res Clin Haematol 2003;16:153–68.

115. Gerhardt A, Scharf RE, Beckmann MW, et al. Prothrombin and factor V mutations in women with a history of thrombosis during pregnancy and the puerperium. N Engl J Med 2000;342:374–80.

116. Rott H. Thrombotic risks of oral contraceptives. Curr Opin Obstet Gynecol 2012;24:235-40.

117. Marchiori A, Mosena L, Prandoni P. Superficial vein thrombosis: risk factors, diagnosis, and treatment. Semin Thromb Hemost 2006;32:737–43.

118. Decousus H, Quere I, Presles E, et al. Superficial venous thrombosis and venous thromboembolism: a large, prospective epidemiologic study. Ann Intern Med 2010;152:218–24.

119. Galanaud JP, Genty C, Sevestre MA, et al. Predictive factors for concurrent deep-vein thrombosis and symptomatic venous thromboembolic recurrence in case of superficial venous thrombosis. The OPTIMEV study. Thromb Haemost 2011;105:31–9.

120. Sullivan V, Denk PM, Sonnad SS, et al. Ligation versus anticoagulation: treatment of above-knee superficial thrombophlebitis not involving the deep venous system. J Am Coll Surg 2001;193:556–62.

121. Lohr JM, McDevitt DT, Lutter KS, et al. Operative management of greater saphenous thrombophlebitis involving the saphenofemoral junction. Am J Surg 1992;164:269–75.

122. Chengelis DL, Benedick PJ, Glover JL, et al. Progression of superficial venous thrombosis to deep vein thrombosis. J Vasc Surg 1996;24:745–9.

123. Verlato F, Zuccetta P, Prandoni P, et al. An unexpectedly high rate of pulmonary embolism in patients with superficial thrombophlebitis of the leg. J Vasc Surg 1999;30:1113–5.

124. Cosmi B, Filippini M, Tonti D, et al. A randomized double-blind study of low-molecular-weight heparin (parnaparin) for superficial vein thrombosis: STEFLUX (Superficial ThromboEmbolism and Fluxum). J Thromb Haemost 2012;10:1026–35.

125. Decousus H, Prandoni P, Mismetti P, et al. Fondaparinux for the treatment of superficial-vein thrombosis in the legs. N Engl J Med 2010;363:1222–32.

126. Di Nisio M, Wichers IM, Middeldorp S. Treatment for superficial thrombophlebitis of the leg. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2013;4:CD004982.

127. Stangier J, Rathgen K, Stahle H, et al. The pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics and tolerability of dabigatran etexilate, a new oral direct thrombin inhibitor, in healthy male subjects. Br J Clin Pharmacol 2007;64:292–303.

128. RE-MOBILIZE Writing Committee, Ginsberg JS, Davidson BL, et al. Oral thrombin inhibitor dabigatran etexilate vs North American enoxaparin regimen for prevention of venous thromboembolism after knee arthroplasty surgery. J Arthroplasty 2009;24:1–9.

129. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Oral dabigatran etexilate vs. subcutaneous enoxaparin for the prevention of venous thromboembolism after total knee replacement: the RE-MODEL randomized trial. J Thromb Haemost 2007;5:2178–85.

130. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Dabigatran etexilate versus enoxaparin for prevention of venous thromboembolism after total hip replacement: a randomized, double-blind, non-inferiority trial. Lancet 2007;370:949–56.

131. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Huo MH, et al. Oral dabigatran versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after primary total hip arthroplasty (RE-NOVATE II*). A randomized, double-blind, non-inferiority trial. Thromb Haemost2011;105:721–9.

132. Friedman RJ, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Dabigatran versus enoxaparin for prevention of venous thromboembolism after hip or knee arthroplasty: a pooled analysis of three trials. Thromb Res 2010;126:175–82.

133. Wolowacz SE, Roskell NS, Plumb JM, et al. Efficacy and safety of dabigatran etexilate for the prevention of venous thromboembolism following total hip or knee arthroplasty. A meta-analysis. Thromb Haemost 2009;101:77–85.

134. Schulman S, Kearon C, Kakkar AK, et al. Dabigatran versus warfarin in the treatment of acute venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2009;36:2342–52.

135. Schulman S, Kearon C, Kakkar AK, et al. Extended use of dabigatran, warfarin, or placebo in venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;368:709–18.

136. Eriksson BI, Borris LC, Friedman RJ, et al. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after hip arthroplasty. N Engl J Med 2008;358:2765–75.

137. Kakkar AK, Brenner B, Dahl OE, et al. Extended duration rivaroxaban versus short-term enoxaparin for the prevention of venous thromboembolism after total hip arthroplasty: a double-blind, randomized controlled trial. Lancet 2008;372:31–9.

138. Lassen MR, Ageno W, Borris LC, et al. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after total knee arthroplasty. N Engl J Med 2008;358:2776–86.

139. Cao YB, Zhang JD, Shen H, Jiang YY. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after total hip or knee arthroplasty: a meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Eur J Clin Pharmacol 2010;66:1099–108.

140. Cohen AT, Spiro TE, Buller HR, et al. Rivaroxaban for thromboprophylaxis in acutely ill medical patients. N Engl J Med 2013;368:513–23.

141. EINSTEIN Investigators, Bauersachs R, Berkowitz SD, et al. Oral rivaroxaban for symptomatic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2010;363:2499–510.

142. EINSTEIN-PE Investigators, Buller HR, Prins MH, et al. Oral rivaroxaban for the treatment of symptomatic pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2012;366:1287–97.

143. Agnelli G, Buller HR, Cohen A, et al. Oral apixaban for the treatment of acute venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;369:799–808.

144. Agnelli G, Buller HR, Cohen A, et al. Apixaban for extended treatment of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;368:699–708.

145. Hokusai-VTE investigators, Buller HR, Decousus H, et al. Edoxaban versus warfarin for the treatment of symptomatic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;369:1406–15.

146. Khadzhynov D, Wagner F, Formella S, et al. Effective elimination of dabigatran by haemodialysis. A phase I single-centre study in patients with end-stage renal disease. Thromb Haemost 2013;109:596–605.

147. Schiele F, van Ryn J, Canada K, et al. A specific antidote for dabigatran: functional and structural characterization. Blood 2013;121:3554–62.

148. Glund S, Stangier J, Schmohl M, et al. Idarucizumab, a specific antidote for dabigatran: immediate, complete, and sustained reversal of dabigatran induced anticoagulation in elderly and renally impaired subjects. Presented at the American Society of Hematology 2014 Annual Meeting; San Francisco, CA.

149. Crowther MA, Levy GG, Lu G, et al. A phase 2 randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial demonstrating reversal of edoxaban-induced anticoagulation in healthy subjects by andexanet alfa (PRT064445), a universal antidote for factor Xa (fXa) inhibitors. Abstract #4269. Presented at the American Society of Hematology 2014 Annual Meeting, San Francisco, CA.

150. Crowther M, Levy GG, Lu G, et al. ANNEXATM-A: A phase 3 randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial, demonstrating reversal of apixaban-induced anticoagulation in older subjects by andexanet alfa (PRT 064445), a universal antidote for factor Xa (fa) inhibitors. Presented at the American Heart Association 2014 Annual Meeting, Chicago, IL.

151. Ansell JE, Bakhru SH, Lauliche BE, et al. Use of PER977 to reverse the anticoagulant effect of edoxaban. N Engl J Med 2014;371:2141–2.

152. Eerenberg ES, Kamphuisen PW, Sijpkens MK, et al. Reversal of rivaroxaban and dabigatran by prothrombin complex concentrate: a randomized, placebo-controlled, crossover study in healthy subjects. Circulation 2011;124:1573–9.

153. Korber MK, Langer E, Ziemer S, et al. Measurement and reversal of prophylactic and therapeutic peak levels of rivaroxaban: an in vitro study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost 2014;20:735–40.

154. Fawole A, Daw HA, Crowther MA. Practical management of bleeding due to the anticoagulants dabigatran, rivaroxaban, and apixaban. Cleve Clin J Med 2013;80:443–51.

155. Siegal DM, Garcia DA, Crowther MA. How I treat target-specific oral anticoagulant-associated bleeding. Blood 2014;123:1152–8.

References

1. White RH. The epidemiology of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003;107(Suppl 1):I4-8.

2. Moster KM and Fedullo PF. The diagnosis of deep-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1994;330:863–4.

3. Kearon C. Natural history of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003;(Suppl 1):122–30.

4. Heijboer H, Brandjes DP, Buller HR, et al. Deficiencies of coagulation-inhibiting and fibrinolytic proteins in outpatients with deep-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1990;323:1512–6.

5. Mateo J, Oliver A, Borrell M, et al. Laboratory evaluation and clinical characteristics of 2,132 consecutive unselected patients with venous thromboembolism—results of the Spanish Multicentric Study on Thrombophilia (EMET-Study). Thromb Haemost 1997;77:441–51.

6. Lyman GH. Venous thromboembolism in the patient with cancer: focus on burden of disease and benefits of thromboprophylaxis. Cancer 2011;117:1334–49.

7. White RH, Zhou H, Romano PS. Incidence of symptomatic venous thromboembolism after different elective or urgent surgical procedures. Thromb Haemost 2003;90:446–55.

8. Marik PE, Plante LA. Venous thromboembolic disease and pregnancy. N Engl J Med 2008;359:2025–33.

9. Ageno W, Becattini C, Brighton T, et al. Cardiovascular risk factors and venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis. Circulation 2008;117:93–102.

10. Mahmoodi BK, Gansevoort RT, Naess IA, et al. Association of mild to moderate chronic kidney disease with venous thromboembolism: pooled analysis of five prospective general population cohorts. Circulation 2012;126:1964–71.

11. Landolfi R, Marchioli R, Patrono C. Mechanisms of bleeding and thrombosis in myeloproliferative disorders. Thromb Haemost 1997;78:617–21.

12. Hillmen P, Lewis SM, Bessler M, et al. Natural history of paroxysmal nocturnal hemoglobinuria. N Engl J Med1995;333:1253–8.

13.Grainge MJ, West J, Card TR. Venous thromboembolism during active disease and remission in inflammatory bowel disease: a cohort study. Lancet 2010;375:657–63.

14. Flinterman LE, Van Der Meer FJ, Rosendaal FR, Doggen CJ. Current perspective of venous thrombosis in the upper extremity. J Thromb Haemost 2008;6:1262–6.

15. Kibbe MR, Ujiki M, Goodwin AL, et al. Iliac vein compression in an aymptomatic patient population. J Vasc Surg 2004;39:937–43.

16. Chee YL, Culligan DJ, Watson HG. Inferior vena cava malformation as a risk factor for deep venous thrombosis in the young. Br J Haematol 2001;114:878–80.

17. Stegeman BH, de Bastos M, Rosendaal FR, et al. Different combined oral contraceptives and the risk of venous thrombosis: systematic review and network meta-analysis. BMJ 2013;347:f5298.

18. Cushman M, Kuller LH, Prentice R, et al. Estrogen plus progestin and risk of venous thrombosis. JAMA 2004;292:1573–80.

19. Fisher B, Costantino JP, Wickerham DL, et al. Tamoxifen for prevention of breast cancer: report of the National Surgical Adjuvant Breast and Bowel Project P-1 study. J Natl Cancer Inst 1998;90:1371–88.

20. Glueck CJ, Richardson-Royer C, Schultz R, et al. Testosterone therapy, thrombophilia-hypofibrinolysis, and hospitalization for deep venous thrombosis-pulmonary embolus: an exploratory, hypothesis-generating study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost 2014;20:244–9.

21. Johannesdottir SA, Horvath-Puho E, Dekkers OM, et al. Use of glucocorticoids and risk of venous thromboembolism: a nationwide population-based case-control study. JAMA Intern Med 2013;173:743–52.

22. Spencer FA, Emery C, Lessard D, et al. The Worcester Venous Thromboembolism study: a population-based study of the clinical epidemiology of venous thromboembolism. J Gen Intern Med 2006;21:722–7.

23. Ocak G, Vossen CY, Verduijn M, et al. Risk of venous thrombosis in patients with major illnesses: results from the MEGA study. J Thromb Haemost 2013;11:116-23.

24. Anderson FA Jr, Spencer FA. Risk factors for venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2003; 107 (Suppl 1): I9–16.

25. Clemetson KJ. Platelet GPIb-V-IX complex. Thromb Haemost 1997;78:266–70.

26. Kroll MH, Schafer AI. Biochemical mechanisms of platelet activation. Blood 1989;74:1181–95.

27. Wells PS, Anderson DR, Bormanis J, et al. Value of assessment of pretest probability of deep-vein thrombosis in clinical management. Lancet 1997;350:1795–8.

28. Wells PS, Anderson DR, Rodger M, et al. Derivation of a simple clinical model to categorize patients’ probability of pulmonary embolism: increasing the model’s utility with the SimpliRED D-dimer. Thromb Haemost 2000;416–20.

29. Le Gal G, Righini M, Roy PM, et al. Prediction of pulmonary embolism in the emergency department: the revised Geneva score. Ann Intern Med 2006; 144:165–71.

30. Stein PD, Hull RD, Patel KC, et al. D-dimer for the exclusion of acute venous thrombosis and pulmonary embolism: a systematic review. Ann Intern Med 2004;140:589–602.

31. Pasha SM, Klok FA, Snoep JD, et al. Safety of excluding acute pulmonary embolism based on an unlikely clinical probability by the Wells rule and normal D-dimer concentration: a meta-analysis. Thromb Res 2010;125:e123–27.

32. Crowther MA, Cook DJ, Griffith LE, et al. Neither baseline tests of molecular hypercoagulability nor D-dimer levels predict deep venous thrombosis in critically ill medical-surgical patients. Intensive Care Med 2005;31:48–55.

33. Karami-Djurabi R, Klok FA, Kooiman J, et al. D-dimer testing in patients with suspected pulmonary embolism and impaired renal function. Am J Med 2009;122:1050–3.

34. Chan WS, Chunilal S, Lee A, et al. A red blood cell agglutination D-dimer test to exclude deep venous thrombosis in pregnancy. Ann Intern Med 2007;147:165–70.

35. Righini M, Goehring C, Bounameaux H, Perrier A. Effects of age on the performance of common diagnostic tests for pulmonary embolism. Am J Med 2000; 109:357–61.

36. Woller SC, Stevens SM, Adams DM, et al. Assessment of the safety and efficiency of using an age-adjusted D-dimer threshold to exclude suspected pulmonary embolism. Chest 2014; 146:1444–51.

37. Zierler BK. Ultrasonography and diagnosis of venous thromboembolism. Circulation 2004; 109 (Suppl 1): I9–14.

38. Hirsh J, Lee AY. How we diagnose and treat deep vein thrombosis. Blood 2002;99:3102–10.

39. Tapson VF, Carroll BA, Davidson BL, et al. The diagnostic approach to acute venous thromboembolism. Clinical practice guideline. American Thoracic Society. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 1999;160:1043–66.

40. Bates SM, Jaeschke R, Stevens SM, et al. Diagnosis of DVT: Antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012; 141 (2 Suppl): e351S–418S.

41. Pezzullo JA, Perkins AB, Cronan JJ. Symptomatic deep vein thrombosis: diagnosis with limited compression US. Radiology 1996;198:67–70.

42. Frederick MG, Hertzberg BS, Kliewer MA, et al. Can the US examination for lower extremity deep venous thrombosis be abbreviated? A prospective study of 755 examinations Radiology 1996;199:45–7.

43. Remy-Jardin M, Remy J, Deschidre F, et al. Diagnosis of pulmonary embolism with spiral CT: comparison with pulmonary angiography and scintigraphy. Radiology 1996;200:699–706.

44. Stein PD, Fowler SE, Goodman LR, et al. Multidetector computed tomography for acute pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2006;354:2317–27.

45. Goodacre S. In the clinic. Deep venous thrombosis. Ann Intern Med 2008;149:ITC3–1.

46. Agnelli G, Becattini C. Acute pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2010;363:266–74.

47. Kucher N. Clinical practice. Deep-vein thrombosis of the upper extremities. N Engl J Med 2011;364:861–9.

48. Constans J, Salmi LR, Sevestre-Pietri MA, et al. A clinical prediction score for upper extremity deep venous thrombosis. Thromb Haemost 2008;99:202–7.

49. Meyer G, Vicault E, Danasys T, et al. Fibrinolysis for patients with intermediate-risk pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2014;370:1402–11.

50. Kline JA, Nordenholz KE, Courtney DM, et al. Treatment of submassive pulmonary embolism with tenecteplase or placebo: cardiopulmonary outcomes at 3 months: multicenter double-bline, placebo-controlled randomized trial. J Thromb Haemost 2014;12:459–68.

51. Guyatt GH, Akl EA, Crowther M, et al. Executive summary: Antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012;141(2 Suppl):7S–47S.

52. Bounameaux H. Unfractionated versus low-molecular-weight heparin in the treatment of venous thromboembolism. Vasc Med 1998;3:41–6.

53. Erkens PM, Prins MH. Fixed dose subcutaneous low molecular weight heparins versus adjusted dose unfractionated heparin for venous thromboembolism. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2010;9:CD001100.

54. Buller HR, Davidson BL, Decousus H, et al. Fondaprinux or enoxaparin for the initial treatment of symptomatic deep venous thrombosis: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2004;140: 867–73.

55. Buller HR, Davidson BL, Decousus H, et al. Subcutaenous fondaparinux versus intravenous unfractionated heparin in the initial treatment of pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2003;349:1695–702.

56. Bates SM, Weitz JI. Coagulation assays. Circulation 2005;112:e53–60.

57. Pon TK, Dager WE, Roberts AJ, White RH. Subcutaneous enoxaparin for therapeutic anticoagulation in hemodialysis patients. Thromb Res 2014;133:1023–8.

58. Speeckaert MM, Devreese KM, Vanholder RC, Dhondt A. Fondaparinux as an alternative to vitamin K antagonists in haemodialysis patients. Nephrol Dial Transplant 2013;28:3090–5.

59. Aujesky D, Obrosky DS, Stone RA, et al. Derivation and validation of a prognostic model for pulmonary embolism. Am J Respir Crit Care Med 2005;172:1041–6.

60. Jiminez D, Aujesky D, Moores L, et al. Simplification of the pulmonary embolism severity index for prognostication in patients with acute symptomatic pulmonary embolism. Arch Intern Med 2010; 170:1383–9.

61. Schulman S. Advances in the management of venous thromboembolism. Best Pract Res Clin Haematol 2012;25:361–77.

62. Erkens PM, Gandara E, Wells P, et al. Safety of outpatient treatment in acute pulmonary embolism. J Thromb Haemost 2010;8:2412–7.

63. Chan YC, Valenti D, Mansfield AO, Stansby G. Warfarin induced skin necrosis. Br J Surg 2000; 87:266–72.

64. Brandjes DP, Heijboer H, Buller HR, et al. Acenocoumarol and heparin compared with acenocoumarol alone in the initial treatment of proximal-vein thrombosis. N Engl J Med 1992;327:1485–9.

65. Segal JB, Streiff MB, Hofmann LV, et al. Management of venous thromboembolism: a systematic review for a practice guideline. Ann Intern Med 2007;146:211–22.

66. Pinede L, Duhaut P, Cucherat M, et al. Comparison of long versus short duration of anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis of randomized, controlled trials. J Intern Med 2000;247:553–62.

67. Schulman S, Rhedin AS, Lindmarker P, et al. A comparison of six weeks with six months of oral anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of venous thromboembolism. Duration of anticoagulation trial study group. N Engl J Med 1995;332:1661–5.

68. Boutitie F, Pinede L, Schulman S, et al. Influence of preceding length of anticoagulant treatment and initial presentation of venous thromboembolism on risk of recurrence after stopping treatment: analysis of individual participants’ data from seven trials. BMJ 2011;342:d3036.

69. Kearon C, Gent M, Hirsh J, et al. A comparison of three months of anticoagulation with extended anticoagulation for a first episode of idiopathic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 1999;340:901-07.

70. Agnelli G, Prandoni P, Becattini C, et al. Extended oral anticoagulant therapy after a first episode of pulmonary embolism. Ann Intern Med 2003;139:19–25.

71. Agnelli G, Prandoni P, Santamaria MG, et al. Three months versus one year of oral anticoagulant therapy for idiopathic deep venous thrombosis. Warfarin optimal duration Italian trial investigators. N Engl J Med 2001;345:165–9.

72. Bauer KA. Long-term management of venous thromboembolism: a 61-year old woman with unprovoked venous thromboembolism. JAMA 2011;305:1336–45.

73. Kearon C, Akl EA. Duration of anticoagulant therapy for deep vein thrombosis and pulmonary embolism. Blood 2014;123:
1794–801.

74. Schulman S, Beyth RJ, Kearon C, et al. Hemorrhagic complications of anticoagulant and thrombolytic treatment: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines (8th edition). Chest 2008;133(6 Suppl):257S–298S.

75. Landefeld CS, Beyth RJ. Anticoagulant-related bleeding: clinical epidemiology, prediction, and prevention. Am J Med 1993;95:315–28.

76. Ruiz-Gimenez N, Suarez C, Gonzalez R, et al. Predictive variables for major bleeding events in patients presenting with documented acute venous thromboembolism. Findings from the RIETE registry. Thromb Haemost 2008;100:26–31.

77. Kearon C, Akl EA, Comerota AJ. Antithrombotic therapy for VTE disease: antithrombotic therapy and prevention of thrombosis, 9th ed: American college of chest physicians evidence-based clinical practice guidelines. Chest 2012; 141 (2 Suppl): e419S–94S.

78. Pisters R, Lane DA, Nieuwlaat R, et al. A novel user-friendly score (HAS-BLED) to assess one-year risk of major bleeding in atrial fibrillation patients: The Euro Heart Survey. Chest 2010;138:1093–1100.

79. Gage BF, Yan Y, Milligan PE, et al. Clinical classification schemes for predicting hemorrhage: results from the National Registry of Atrial Fibrillation (NRAF). Am Heart J 2006;151:713–9.

80. Fang MC, Go AS, Chang Y, et al. A new risk scheme to predict warfarin-associated hemorrhage: the ATRIA (Anticoagulation and risk factors in atrial fibrillation) study. J Am Coll Cardiol 2011;58:395–401.

81. Caldeira D, Costa J, Fernandes RM, et al. Performance of the HAS-BLED high bleeding-risk category, compared to ATRIA and HEMORR2HAGES in patients with atrial fibrillation: a systematic review and meta-analysis. J Interv Card Electrophysiol 2014;40:277–84.

82. Douketis JD, Crowther MA, Foster GA, Ginsberg JS. Does the location of thrombosis determine the risk of disease recurrence in patients with proximal deep vein thrombosis? Am J Med 2001;110:515–9.

83. Palareti G, Legnani C, Cosmi B, et al. Risk of venous thromboembolism recurrence: high negative predictive value of D-dimer performed after oral anticoagulation is stopped. Thromb Haemost 2002; 87:7–12.

84. Palareti G, Cosmi B, Legnani C, et al. D-dimer testing to determine the duration of anticoagulation therapy. N Engl J Med 2006;355:1780–9.

85. Bruinstroop E, Klok FA, Van De Ree MA, et al. Elevated D-dimer levels predict recurrence in patients with idiopathic venous thromboembolism: a meta-analysis. J Thromb Haemost 2009;611–8.

86. Verhovsek M, Douketis JD, Yi Q, et al. Systematic review: D-dimer to predict recurrent disease after stopping anticoagulant therapy for unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2008;149:481–90.

87. Tosetto A, Iorio A, Marcucci M, et al. Predicting disease recurrence in patients with previous unprovoked venous thromboembolism: a proposed prediction score (DASH). J Thromb Haemost 2012;10:1019–25.

88. Eichinger S, Heinze G, Jandeck LM, et al. Risk assessment of recurrence in patients with unprovoked deep vein thrombosis or pulmonary embolism: the Vienna Prediction Model. Circulation2010; 121:1630–6.

89. Eichinger S, Heinze G, Kyrle PA. D-dimer levels over time and the risk of recurrent venous thromboembolism: an update of the Vienna prediction model. J Am Heart Assoc 2014; 3: e000467.

90. Douketis J, Tosetto A, Marcucci M, et al. Patient-level meta-analysis: effect of measurement timing, threshold, and patient age on ability of D-dimer testing to assess recurrence risk after unprovoked venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2010;153:523–31.

91. Prandoni P, Lensing AW, Prins MH, et al. Residual venous thrombosis as a predictive factor of recurrent venous thromboembolism. Ann Intern Med 2002;137:955–60.

92. Prandoni P, Prins MH, Lensing AW, et al. Residual thrombosis on ultrasonography to guide the duration of anticoagulation in patients with deep venous thrombosis: a randomized trial. Ann Intern Med 2009;150:577–85.

93. Marcucci M, Iorio A, Douketis J. Management of patients with unprovoked venous thromboembolism: an evidence-based and practical approach. Curr Treat Options Cardiovasc Med 2013;15:224–39.

94. Ridker PM, Goldhaber SZ, Danielson E, et al. Long-term, low-intensity warfarin therapy for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2003;348:1425–34.

95. Kearon C, Ginsberg JS, Kovacs MJ, et al. Comparison of low-intensity warfarin therapy with conventional-intensity warfarin therapy for long-term prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2003;349:631–9.

96. Brighton TA, Eikelboom JW, Mann K, et al. Low-dose aspirin for preventing recurrent venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2012;367:1979–87.

97. Becattini C, Agnelli G, Schenone A, et al. Aspirin for preventing the recurrence of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2012;366:1959–67.

98. Simes J, Becattini C, Agnelli G, et al. Aspirin for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism: the INSPIRE collaboration. Circulation 2014;130:1062–71.

99. Makris M. Thrombophilia: grading the risk. Blood 2009;113:5038–9.

100. Segal JB, Brotman DJ, Necochea AJ, et al. Predictive value of factor V Leiden and prothrombin G20210A in adults with venous thromboembolism and in family members of those with a mutation: a systematic review. JAMA 2009;30:2472.

101. Ho WK, Hankey GH, Quinlan DJ, Eikelboom JW. Risk of recurrent venous thromboembolism in patients with common thrombophilia: a systematic review. Arch Intern Med 2006;166:729–36.

102. Miyakis S, Lockshin MD, Atsumi T, et al. International consensus statement on an update of the classification criteria for definite antiphospholipid syndrome (APS). J Thromb Haemost 2006; 4:295–306.

103. Pengo V, Tripodi A, Reber G, et al. Update of the guidelines for lupus anticoagulant detection. Subcommittee on lupus anticoagulant/antiphospholipid antibody of the scientific and standardization committee of the international society on thrombosis and haemostasis. J Thromb Haemost 2009; 7:1737–40.

104. Brandt JT, Barna LK, Triplett DA. Laboratory identification of lupus anticoagulants: results of the Second International Workship for identification of lupus anticoagulants. On behalf of the subcommittee on lupus anticoagulants/antiphospholipid antibodies of the ISTH. Thromb Haemost 1995;74: 1597–603.

105. Gale AJ, Gordon SG. Update on tumor cell procoagulant factors. Acta Haematol 2001;106:25-32.

106. Timp JF, Braekkan SK, Versteeg HH, Cannegieter SC. Epidemiology of cancer-associated venous thrombosis. Blood 2013;122:1712–23.

107. Lee AY, Levine MN. Venous thromboembolism and cancer: risks and outcomes. Circulation 2003; 107 (Suppl 1): I17–21.

108. Van Doormaal FF, Terpstra W, Van Der Griend R, et al. Is extensive screening for cancer in idiopathic venous thromboembolism warranted? J Thromb Haemost 2011;9:79–84.

109. Sorensen HT, Mellemkjaer L, Olsen JH, Baron JA. Prognosis of cancers associated with venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2000;343:1846–50.

110. Lee AY, Levine MN, Baker RI, et al. Low-molecular-weight heparin versus a coumarin for the prevention of recurrent venous thromboembolism in patients with cancer. N Engl J Med 2003;349:146-53.

111. Streiff MB, Bockenstedt PL, Cataland SR, et al. Venous thromboembolic disease. J Natl Compr Canc Netw 2013;11:1402-29.

112. Elias EG, Sepulveda F, Mink IB. Increasing the efficiency of cancer chemotherapy with heparin: “clinical study.” J Surg Oncol 1973;5:189–93.

113. Lazo-Langner A, Goss GD, Spaans JN, Rodger MA. The effect of low-molecular-weight heparin on cancer survival. A systematic review and meta-analysis of randomized trials. J Thromb Haemost 2007;5:729–37.

114. Bremme KA. Haemostatic changes in pregnancy. Best Pract Res Clin Haematol 2003;16:153–68.

115. Gerhardt A, Scharf RE, Beckmann MW, et al. Prothrombin and factor V mutations in women with a history of thrombosis during pregnancy and the puerperium. N Engl J Med 2000;342:374–80.

116. Rott H. Thrombotic risks of oral contraceptives. Curr Opin Obstet Gynecol 2012;24:235-40.

117. Marchiori A, Mosena L, Prandoni P. Superficial vein thrombosis: risk factors, diagnosis, and treatment. Semin Thromb Hemost 2006;32:737–43.

118. Decousus H, Quere I, Presles E, et al. Superficial venous thrombosis and venous thromboembolism: a large, prospective epidemiologic study. Ann Intern Med 2010;152:218–24.

119. Galanaud JP, Genty C, Sevestre MA, et al. Predictive factors for concurrent deep-vein thrombosis and symptomatic venous thromboembolic recurrence in case of superficial venous thrombosis. The OPTIMEV study. Thromb Haemost 2011;105:31–9.

120. Sullivan V, Denk PM, Sonnad SS, et al. Ligation versus anticoagulation: treatment of above-knee superficial thrombophlebitis not involving the deep venous system. J Am Coll Surg 2001;193:556–62.

121. Lohr JM, McDevitt DT, Lutter KS, et al. Operative management of greater saphenous thrombophlebitis involving the saphenofemoral junction. Am J Surg 1992;164:269–75.

122. Chengelis DL, Benedick PJ, Glover JL, et al. Progression of superficial venous thrombosis to deep vein thrombosis. J Vasc Surg 1996;24:745–9.

123. Verlato F, Zuccetta P, Prandoni P, et al. An unexpectedly high rate of pulmonary embolism in patients with superficial thrombophlebitis of the leg. J Vasc Surg 1999;30:1113–5.

124. Cosmi B, Filippini M, Tonti D, et al. A randomized double-blind study of low-molecular-weight heparin (parnaparin) for superficial vein thrombosis: STEFLUX (Superficial ThromboEmbolism and Fluxum). J Thromb Haemost 2012;10:1026–35.

125. Decousus H, Prandoni P, Mismetti P, et al. Fondaparinux for the treatment of superficial-vein thrombosis in the legs. N Engl J Med 2010;363:1222–32.

126. Di Nisio M, Wichers IM, Middeldorp S. Treatment for superficial thrombophlebitis of the leg. Cochrane Database Syst Rev 2013;4:CD004982.

127. Stangier J, Rathgen K, Stahle H, et al. The pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics and tolerability of dabigatran etexilate, a new oral direct thrombin inhibitor, in healthy male subjects. Br J Clin Pharmacol 2007;64:292–303.

128. RE-MOBILIZE Writing Committee, Ginsberg JS, Davidson BL, et al. Oral thrombin inhibitor dabigatran etexilate vs North American enoxaparin regimen for prevention of venous thromboembolism after knee arthroplasty surgery. J Arthroplasty 2009;24:1–9.

129. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Oral dabigatran etexilate vs. subcutaneous enoxaparin for the prevention of venous thromboembolism after total knee replacement: the RE-MODEL randomized trial. J Thromb Haemost 2007;5:2178–85.

130. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Dabigatran etexilate versus enoxaparin for prevention of venous thromboembolism after total hip replacement: a randomized, double-blind, non-inferiority trial. Lancet 2007;370:949–56.

131. Eriksson BI, Dahl OE, Huo MH, et al. Oral dabigatran versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after primary total hip arthroplasty (RE-NOVATE II*). A randomized, double-blind, non-inferiority trial. Thromb Haemost2011;105:721–9.

132. Friedman RJ, Dahl OE, Rosencher N, et al. Dabigatran versus enoxaparin for prevention of venous thromboembolism after hip or knee arthroplasty: a pooled analysis of three trials. Thromb Res 2010;126:175–82.

133. Wolowacz SE, Roskell NS, Plumb JM, et al. Efficacy and safety of dabigatran etexilate for the prevention of venous thromboembolism following total hip or knee arthroplasty. A meta-analysis. Thromb Haemost 2009;101:77–85.

134. Schulman S, Kearon C, Kakkar AK, et al. Dabigatran versus warfarin in the treatment of acute venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2009;36:2342–52.

135. Schulman S, Kearon C, Kakkar AK, et al. Extended use of dabigatran, warfarin, or placebo in venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;368:709–18.

136. Eriksson BI, Borris LC, Friedman RJ, et al. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after hip arthroplasty. N Engl J Med 2008;358:2765–75.

137. Kakkar AK, Brenner B, Dahl OE, et al. Extended duration rivaroxaban versus short-term enoxaparin for the prevention of venous thromboembolism after total hip arthroplasty: a double-blind, randomized controlled trial. Lancet 2008;372:31–9.

138. Lassen MR, Ageno W, Borris LC, et al. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after total knee arthroplasty. N Engl J Med 2008;358:2776–86.

139. Cao YB, Zhang JD, Shen H, Jiang YY. Rivaroxaban versus enoxaparin for thromboprophylaxis after total hip or knee arthroplasty: a meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Eur J Clin Pharmacol 2010;66:1099–108.

140. Cohen AT, Spiro TE, Buller HR, et al. Rivaroxaban for thromboprophylaxis in acutely ill medical patients. N Engl J Med 2013;368:513–23.

141. EINSTEIN Investigators, Bauersachs R, Berkowitz SD, et al. Oral rivaroxaban for symptomatic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2010;363:2499–510.

142. EINSTEIN-PE Investigators, Buller HR, Prins MH, et al. Oral rivaroxaban for the treatment of symptomatic pulmonary embolism. N Engl J Med 2012;366:1287–97.

143. Agnelli G, Buller HR, Cohen A, et al. Oral apixaban for the treatment of acute venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;369:799–808.

144. Agnelli G, Buller HR, Cohen A, et al. Apixaban for extended treatment of venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;368:699–708.

145. Hokusai-VTE investigators, Buller HR, Decousus H, et al. Edoxaban versus warfarin for the treatment of symptomatic venous thromboembolism. N Engl J Med 2013;369:1406–15.

146. Khadzhynov D, Wagner F, Formella S, et al. Effective elimination of dabigatran by haemodialysis. A phase I single-centre study in patients with end-stage renal disease. Thromb Haemost 2013;109:596–605.

147. Schiele F, van Ryn J, Canada K, et al. A specific antidote for dabigatran: functional and structural characterization. Blood 2013;121:3554–62.

148. Glund S, Stangier J, Schmohl M, et al. Idarucizumab, a specific antidote for dabigatran: immediate, complete, and sustained reversal of dabigatran induced anticoagulation in elderly and renally impaired subjects. Presented at the American Society of Hematology 2014 Annual Meeting; San Francisco, CA.

149. Crowther MA, Levy GG, Lu G, et al. A phase 2 randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial demonstrating reversal of edoxaban-induced anticoagulation in healthy subjects by andexanet alfa (PRT064445), a universal antidote for factor Xa (fXa) inhibitors. Abstract #4269. Presented at the American Society of Hematology 2014 Annual Meeting, San Francisco, CA.

150. Crowther M, Levy GG, Lu G, et al. ANNEXATM-A: A phase 3 randomized, double-blind, placebo-controlled trial, demonstrating reversal of apixaban-induced anticoagulation in older subjects by andexanet alfa (PRT 064445), a universal antidote for factor Xa (fa) inhibitors. Presented at the American Heart Association 2014 Annual Meeting, Chicago, IL.

151. Ansell JE, Bakhru SH, Lauliche BE, et al. Use of PER977 to reverse the anticoagulant effect of edoxaban. N Engl J Med 2014;371:2141–2.

152. Eerenberg ES, Kamphuisen PW, Sijpkens MK, et al. Reversal of rivaroxaban and dabigatran by prothrombin complex concentrate: a randomized, placebo-controlled, crossover study in healthy subjects. Circulation 2011;124:1573–9.

153. Korber MK, Langer E, Ziemer S, et al. Measurement and reversal of prophylactic and therapeutic peak levels of rivaroxaban: an in vitro study. Clin Appl Thromb Hemost 2014;20:735–40.

154. Fawole A, Daw HA, Crowther MA. Practical management of bleeding due to the anticoagulants dabigatran, rivaroxaban, and apixaban. Cleve Clin J Med 2013;80:443–51.

155. Siegal DM, Garcia DA, Crowther MA. How I treat target-specific oral anticoagulant-associated bleeding. Blood 2014;123:1152–8.

Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Issue
Journal of Clinical Outcomes Management - May 2015, VOL. 22, NO. 5
Publications
Publications
Topics
Article Type
Display Headline
Decision Making in Venous Thromboembolism
Display Headline
Decision Making in Venous Thromboembolism
Sections
Disallow All Ads
Content Gating
No Gating (article Unlocked/Free)
Alternative CME
Disqus Comments
Default